Statistics For Psychology Assignment Help

Statistics For Psychology

33

Central Tendency and Variability

Chapter Outline

✪ Central Tendency 34

✪ Variability 43

✪ Controversy: The Tyranny of the Mean 52

✪ Central Tendency and Variability in Research Articles 55

A s we noted in Chapter 1, the purpose of descriptive statistics is to make a group of scores understandable. We looked at some ways of getting that un- derstanding through tables and graphs. In this chapter, we consider the main

statistical techniques for describing a group of scores with numbers. First, you can describe a group of scores in terms of a representative (or typical) value, such as an average. A representative value gives the central tendency of a group of scores. A representative value is a simple way, with a single number, to describe a group of scores (and there may be hundreds or even thousands of scores). The main represen- tative value we consider is the mean. Next, we focus on ways of describing how spread out the numbers are in a group of scores. In other words, we consider the amount of variation, or variability, among the scores. The two measures of variabil- ity you will learn about are called the variance and standard deviation.

In this chapter, for the first time in this book, you will use statistical formulas. Such formulas are not here to confuse you. Hopefully, you will come to see that they actually simplify things and provide a very straightforward, concise way of describ- ing statistical procedures. To help you grasp what such formulas mean in words, whenever we present formulas in this book we always also give the “translation” in ordinary English.

✪ Summary 57

✪ Key Terms 57

✪ Example Worked-Out Problems 57

✪ Practice Problems 59

✪ Using SPSS 62

✪ Chapter Notes 65

CHAPTER 2

T I P F O R S U C C E S S Before beginning this chapter, you should be sure you are comfort- able with the key terms of variable, score, and value that we consid- ered in Chapter 1.

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

34 Chapter 2

Central Tendency The central tendency of a group of scores (a distribution) refers to the middle of the group of scores. You will learn about three measures of central tendency: mean, mode, and median. Each measure of central tendency uses its own method to come up with a single number describing the middle of a group of scores. We start with the mean, the most commonly used measure of central tendency. Understanding the mean is also an important foundation for much of what you learn in later chapters.

The Mean Usually the best measure of central tendency is the ordinary average, the sum of all the scores divided by the number of scores. In statistics, this is called the mean. The average, or mean, of a group of scores is a representative value.

Suppose 10 students, as part of a research study, record the total number of dreams they had during the last week. The numbers of dreams were as follows:

7, 8, 8, 7, 3, 1, 6, 9, 3, 8

The mean of these 10 scores is 6 (the sum of 60 dreams divided by 10 students). That is, on the average, each student had 6 dreams in the past week. The information for the 10 students is thus summarized by the single number 6.

You can think of the mean as a kind of balancing point for the distribution of scores. Try it by visualizing a board balanced over a log, like a rudimentary teeter- totter. Imagine piles of blocks set along the board according to their values, one for each score in the distribution (like a histogram made of blocks). The mean is the point on the board where the weight of the blocks on one side balances exactly with the weight on the other side. Figure 2–1 shows this for the number of dreams for the 10 students.

Mathematically, you can think of the mean as the point at which the total distance to all the scores above that point equals the total distance to all the scores below that point. Let’s first figure the total distance from the mean to all the scores above the mean for the dreams example shown in Figure 2–1. There are two scores of 7, each of which is 1 unit above 6 (the mean). There are three scores of 8, each of which is 2 units above 6. And, there is one score of 9, which is 3 units above 6. This gives a total distance of 11 units from the mean to all the scores above the mean. Now, let’s look at the scores below the mean. There are two scores of 3, each of which is 3 units below 6 (the mean). And there is one score of 1, which is 5 units below 6. This gives a total distance of 11 units from the mean to all of the scores below the mean. Thus, you can see that the total distance from the mean to the scores above the mean is the same as the total distance from the mean to the scores below the mean. The scores above the mean balance out the scores below the mean (and vice-versa).

(3 + 3 + 5)

(1 + 1 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 3)

mean arithmetic average of a group of scores; sum of the scores divided by the number of scores.

5 6 7 8 91 2 3 4

M = 6

Figure 2–1 Mean of the distribution of the number of dreams during a week for 10 students, illustrated using blocks on a board balanced on a log.

central tendency typical or most representative value of a group of scores.

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 35

Some other examples are shown in Figure 2–2. Notice that there doesn’t have to be a block right at the balance point. That is, the mean doesn’t have to be a score ac- tually in the distribution. The mean is the average of the scores, the balance point. The mean can be a decimal number, even if all the scores in the distribution have to be whole numbers (a mean of 2.30 children, for example). For each distribution in Figure 2–2, the total distance from the mean to the scores above the mean is the same as the total distance from the mean to the scores below the mean. (By the way, this analogy to blocks on a board, in reality, works out precisely only if the board has no weight of its own.)

Formula for the Mean and Statistical Symbols The rule for figuring the mean is to add up all the scores and divide by the number of scores. Here is how this rule is written as a formula:

(2–1)

M is a symbol for the mean. An alternative symbol, (“X-bar”), is sometimes used. However, M is almost always used in research articles in psychology, as rec- ommended by the style guidelines of the American Psychological Association (2001). You will see used mostly in advanced statistics books and in articles about statistics. In fact, there is not a general agreement for many of the symbols used in statistics. (In this book we generally use the symbols most widely found in psychol- ogy research articles.) S, the capital Greek letter sigma, is the symbol for “sum of.” It means “add up

all the numbers for whatever follows.” It is the most common special arithmetic symbol used in statistics.

X stands for the scores in the distribution of the variable X. We could have picked any letter. However, if there is only one variable, it is usually called X. In later chapters we use formulas with more than one variable. In those formulas, we use a second letter along with X (usually Y ) or subscripts (such as and ).

is “the sum of X.” This tells you to add up all the scores in the distribution of the variable X. Suppose X is the number of dreams of our 10 students: X is

, which is 60.7 + 8 + 8 + 7 + 3 + 1 + 6 + 9 + 3 + 8 ©

©X X2X1

X

X

M = gX

N

M mean.

5 6 7 8 91 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 91 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 91 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 91 2 3 4

M = 6

M = 3.60

M = 6

M = 6

Figure 2–2 Means of various distributions illustrated with blocks on a board balanced on a log.

The mean is the sum of the scores divided by the number of scores.

S sum of; add up all the scores follow- ing this symbol.

X scores in the distribution of the variable X.

T I P F O R S U C C E S S Think of each formula as a statisti- cal recipe, with statistical symbols as ingredients. Before you use each formula, be sure you know what each symbol stands for. Then carefully follow the formula to come up with the end result.

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

36 Chapter 2

N stands for number—the number of scores in a distribution. In our example, there are 10 scores. Thus, N equals 10.1

Overall, the formula says to divide the sum of all the scores in the distribution of the variable X by the total number of scores, N. In the dreams example, this means you divide 60 by 10. Put in terms of the formula,

Additional Examples of Figuring the Mean Consider the examples from Chapter 1. The stress ratings of the 30 students in the first week of their statistics class (based on Aron et al., 1995) were:

8, 7, 4, 10, 8, 6, 8, 9, 9, 7, 3, 7, 6, 5, 0, 9, 10, 7, 7, 3, 6, 7, 5, 2, 1, 6, 7, 10, 8, 8

In Chapter 1 we summarized all these numbers into a frequency table (Table 1–3). You can now summarize all this information as a single number by figuring the mean. Figure the mean by adding up all the stress ratings and dividing by the num- ber of stress ratings. That is, you add up the 30 stress ratings:

, for a total of 193. Then you divide this total by the number of scores, 30. In terms of the formula,

This tells you that the average stress rating was 6.43 (after rounding off). This is clearly higher than the middle of the 0–10 scale. You can also see this on a graph. Think again of the histogram as a pile of blocks on a board and the mean of 6.43 as the point where the board balances on the fulcrum (see Figure 2–3). This single rep- resentative value simplifies the information in the 30 stress scores.

M = gX

N =

193

30 = 6.43

7 + 5 + 2 + 1 + 6 + 7 + 10 + 8 + 8 8 + 6 + 8 + 9 + 9 + 7 + 3 + 7 + 6 + 5 + 0 + 9 + 10 + 7 + 7 + 3 + 6 +

8 + 7 + 4 + 10 +

M = gX

N =

60

10 = 6

N number of scores in a distribution.

T I P F O R S U C C E S S When an answer is not a whole number, we suggest that you use two more decimal places in the an- swer than for the original numbers. In this example, the original num- bers did not use decimals, so we rounded the answer to two deci- mal places.

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Balance Point

F re

qu en

cy

6.43Stress Rating

Figure 2–3 Analogy of blocks on a board balanced on a fulcrum showing the means for 30 statistics students’ ratings of their stress level. (Data based on Aron et al., 1995.)

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 37

Similarly, consider the Chapter 1 example of students’ social interactions (McLaughlin-Volpe et al., 2001). The actual number of interactions over a week for the 94 students are listed on page 8. In Chapter 1, we organized the original scores into a frequency table (see Table 1–5). We can now take those same 94 scores, add them up, and divide by 94 to figure the mean:

This tells us that during this week these students had an average of 17.39 social in- teractions. Figure 2–4 shows the mean of 17.39 as the balance point for the 94 social interaction scores.

Steps for Figuring the Mean Figure the mean in two steps.

❶ Add up all the scores. That is, figure ΣX. ❷ Divide this sum by the number of scores. That is, divide ΣX by N.

The Mode The mode is another measure of central tendency. The mode is the most common single value in a distribution. In our dreams example, the mode is 8. This is because there are three students with 8 dreams and no other number of dreams with as many students. Another way to think of the mode is that it is the value with the largest frequency in a frequency table, the high point or peak of a distribution’s histogram (as shown in Figure 2–5).

M = gX

N =

1,635

94 = 17.39

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0 2.5 7.5 12.5 22.5 27.5 42.5 47.5

Number of Social Interactions in a Week

F re

qu en

cy

32.5 37.517.5

Balance Point

17.39

Figure 2–4 Analogy of blocks on a board balanced on a fulcrum illustrating the mean for number of social interactions during a week for 94 college students. (Data from McLaughlin-Volpe et al., 2001.)

mode value with the greatest frequency in a distribution.

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

38 Chapter 2

In a perfectly symmetrical unimodal distribution, the mode is the same as the mean. However, what happens when the mean and the mode are not the same? In that situation, the mode is usually not a very good way of describing the central ten- dency of the scores in the distribution. In fact, sometimes researchers compare the mode to the mean to show that the distribution is not perfectly symmetrical. Also, the mode can be a particularly poor representative value because it does not reflect many aspects of the distribution. For example, you can change some of the scores in a distribution without affecting the mode—but this is not true of the mean, which is affected by any change in the distribution (see Figure 2–6).

5 6 7 8 91 2 3 4

Mode = 8

Figure 2–5 Mode as the high point in a distribution’s histogram, using the example of the number of dreams during a week for 10 students.

115 6 7 8 9 102 3 4

5 6 7 8 9 102 3 4

5 6 7 8 9 102 3 4

Mean = 8.30

Mode = 8

Mean = 5.10

Mode = 8

Mode = 8

Mean = 7

Figure 2–6 Effect on the mean and on the mode of changing some scores, using the example of the number of dreams during a week for 10 students.

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 39

7 7633 98881

Median

Figure 2–7 The median is the middle score when scores are lined up from lowest to highest, using the example of the number of dreams during a week for 10 students.

T I P F O R S U C C E S S When figuring the median, remem- ber that the first step is to line up the scores from lowest to highest. Forgetting to do this is the most common mistake students make when figuring the median.

median middle score when all the scores in a distribution are arranged from lowest to highest.

outlier score with an extreme value (very high or very low) in relation to the other scores in the distribution.

On the other hand, the mode is the usual way of describing the central tendency for a nominal variable. For example, if you know the religions of a particular group of people, the mode tells you which religion is the most frequent. However, when it comes to the numerical variables that are most common in psychology research, the mode is rarely used.

The Median Another alternative to the mean is the median. If you line up all the scores from low- est to highest, the middle score is the median. Figure 2–7 shows the scores for the number of dreams lined up from lowest to highest. In this example, the fifth and sixth scores (the two middle ones) are both 7s. Either way, the median is 7.

When you have an even number of scores, the median is between two different scores. In that situation, the median is the average (the mean) of the two scores.

Steps for Finding the Median Finding the median takes three steps.

❶ Line up all the scores from lowest to highest. ❷ Figure how many scores there are to the middle score by adding 1 to the num-

ber of scores and dividing by 2. For example, with 29 scores, adding 1 and divid- ing by 2 gives you 15. The 15th score is the middle score. If there are 50 scores, adding 1 and dividing by 2 gives you 251⁄2. Because there are no half scores, the 25th and 26th scores (the scores on either side of 251⁄2) are the middle scores.

❸ Count up to the middle score or scores. If you have one middle score, this is the median. If you have two middle scores, the median is the average (the mean) of these two scores.

Comparing the Mean, Mode, and Median Sometimes, the median is better than the mean (and mode) as a representative value for a group of scores. This happens when a few extreme scores would strongly affect the mean but would not affect the median. Reaction time scores are a common example in psychology research. Suppose you are asked to press a key as quickly as possible when a green circle is shown on the computer screen. On five showings of the green circle, your times (in seconds) to respond are .74, .86, 2.32, .79, and .81. The mean of these five scores is 1.1040: that is, . However, this mean is very much influenced by the one very long time (2.32 seconds). (Perhaps you were dis- tracted just when the green circle was shown.) The median is much less affected by the extreme score. The median of these five scores is .81—a value that is much more rep- resentative of most of the scores. Thus, using the median deemphasizes the one ex- treme time, which is probably appropriate. An extreme score like this is called an outlier. In this example, the outlier was much higher than the other scores, but in other cases an outlier may be much lower than the other scores in the distribution.

(©X)>N = 5.52> 5 = 1.1040

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

40 Chapter 2

The importance of whether you use the mean, mode, or median can be seen in a controversy among psychologists studying the evolutionary basis of human mate choice. One set of theorists (e.g., Buss & Schmitt, 1993) argue that over their lives, men should prefer to have many partners, but women should prefer to have just one reliable partner. This is because a woman can have only a small number of children in a lifetime and her genes are most likely to survive if those few children are well taken care of. Men, however, can have a great many children in a lifetime. Therefore, according to the theory, a shotgun approach is best for men, because their genes are most likely to survive if they have a great many partners. Consistent with this assumption, evolutionary psycholo- gists have found that men report wanting far more partners than do women.

Other theorists (e.g., Miller & Fishkin, 1997), however, have questioned this view. They argue that women and men should prefer about the same number of partners. This is because individuals with a basic predisposition to seek a strong intimate bond are most likely to survive infancy. This desire for strong bonds, they argue, remains in adulthood. These theorists also asked women and men how many partners they wanted. They found the same result as the previous researchers when using the mean: men wanted an average of 64.3 partners, women an average of 2.8 partners. However, the picture looks drastically different if you look at the median or mode (see Table 2–1). Figure 2–8, taken directly from their article, shows why. Most women and most men want just one partner. A few want more, some many more. The big difference is that

P er

ce nt

ag e

of M

en a

nd W

om en

– – – –

60 – – – – –

50 – – – – –

40 – – – – –

30 – – – – –

20 – – – – –

10 – – – – –

0 – – 0 – 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 9 – 10 –

11 –2

0 – 21

–3 0 –

31 –4

0 – 41

–5 0 –

51 –6

0 – 61

–7 0 –

71 –8

0 – 81

–9 0 –

91 –1

00 –

10 0–

10 00

– 10

01 –1

00 00

Women %

Men %

Number of Partners Desired in the Next 30 Years

Women 2.8 1

Men 64.3 1

Mean Median

Measures of central tendency

Figure 2–8 Distributions for men and women for the ideal number of partners desired over 30 years. Note: To include all the data, we collapsed across categories farther out on the tail of these distributions. If every category represented a single number, it would be more apparent that the tail is very flat and that distributions are even more skewed than is apparent here.

Source: Miller, L. C., & Fishkin, S. A. (1997). On the dynamics of human bonding and reproductive suc- cess: Seeking windows on the adapted-for-human-environmental interface. In J. Simpson & D. T. Kenrick (Eds.), Evolutionary social psychology (pp. 197–235). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.

Table 2–1 Responses of 106 Men and 160 Women to the Question, “How many partners would you ideally desire in the next 30 years?”

Mean Median Mode

Women 2.8 1 1

Men 64.3 1 1

Source: Data from Miller & Fishkin (1997).

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 41

there are a lot more men in the small group that want many more than one partner. These results were also replicated in a more recent study (Pedersen et al., 2002).

So which theory is right? You could argue either way from these results. The point is that focusing just on the mean can clearly misrepresent the reality of the distribution. As this example shows, the median is most likely to be used when a few extreme scores would make the mean unrepresentative of the main body of scores. Figure 2–9 illustrates this point, by showing the relative location of the mean, mode, and median for three types of distribution that you learned about in Chapter 1. The distribution in Figure 2–9a is skewed to the left (negatively skewed); the long tail of the distribution points to the left. The mode in this distribution is the highest point of the distribution, which is on the far right hand side of the distribution. The median is the point at which half of the scores are above that point and half are below. As you can see, for that to happen, the median must be a lower value than the mode. Finally, the mean is strongly influenced by the very low scores in the long tail of the distribution and is thus a lower value than the median. Figure 2–9b shows the location of the mean, mode, and median for a distribution that is skewed to the right (positively skewed). In this case, the mean is a higher value than either the mode or median because the mean is strongly influ- enced by the very high scores in the long tail of the distribution. Again, the mode is the highest point of the distribution, and the median is between the mode and the mean. In Figures 2–9a and 2–9b, the mean is not a good representative value of the scores, because it is unduly influenced by the extreme scores.

Mean Median Mode

MeanMedianMode

Mean Mode

Median

(a)

(b)

(c)

Figure 2–9 Locations of the mean, mode, and median on (a) a distribution skewed to the left, (b) a distribution skewed to the right, and (c) a normal curve.

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

42 Chapter 2

Figure 2–9c shows a normal curve. As for any distribution, the mode is the high- est point in the distribution. For a normal curve, the highest point falls exactly at the midpoint of the distribution. This midpoint is the median value, since half of the scores in the distribution are below that point and half are above it. The mean also falls at the same point because the normal curve is symmetrical about the midpoint, and every score in the left hand side of the curve has a matching score on the right hand side. So, for a normal curve, the mean, mode, and median are always the same value.

In some situations psychologists use the median as part of more complex statis- tical methods. Also, the median is the usual way of describing the central tendency for a rank-order variable. Otherwise, unless there are extreme scores, psychologists almost always use the mean as the representative value of a group of scores. In fact, as you will learn, the mean is a fundamental building block for most other statistical techniques.

A summary of the mean, mode, and median as measures of central tendency is shown in Table 2–2.

Table 2–2 Summary of Measures of Central Tendency

Measure Definition When Used

How are you doing?

1. Name and define three measures of central tendency. 2. Write the formula for the mean and define each of the symbols. 3. Figure the mean of the following scores: 2, 8, 3, 6, and 6. 4. For the following scores find (a) the mean, (b) the mode, and (c) the median: 5,

3, 2, 13, 2. (d) Why is the mean different from the median?

Answers

1.The mean is the ordinary average, the sum of the scores divided by the num- ber of scores. The mode is the most frequent score in a distribution. The me- dian is the middle score; that is, if you line the scores up from lowest to highest, it is the halfway score.

2.The formula for the mean is is the mean; is the symbol for “sum of”—add up all the scores that follow; Xis the variable whose scores you are adding up; Nis the number of scores.

3.. 4.(a) The mean is 5; (b) the mode is 2; (c) the median is 3; (d) The mean is differ-

ent from the median because the extreme score (13) makes the mean higher than the median.

M=(©X)>N=(2+8+3+6+6)>5=5

g M=(©X)>N. M

Mean Sum of the scores divided by the number of scores

• With equal-interval variables • Very commonly used in psychology

research

Mode Value with the greatest frequency in a distribution

• With nominal variables • Rarely used in psychology research

Median Middle score when all the scores in a distribution are arranged from lowest to highest

• With rank-ordered variables • When a distribution has one or more

outliers • Rarely used in psychology research

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 43

(a) (b)

1.70 Mean

^ 3.20

Mean

^

3.20 Mean

^

3.20 Mean

^ 2.50

Mean

^

3.20 Mean

^

Figure 2–10 Examples of distributions with (a) the same mean but different amounts of spread, and (b) different means but the same amount of spread.

Variability Researchers also want to know how spread out the scores are in a distribution. This shows the amount of variability in the distribution. For example, suppose you were asked, “How old are the students in your statistics class?” At a city-based university with many returning and part-time students, the mean age might be 29. You could answer, “The average age of the students in my class is 29.” However, this would not tell the whole story. You could have a mean of 29 because every student in the class was exactly 29 years old. If this is the case, the scores in the distribution are not spread out at all. In other words, there is no variation, or variability, among the scores. You could also have a mean of 29 because exactly half the class members were 19 and the other half 39. In this situation, the distribution is much more spread out; there is considerable variability among the scores in the distribution.

You can think of the variability of a distribution as the amount of spread of the scores around the mean. Distributions with the same mean can have very different amounts of spread around the mean; Figure 2–10a shows histograms for three differ- ent frequency distributions with the same mean but different amounts of spread around the mean. A real-life example of this is shown in Figure 2–11, which shows the distributions of the housing prices in two neighborhoods: one with diverse hous- ing types and the other with a consistent type of housing. As with Figure 2–10a, the mean housing price is the same in each neighborhood. However, the distribution for

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

44 Chapter 2

MeanHousing Prices

Neighborhood with Consistent Type of Housing

MeanHousing Prices

Neighborhood with Diverse Types of Housing

Figure 2–11 Example of two distributions with the same mean but different amounts of spread: housing prices for a neighborhood with diverse types of housing and for a neigh- borhood with a consistent type of housing.

variance measure of how spread out a set of scores are; average of the squared deviations from the mean.

deviation score score minus the mean.

squared deviation score square of the difference between a score and the mean.

the neighborhood with diverse housing types is much more spread out around the mean than the distribution for the neighborhood that has a consistent type of housing. This tells you that there is much greater variability in the prices of housing in the neighborhood with diverse types of housing than in the neighborhood with a consis- tent housing type. Also, distributions with different means can have the same amount of spread around the mean. Figure 2–10b shows three different distributions with dif- ferent means but the same amount of spread. So, while the mean provides a represen- tative value of a group of scores, it doesn’t tell you about the variability of the scores. You will now learn about two measures of the variability of a group of scores: the variance and standard deviation.2

The Variance The variance of a group of scores tells you how spread out the scores are around the mean. To be precise, the variance is the average of each score’s squared difference from the mean.

Here are the four steps to figure the variance:

❶ Subtract the mean from each score. This gives each score’s deviation score, which is how far away the score is from the mean.

❷ Square each of these deviation scores (multiply each by itself). This gives each score’s squared deviation score.

❸ Add up the squared deviation scores. This total is called the sum of squared deviations.

❹ Divide the sum of squared deviations by the number of scores. This gives the average (the mean) of the squared deviations, called the variance.

Suppose one distribution is more spread out than another. The more spread-out distribution has a larger variance because being spread out makes the deviation scores bigger. If the deviation scores are bigger, the squared deviation scores and the average of the squared deviation scores (the variance) are also bigger.

sum of squared deviations total of all the scores of each score’s squared dif- ference from the mean.

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 45

In the example of the class in which everyone was exactly 29 years old, the variance would be exactly 0. That is, there would be no variance (which makes sense, because there is no variability among the ages). (In terms of the numbers, each person’s deviation score would be ; 0 squared is 0. The average of a bunch of zeros is 0.) By contrast, the class of half 19-year-olds and half 39- year-olds would have a rather large variance of 100. (The 19-year-olds would each have deviation scores of . The 39-year-olds would have deviation scores of . All the squared deviation scores, which are either squared or 10 squared, come out to 100. The average of all 100s is 100.)

The variance is extremely important in many statistical procedures you will learn about later. However, the variance is rarely used as a descriptive statistic. This is be- cause the variance is based on squared deviation scores, which do not give a very easy-to-understand sense of how spread out the actual, nonsquared scores are. For ex- ample, a class with a variance of 400 clearly has a more spread-out distribution than one whose variance is 10. However, the number 400 does not give an obvious insight into the actual variation among the ages, none of which is anywhere near 400.3

The Standard Deviation The most widely used way of describing the spread of a group of scores is the standard deviation. The standard deviation is directly related to the variance and is figured by taking the square root of the variance. There are two steps in figuring the standard deviation.

❶ Figure the variance. ❷ Take the square root. The standard deviation is the positive square root of the

variance. (Any number has both a positive and a negative square root. For ex- ample, the square root of 9 is both and .)

If the variance of a distribution is 400, the standard deviation is 20. If the vari- ance is 9, the standard deviation is 3.

The variance is about squared deviations from the mean. Therefore, its square root, the standard deviation, is about direct, ordinary, not-squared deviations from the mean. Roughly speaking, the standard deviation is the average amount that scores differ from the mean. For example, consider a class where the ages have a standard deviation of 20 years. This tells you that the ages are spread out, on the average, about 20 years in each direction from the mean. Knowing the standard deviation gives you a general sense of the degree of spread.4

The standard deviation does not, however, perfectly describe the shape of the distribution. For example, suppose the distribution of the number of children in fam- ilies in a particular country has a mean of 4 and standard deviation of 1. Figure 2–12 shows several possibilities of the distribution of number of children, all with a mean of 4 and a standard deviation of 1.

Formulas for the Variance and the Standard Deviation We have seen that the variance is the average squared deviation from the mean. Here is the formula for the variance.

(2–2)SD2 = g(X – M)2

N

– 3+ 3

– 1039 – 29 = 10 19 – 29 = – 10

29 – 29 = 0

standard deviation square root of the average of the squared deviations from the mean; the most common descriptive statistic for variation; approximately the average amount that scores in a distribu- tion vary from the mean.

The variance is the sum of the squared deviations of the scores from the mean, divided by the number of scores.

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

46 Chapter 2

SD2 variance.

SD standard deviation. SD2 is the symbol for the variance. This may seem surprising. SD is short for

standard deviation. The symbol SD2 emphasizes that the variance is the standard devi- ation squared. (Later, you will learn other symbols for the variance, S 2 and —the lowercase Greek letter sigma squared. The different symbols are for different situa- tions in which the variance is used. In some cases, it is figured slightly differently.)

The top part of the formula is the sum of squared deviations. X is for each score and M is the mean. Thus, X – M is the score minus the mean, the deviation score. The superscript number (2) tells you to square each deviation score. Finally, the sum sign (Σ) tells you to add up all these squared deviation scores.

The sum of squared deviations of the scores from the mean, which is called the sum of squares for short, has its own symbol, SS. Thus, the variance formula can be written using SS instead of Σ(X – M)2:

(2–3)

Whether you use the simplified symbol SS or the full description of the sum of squared deviations, the bottom part of the formula is just N, the number of scores.

SD2 = SS

N

�2sum of squares (SS) sum of squared deviations.

T I P F O R S U C C E S S The sum of squared deviations is an important part of many of the procedures you learn in later chap- ters; so be sure you fully under- stand it, as well as how it is figured.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Figure 2–12 Some possible distributions for family size in a country where the mean is 4 and the standard deviation is 1.

The variance is the sum of squares divided by the number of scores. ISB

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 47

That is, the formula says to divide the sum of the squared deviation scores by the number of scores in the distribution.

The standard deviation is the square root of the variance. So, if you already know the variance, the formula is

(2–4)

The formula for the standard deviation, starting from scratch, is the square root of what you figure for the variance:

(2–5)

or

(2–6)

Examples of Figuring the Variance and Standard Deviation Table 2–3 shows the figuring for the variance and standard deviation for the number of dreams example. (The table assumes you have already figured the mean to be 6 dreams.) Usually, it is easiest to do your figuring using a calculator, especially one with a square root key. The standard deviation of 2.57 tells you that roughly speak- ing, on the average, the number of dreams vary by about 21⁄2 from the mean of 6.

Table 2–4 shows the figuring for the variance and standard deviation for the example of students’ number of social interactions during a week (McLaughlin- Volpe et al., 2001). (To save space, the table shows only the first few and last few scores.) Roughly speaking, this result tells you that a student’s number of social in- teractions in a week varies from the mean (of 17.39) by an average of 11.49. This can also be shown on a histogram (see Figure 2–13).

Measures of variability, such as the variance and standard deviation, are heavily influenced by the presence of one or more outliers (extreme values) in a distribution.

SD = A SS

N

SD = B ©(X – M)2

N

SD = 2SD2

Table 2–3 Figuring the Variance and Standard Deviation in the Number of Dreams Example

Score (Number of

Dreams) �

Mean Score (Mean Number

of Dreams) � Deviation

Score

Squared Deviation

Score

7 6 1 1

8 6 2 4

8 6 2 4

7 6 1 1

3 6 9

1 6 25

6 6 0 0

9 6 3 9

3 6 9

8 6 2 4

66

Standard deviation = SD = 2SD 2 = 26.60 = 2.57 Variance = SD 2 =

g(X – M )2

N =

SS N

= 66 10

= 6.60

©: 0

– 3

– 5 – 3

The standard deviation is the square root of the variance.

The standard deviation is the square root of the result of taking the sum of the squared deviations of the scores from the mean divided by the number of scores.

The standard deviation is the square root of the result of taking the sum of squares divided by the number of scores.

T I P F O R S U C C E S S When figuring the variance and standard deviation, lay your work out as in Tables 2–3 and 2–4. This helps you follow all the steps and end up with the correct answers.

T I P F O R S U C C E S S Always check that your answers make intuitive sense. For example, looking at the scores for the dreams example, a standard deviation— which, roughly speaking, repre- sents the average amount that the scores vary from the mean—of 2.57 makes sense. If your answer had been 21.23, however, it would mean that, on average, the number of dreams varied by more than 20 from the mean of 6. Looking at the group of scores, that just couldn’t be true.

T I P F O R S U C C E S S Notice in Table 2–3 that the devia- tion scores (shown in the third col- umn) add up to 0. The sum of the deviation scores is always 0 (or very close to 0, allowing for round- ing error). So, to check your figur- ing, always sum the deviation scores. If they do not add up to 0, do your figuring again!

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

48 Chapter 2

Table 2–4 Figuring the Variance and Standard Deviation for Number of Social Interactions During a Week for 94 College Students

Number of Interactions �

Mean Number of Interactions �

Deviation Score

Squared Deviation

Score

48 17.39 30.61 936.97

15 17.39 5.71

33 17.39 15.61 243.67

3 17.39 207.07

21 17.39 3.61 13.03

– – – –

– – – –

– – – –

35 17.39 17.61 310.11 9 17.39 70.39

30 17.39 12.61 159.01

8 17.39 88.17

26 17.39 8.61 74.13

12,406.44

Source: Data from McLaughlin-Volpe et al. (2001).

Standard deviation = 2SD 2 = 2131.98 = 11.49 Variance = SD 2 =

g(X – M )2

N =

12,406.44 94

= 131.98

©: 0.00 – 9.39

– 8.39

– 14.39

– 2.39

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

2.5 7.5 12.5 17.5 22.5 27.5 32.5 37.5 42.5 47.5

Number of Social Interactions in a Week

F re

qu en

cy

^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^

M 1 SD

FREQUENCY 12 16 16 16 10 11 4 3 3 3

INTERVAL 0 – 4 5 – 9

10 – 14 15 – 19 20 – 24 25 – 29 30 – 34 35 – 39 40 – 44 45 – 49

1 SD

Figure 2–13 The standard deviation as the distance along the base of a histogram, using the example of number of social interactions in a week. (Data from McLaughlin-Volpe et al., 2001.)

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 49

T I P F O R S U C C E S S A common mistake when figuring the standard deviation is to jump straight from the sum of squared deviations to the standard devia- tion (by taking the square root of the sum of squared deviations). Remember, before finding the standard deviation, first figure the variance (by dividing the sum of squared deviations by the number of scores, N). Then take the square root of the variance to find the standard deviation.

The scores in the number of dreams example were 7, 8, 8, 7, 3, 1, 6, 9, 3, 8, and we figured the standard deviation of the scores to be 2.57. Now imagine that one addi- tional person is added to the study and that the person reports having 21 dreams in the past week. The standard deviation of the scores would now be 4.96, which is almost double the size of the standard deviation without this additional single score.

Computational and Definitional Formulas In actual research situations, psychologists must often figure the variance and the standard deviation for distributions with many scores, often involving decimals or large numbers. In the days before computers, this could make the whole process quite time-consuming, even with a calculator. To deal with this problem, in the old days researchers developed various shortcuts to simplify the figuring. A shortcut for- mula of this type is called a computational formula.

The traditional computational formula for the variance of the kind we are dis- cussing in this chapter is as follows:

(2–7)

means that you square each score and then take the sum of the squared scores. However, means that you first add up all the scores and then take the square of this sum. Although this sounds complicated, this formula was actually eas- ier to use than the one you learned before if a researcher was figuring the variance for a lot of numbers by hand or even with an old-fashioned handheld calculator, be- cause the researcher did not have to first find the deviation score for each score.

However, these days computational formulas are mainly of historical interest. They are used by researchers only on rare occasions when computers with statistics software are not readily available to do the figuring. In fact, today, even many hand- held calculators are set up so that you need only enter the scores and press a button or two to get the variance and the standard deviation.

In this book we give a few computational formulas just so that you have them if you someday do a research project with a lot of numbers and you don’t have access to statistical software. However, we very definitely recommend not using the computa- tional formulas when you are learning statistics, even if they might save you a few min- utes of figuring a practice problem. The computational formulas usually make it much harder to understand the meaning of what you are figuring. The only reason for figuring problems at all by hand when you are learning statistics is to reinforce the underlying principles. Thus, you would be undermining the whole point of the practice problems if you use a formula that had a complex relation to the basic logic. The formulas we give you for the practice problems and for all the examples in the book are designed to help strengthen your understanding of what the figuring means. Thus, the usual formula we give for each procedure is what statisticians call a definitional formula.

The Importance of Variability in Psychology Research Variability is an important topic in psychology research because much of the re- search focuses on explaining variability. We will use a couple of examples to show what we mean by “explaining variability.” As you might imagine, different students experience different levels of stress with regard to learning statistics: Some experi- ence little stress; for other students, learning statistics can be a source of great stress. So, in this example, explaining variability means identifying the factors that explain why students differ in the amount of stress they experience. Perhaps how much experience students have had with math explains some of the variability. That is,

(©X)2 ©X2

SD2 = gX2 – A AgX B 2 > N B

N

computational formula equation mathematically equivalent to the defini- tional formula. Easier to use for figuring by hand, it does not directly show the meaning of the procedure.

definitional formula equation for a statistical procedure directly showing the meaning of the procedure.

The variance is the sum of the squared scores minus the result of taking the sum of all the scores, squaring this sum and dividing by the number of scores, then taking this whole difference and dividing it by the number of scores.

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

50 Chapter 2

according to this explanation, the differences (the variability) among students in amount of stress are partially due to the differences (the variability) among students in the amount of experience they have had with math. Thus, the variation in math experience partially explains, or accounts for, the variation in stress. What factors might explain the variation in students’ number of weekly social interactions? Per- haps a factor is variation in the extraversion of students, with more extraverted stu- dents tending to have more interactions. Or perhaps it is variation in gender, with one gender having consistently more interactions than the other. Much of the rest of this book focuses on procedures for evaluating and testing whether variation in some specific factor (or factors) explains the variability in some variable of interest.

The Variance as the Sum of Squared Deviations Divided by Researchers often use a slightly different kind of variance. We have defined the vari- ance as the average of the squared deviation scores. Using that definition, you divide the sum of the squared deviation scores by the number of scores (that is, the variance is SS�N). But you will learn in Chapter 7 that for many purposes it is better to define the variance as the sum of squared deviation scores divided by 1 less than the number of scores. In other words, for those purposes the variance is the sum of squared deviations divided by (that is, variance is SS�[ ]). (As you will learn in Chapter 7, you use this dividing by approach when you have scores from a particular group of people and you want to estimate what the variance would be for the larger group of people whom these individuals represent.)

The variances and standard deviations given in research articles are usually fig- ured using SS�( ). Also, when calculators or computers give the variance or the standard deviation automatically, they are usually figured in this way (for exam- ple, see the Using SPSS section at the end of this chapter). But don’t worry. The ap- proach you are learning in this chapter of dividing by N (that is, figuring variance as SS�N) is entirely correct for our purpose here, which is to use descriptive statistics to describe the variation in a particular group of scores. It is also entirely correct for the material you learn in Chapters 3 through 6. We mention this other approach (vari- ance as SS�[ ]) now only so that you will not be confused if you read about variance or standard deviation in other places or if your calculator or a computer pro- gram gives a surprising result. To keep things simple, we wait to discuss the dividing by approach until it is needed, starting in Chapter 7. N – 1

N – 1

N – 1

N – 1 N – 1N – 1

N � 1

How are you doing?

1. (a) Define the variance and (b) indicate what it tells you about a distribution and how this is different from what the mean tells you.

2. (a) Define the standard deviation; (b) describe its relation to the variance; and (c) explain what it tells you approximately about a group of scores.

3. Give the full formula for the variance and indicate what each of the symbols means.

4. Figure the (a) variance and (b) standard deviation for the following scores: 2, 4, 3, and 7 ( ).

5. Explain the difference between a definitional and a computational formula. 6. What is the difference between the formula for the variance you learned in this

chapter and the formula that is typically used to figure the variance in re- search articles?

M = 4

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 51

Answers

1.(a) The variance is the average of the squared deviation of each score from the mean. (b) The variance tells you about how spread out the scores are (that is, their variability), while the mean tells you the central tendency of the distribution.

2.(a) The standard deviation is the square root of the average of the squared de- viations from the mean. (b) The standard deviation is the square root of the variance. (c) The standard deviation tells you approximately the average amount that scores differ from the mean.

3.is the variance.means the sum of what follows. Xis for the scores for the variable being studied. Mis the mean of the scores. Nis the number of scores.

4. (a)Variance:

(b) Standard deviation: 5.A definitional formula is the standard formula in the straightforward form that

shows the meaning of what the formula is figuring. A computational formula is a mathematically equivalent variation of the definitional formula, but the com- putational formula tends not to show the underlying meaning. Computational formulas were often used before computers were available and researchers had to do their figuring by hand with a lot of scores.

6.The formula for the variance in this chapter divides the sum of squares by the number of scores (that is, SS�N). The variance in research articles is usually figured by dividing the sum of squares by one less than the number of scores (that is, SS�[]). N-1

SD=2SD 2

=23.50=1.87. 14>4=3.50. (7-4)

2 ]>4=

SD 2 =[©(X-M)

2 ]>N=[(2-4)

2 +(4-4)

2 +(3-4)

2 +

© SD 2

=[©1X-M2 2 ]>N. SD

2

You are learning statistics for the fun of it, right? No? Or maybe so, after all. If you become a psychologist, at some time or other you will form a hypothesis, gather data, and analyze them. (Even if you plan a career as a psychother- apist or other mental health practitioner, you will proba- bly eventually wish to test an idea about the nature of your patients and their difficulties.) That hypothesis— your own original idea—and the data you gather to test it are going to be very important to you. Your heart may well be pounding with excitement as you analyze the data.

Consider some of the comments of social psycholo- gists we interviewed for our book The Heart of Social Psychology (Aron & Aron, 1989). Deborah Richardson, who studies interpersonal relationships, confided that her favorite part of being a social psychologist is looking at the statistical output of the computer analyses:

It’s like putting together a puzzle. . . . It’s a highly arous- ing, positive experience for me. I often go through periods

of euphoria. Even when the data don’t do what I want them to do . . . [there’s a] physiological response. . . . It’s exciting to see the numbers come off—Is it actually the way I thought it would be?—then thinking about the alternatives.

Harry Reis, former editor of the Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, sees his profession the same way:

By far the most rewarding part is when you get a new data set and start analyzing it and things pop out, partly a confirmation of what led you into the study in the first place, but then also other things. . . . “Why is that?” Trying to make sense of it. The kind of ideas that come from data. . . . I love analyzing data.

Bibb Latane, an eminent psychologist known for, among other things, his work on why people don’t al- ways intervene to help others who are in trouble, reports eagerly awaiting

B O X 2 – 1 The Sheer Joy (Yes, Joy) of Statistical Analysis

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

52 Chapter 2

Controversy: The Tyranny of the Mean Looking in the behavioral and social science research journals, you would think that statistical methods are their sole tool and language, but there have also been rebel- lions against the reign of statistics. We are most familiar with this issue in psychology, where the most unexpected opposition came from the leader of behaviorism, the school of psychology most dedicated to keeping the field strictly scientific.

Behaviorism opposed the study of inner states because inner events are impossi- ble to observe objectively. (Today most research psychologists claim to measure inner events indirectly but objectively.) Behaviorism’s most famous advocate, B. F. Skinner, was quite opposed to statistics. Skinner even said, “I would much rather see a graduate student in psychology taking a course in physical chemistry than in statistics. And I would include [before statistics] other sciences, even poetry, music, and art” (Evans, 1976, p. 93).

Skinner was constantly pointing to the information lost by averaging the results of a number of cases. For instance, Skinner (1956) cited the example of three overeating mice—one naturally obese, one poisoned with gold, and one whose hy- pothalamus had been altered. Each had a different curve for learning to press a bar for food. If these learning curves had been summed or merged statistically, the result would have represented no actual eating habits of any real mouse. As Skinner said, “These three individual curves contain more information than could probably ever be generated with measures requiring statistical treatment, yet they will be viewed with suspicion by many psychologists because they are single cases” (p. 232).

In clinical psychology and the study of personality, voices have always been raised in favor of the in-depth study of one person instead of or as well as the aver- aging of persons. The philosophical underpinnings of the in-depth study of individ- uals can be found in phenomenology, which began in Europe after World War I (Husserl, 1970). This viewpoint has been important throughout the social sciences, not just in psychology.

Today, the rebellion in psychology is led by qualitative research methodologists (e.g., McCracken, 1988), an approach that is much more prominent in other behav- ioral and social sciences. The qualitative research methods, developed mainly in an- thropology, can involve long interviews or observations of a few individuals. The highly skilled researcher decides, as the event is taking place, what is important to remember, record, and pursue through more questions or observations. The mind of the researcher is the main tool because, according to this approach, only that mind can find the important relationships among the many categories of events arising in the respondent’s speech.

Many who favor qualitative methods argue for a blend: First, discover the im- portant categories through a qualitative approach. Then, determine their incidence in

. . . the first glimmerings of what came out . . . [and] using them to shape what the next question should be . . . You need to use everything you’ve got, . . . every bit of your experience and intuition. It’s where you have the biggest effect, it’s the least routine. You’re in the room with the tiger, face to face with the core of what you are doing, at the moment of truth.

Bill Graziano, whose work integrates developmental, personality, and social psychology, calls the analysis of his data “great fun, just great fun.” And in the same vein, Margaret Clark, who studies emotion and cognition, de- clares that “the most fun of all is getting the data and looking at them.”

So you see? Statistics in the service of your own cre- ative ideas can be a pleasure indeed.

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 53

the larger population through quantitative methods. Too often, these advocates argue, quantitative researchers jump to conclusions about a phenomenon without first exploring the human experience of it through free-response interviews or observations.

Finally, Carl Jung, founder of Jungian psychology, sometimes spoke of the “sta- tistical mood” and its effect on a person’s feeling of uniqueness. Jung had no prob- lem with statistics—he used them in his own research. He was concerned about the cultural impact of this “statistical mood”—much like the impact of being on a jammed subway and observing the hundreds of blank faces and feeling diminished, “one of a crowd.” He held that the important contributions to culture tend to come from people who feel unique and not ordinary. As we increasingly describe our- selves statistically—“90% of men under thirty think . . .”—we tend to do just that, think like 90% of men under thirty. To counteract this mood, Jungian analyst Marie Louise von Franz (1979) wrote, “An act of loyalty is required towards one’s own feelings” (pp. IV-18). Feeling “makes your life and your relationships and deeds feel unique and gives them a definite value” (pp. IV-18–IV-19). Your beloved is like no one else. Your own death is a face behind a door. And the meaning of ‘civilian deaths this month due to the war were 20,964’ is unfathomable horror—not a number.

In short, there have been many who have questioned an exclusively statistical view of our subject matter, and their voices should be considered too as you proceed with your study of what has become the predominant, but not exclusive, means of doing psychology research.

B O X 2 – 2 Gender, Ethnicity, and Math Performance From time to time, someone tries to argue that because some groups of people score better on math tests and make careers out of mathematics, these groups have a genetic advantage in math (or statistics). Other groups are said or implied to be innately inferior at math. The issue comes up about gender, about racial and ethnic groups, and of course in arguments about overall intelli- gence as well as math. There’s little evidence for such genetic differences (a must-see article is Block, 1995), but the stereotypes persist.

The impact of these stereotypes has been well estab- lished in research by Steele and his colleagues (1997), who have done numerous studies on what they call “stereo- type threat.” This phenomenon occurs when a negative stereotype about a group you belong to becomes relevant to you because of the situation you are in, like taking a math test, and provides an explanation for how you will behave. A typical experiment creating stereotype threat (Spencer et al., 1999) involved women taking a difficult math test. Half were told that men generally do better on the test, and the other half that women generally do equally well. Those who were told that women do worse did indeed score substantially lower than the other group. In the other condition, there was no difference. (In fact, in

two separate studies, men performed a little worse when they were told there was no gender difference, as if they had lost some of their confidence.)

The same results occur when African Americans are given parts of the graduate record examination. They do fine on the test when they are told no racial differences in the scores have been found, and they do worse when they are told that such differences have been found (Steele, 1997).

Stereotype threat has also been found to occur in the United States for Latinos (Gonzales et al., 2002) and the poor (Croizet & Claire, 1998). Many lines of research in- dicate that prejudices, not genetics, are the probable cause of differences in test scores between groups. Al- though some researchers (Rushton & Jensen, 2005) con- tinue to argue for genetic differences, the evidence is still substantial that stereotype threat plays the main role in lower test scores (Suzuki & Aronson, 2005). For exam- ple, the same difference of 15 IQ points between a domi- nant and minority group has been found all over the world, even when there is no genetic difference between the groups, and in cases where opportunities for a group have changed, such as when they emigrate, differences have rapidly disappeared (Block, 1995).

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

54 Chapter 2

If groups such as women and African Americans are not inherently inferior but perform worse on tests, what might be the reasons? The usual explanation is that they have internalized the “superior” group’s prejudices. Steele thinks the problem might not be so internal but may have to do with the situation. The stigmatized groups perform worse when they know that’s what is expected—when they experience the threat of being stereotyped. They either become too anxious or give up and avoid the subject.

What Can You Do for Yourself? So, do you feel you belong to a group that is expected to do poorly at math? (Perhaps the group of “math dumb- bells” in the class?) What can you do to get out from under the shadow of stereotype threat as you take this course?

First, care about learning statistics. Don’t discount it to save your self-esteem. Fight for your right to know this subject. Consider these words from the former presi- dent of the Mathematics Association of America:

The paradox of our times is that as mathematics becomes increasingly powerful, only the powerful seem to benefit from it. The ability to think mathematically—broadly interpreted—is absolutely crucial to advancement in vir- tually every career. Confidence in dealing with data, skepticism in analyzing arguments, persistence in pene- trating complex problems, and literacy in communicating about technical matters are the enabling arts offered by the new mathematical sciences. (Steen, 1987, p. xviii)

Second, once you care about succeeding at statistics, realize you are going to be affected by stereotype threat. Think of it as a stereotype-induced form of test anxiety and work on it that way (see Box 1–2).

Third, root out the effects of that stereotype in your- self as much as you can. It takes some effort. That’s why we are spending time on it here. Research on stereotypes shows that they can be activated without our awareness (Fiske, 1998), even when we are otherwise low in preju- dice or a member of the stereotyped group.

Some Points to Think About For women, yes, the very top performers tend to be male, but the differences are slight, and the lowest performers are not more likely to be female. Indeed, gender differ- ences on test performance have been declining (National Center for Education Statistics, 2001). Tobias (1982) cites numerous studies for why women might not make it to the very top in math. For example, in a study of students identified by a math talent search, it was found that few

parents arranged for their daughters to be coached before the talent exams. Sons were almost invariably coached. In another study, parents of mathematically gifted girls were not even aware of their daughters’ abilities, whereas par- ents of boys invariably were. In general, girls tend to avoid higher math classes, according to Tobias, because parents, peers, and even teachers often advise them against pursuing too much math. Indeed, mothers’ views of their child’s math abilities are strong predictors of their later performance (Bleeker & Jacobs, 2004). Girls fre- quently outperform boys in math, yet still greatly under- estimate their abilities (Heller & Ziegler, 1996). So, even though women are earning more PhDs in math than ever before, it is not surprising that math is the field with the highest dropout rate for women.

We checked the grades in our own introductory statis- tics classes and found no reliable difference for gender. More generally, Schram (1996) analyzed results of 13 in- dependent studies of performance in college statistics and found an overall average difference of almost exactly zero (the slight direction of difference favored females). Steele (1997) also found that the grades of African Americans, for example, rose substantially when they were enrolled in a transition-to-college program emphasizing that they were the cream of the crop and much was expected of them. Meanwhile, African American students at the same school who were enrolled in a remedial program for mi- norities received considerable attention, but their grades improved very little and many more of them dropped out of school than in the other group. Steele argues that the very idea of a remedial program exposed those students to a subtle stereotype threat.

Cognitive research on stereotype threat has demon- strated that it most affects math problems relying on long- term memory and spills over into subsequent tasks not normally affected by stereotype threat (Beilock et al., 2007).

Another point to ponder is a study cited by Tobias (1995) comparing students in Asia and the United States on an international mathematics test. The U.S. stu- dents were thoroughly outperformed, but more important was why: Interviews revealed that Asian students saw math as an ability fairly equally distributed among people and thought that differences in performance were due to hard work. Contrarily, U.S. students thought some people are just born better at math; so hard work matters little.

In short, our culture’s belief that “math just comes naturally to some people” could be holding you back. But then, doing well in this course may even be more sat- isfying for you than for others.

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 55

Central Tendency and Variability in Research Articles The mean and the standard deviation are very commonly reported in research arti- cles. However, the mode, median, and variance are only occasionally reported. Sometimes the mean and standard deviation are included in the text of an article. For our dreams example, the researcher might write, “The mean number of dreams in the last week for the 10 students was 6.00 ( ).” Means and standard deviations are also often listed in tables, especially if a study includes several groups or several different variables. For example, Selwyn (2007) conducted a study of gender-related perceptions of information and communication technologies (such as games ma- chines, DVD players, and cell phones). The researcher asked 406 college students in Wales to rate 8 technologies in terms of their level of masculinity or femininity. The students rated each technology using a 7-point response scale, from for very fem- inine to for very masculine, with a midpoint of 0 for neither masculine or femi- nine. Table 2–5 (reproduced from Selwyn’s article) shows the mean, standard deviation, and variance of the students’ ratings of each technology. As the table shows, games machines were rated as being more masculine than feminine, and land- line telephones were rated as being slightly more feminine than masculine. Notice that Table 2–5 is one of those rare examples where the variance is shown (usually just the standard deviation is given). Overall, the table provides a useful summary of the descriptive results of the study. In another part of the study, Selwyn compared women’s and men’s perceptions of the masculinity or femininity of different aspects of computers and computing. We will describe those results in Chapter 8; so be sure to look out for them!

Another interesting example is shown in Table 2–6 (reproduced from Norcross et al., 2005). The table shows the application and enrollment statistics for psychology doctoral programs in the United States, broken down by area of psychology and by year (1973, 1979, 1992, and 2003). The table does not give standard deviations, but it does give both means and medians. For example, in 2003 the mean number of ap- plicants to doctoral counseling psychology programs was 71.0, but the median was only 59. This suggests that some programs had very high numbers of applicants that

+ 3 – 3

SD = 2.57

Table 2–5 Mean Scores for Each Technology

N Mean S.D. Variance

Games machine (e.g., Playstation) 403 1.92 1.00 .98

DVD Player 406 .44 .85 .73

Personal Computer (PC) 400 .36 .82 .68

Digital radio (DAB) 399 .34 .99 .98

Television set 406 .26 .78 .62

Radio 404 .81 .65

Mobile phone 399 .88 .77

Landline telephone 404 1.03 1.07

Note: Mean scores range from �3 (very feminine) to +3 (very masculine). The midpoint score of .0 denotes “neither masculine nor feminine.” Source: Selwyn, N. (2007). Hi-tech = guy-tech? An exploration of undergraduate students’ gendered perceptions of information and communication technologies. Sex Roles, 56, 525–536. Copyright © 2007. Reprinted by permission of Springer Science and Business Media.

– .77 – .19 – .01

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

56

 

.

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 57

skewed the distribution. In fact, you can see from the table that for almost every kind of program and for both applications and enrollments, the means are typically higher than the medians. You may also be struck by just how competitive it is to get into doctoral programs in many areas of psychology. It is our experience that one of the factors that makes a lot of difference is doing well in statistics courses!

1. The mean is the most commonly used measure of central tendency of a distrib- ution of scores. The mean is the ordinary average—the sum of the scores divided by the number of scores. In symbols, .

2. Other, less commonly used ways of describing the central tendency of a distribu- tion of scores are the mode (the most common single value) and the median (the value of the middle score when all the scores are lined up from lowest to highest).

3. The variability of a group of scores can be described by the variance and the standard deviation.

4. The variance is the average of the squared deviation of each score from the mean. In symbols, . The sum of squared deviations,

, is also symbolized as SS. Thus . 5. The standard deviation is the square root of the variance. In symbols,

It is approximately the average amount that scores differ from the mean.

6. There have always been a few psychologists who have warned against statistical methodology because in the process of creating averages, knowledge about the individual case is lost.

7. Means and standard deviations are often given in research articles in the text or in tables.

SD = 2SD2. SD2 = SS>N©(X – M)2

SD2 = [©(X – M)2]> N

M = (©X)>N

Summary

Figuring the Mean Find the mean for the following scores: 8, 6, 6, 9, 6, 5, 6, 2.

Answer You can figure the mean using the formula or the steps.

Using the formula: . Using the steps:

❶ Add up all the scores. . ❷ Divide this sum by the number of scores. .48> 8 = 6

8 + 6 + 6 + 9 + 6 + 5 + 6 + 2 = 48

M = (©X)> N = 48> 8 = 6

Example Worked-Out Problems

Key Terms

central tendency (p. 34) mean (M) (pp. 34, 35) Σ (sum of ) (p. 35) X (p. 35) N (number of scores) (p. 36) mode (p. 37) median (p. 39)

outlier (p. 39) variance (SD2 ) (p. 44) deviation score (p. 44) squared deviation score (p. 44) sum of squared deviations (sum of

squares) (SS ) (pp. 44, 46) standard deviation (SD) (p. 45)

SD2 (p. 46) SD (p. 46) computational formula (p. 49) definitional formula (p. 49)

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

58 Chapter 2

Finding the Median Find the median for the following scores: 1, 7, 4, 2, 3, 6, 2, 9, 7.

Answer ❶ Line up all the scores from lowest to highest. 1, 2, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 7, 9. ❷ Figure how many scores there are to the middle score by adding 1 to the

number of scores and dividing by 2. There are 9 scores; so the middle score is the result of adding 1 to 9 and then dividing by 2, which is 5. The middle score is the fifth score.

❸ Count up to the middle score or scores. The fifth score from the bottom is 4; so the median is 4.

Figuring the Sum of Squares and the Variance Find the sum of squares and the variance for the following scores: 8, 6, 6, 9, 6, 5, 6, 2. (These are the same scores used in the previous example for the mean: .)

Answer You can figure the sum of squares and the variance using the formulas or the steps.

Using the formulas:

Table 2–7 shows the figuring, using the following steps:

❶ Subtract the mean from each score. ❷ Square each of these deviation scores. ❸ Add up the squared deviation scores. This gives the sum of squares (SS). ❹ Divide the sum of squared deviations by the number of scores. This gives the

variance (SD2).

SD2 = SS>N = 30> 8 = 3.75. = 30 = 4 + 0 + 0 + 9 + 0 + 1 + 0 + 16

= 22 + 02 + 02 + 32 + 02 + – 12 + 02 + – 42 + (9 – 6)2 + (6 – 6)2 + (5 – 6)2 + (6 – 6)2 + (2 – 6)2

SS = ©(X – M)2 = (8 – 6)2 + (6 – 6)2 + (6 – 6)2

M = 6

Table 2–7 Figuring for Example Worked-Out Problem for the Sum of Squares and Variance Using Steps

❶ ❷

Score Mean Deviation Squared Deviation

8 6 2 4

6 6 0 0

6 6 0 0

9 6 3 9

6 6 0 0

5 6 1

6 6 0 0

2 6 16

❸ ❹ Variance = 30/ 8 = 3.75

© = SS = 30 – 4

– 1

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 59

Figuring the Standard Deviation Find the standard deviation for the following scores: 8, 6, 6, 9, 6, 5, 6, 2. (These are the same scores used above for the mean, sum of squares, and variance. .)

Answer You can figure the standard deviation using the formula or the steps.

Using the formula: . Using the steps:

❶ Figure the variance. The variance (from above) is 3.75. ❷ Take the square root. The square root of 3.75 is 1.94.

Outline for Writing Essays on Finding the Mean, Variance, and Standard Deviation

1. Explain that the mean is a measure of the central tendency of a group of scores. Mention that the mean is the ordinary average, that is, the sum of the scores divided by the number of scores.

2. Explain that the variance and standard deviation both measure the amount of variability (or spread) among a group of scores.

3. The variance is the average of each score’s squared difference from the mean. Describe the steps for figuring the variance.

4. Roughly speaking, the standard deviation is the average amount that scores dif- fer from the mean. Explain that the standard deviation is directly related to the variance and is figured by taking the square root of the variance.

SD = 2SD2 = 23.75 = 1.94

SD2 = 3.75

These problems involve figuring. Most real-life statistics problems are done on a computer with special statistical software. Even if you have such software, do these problems by hand to ingrain the method in your mind. To learn how to use a comput- er to solve statistics problems like those in this chapter, refer to the Using SPSS sec- tion at the end of this chapter and the Study Guide and Computer Workbook that accompanies this text.

All data are fictional unless an actual citation is given.

Set I (for Answers to Set I Problems, see pp. 674–675) 1. For the following scores, find the (a) mean, (b) median, (c) sum of squared

deviations, (d) variance, and (e) standard deviation:

32, 28, 24, 28, 28, 31, 35, 29, 26

2. For the following scores, find the (a) mean, (b) median, (c) sum of squared deviations, (d) variance, and (e) standard deviation:

6, 1, 4, 2, 3, 4, 6, 6

3. For the following scores, find the (a) mean, (b) median, (c) sum of squared deviations, (d) variance, and (e) standard deviation:

2.13, 6.01, 3.33, 5.78

Practice Problems

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

60 Chapter 2

4. Here are the noon temperatures (in degrees Celsius) in a particular Canadian city on Boxing Day (usually December 26) for the 10 years from 1998 through 2007: , , , 0, , , , , and . Describe the typical tem- perature and the amount of variation to a person who has never had a course in statistics. Give three ways of describing the representative temperature and two ways of describing its variation, explaining the differences and how you figured each. (You will learn more if you try to write your own answer first, before read- ing our answer at the back of the book.)

5. A researcher is studying the amygdala (a part of the brain involved in emotion). Six participants in a particular fMRI (brain scan) study are measured for the increase in activation of their amygdala while they are viewing pictures of violent scenes. The activation increases are .43, .32, .64, .21, .29, and .51. Figure the (a) mean and (b) standard deviation for these six activation increases. (c) Explain what you have done and what the results mean to a person who has never had a course in statistics.

6. Describe and explain the location of the mean, mode, and median for a normal curve.

7. A researcher studied the number of anxiety attacks recounted over a two-week period by 30 people in psychotherapy for an anxiety disorder. In an article de- scribing the results of the study, the researcher reports: “The mean number of anxiety attacks was 6.84 ( ).” Explain these results to a person who has never had a course in statistics.

8. In a study by Gonzaga et al. (2001), romantic couples answered questions about how much they loved their partner and also were videotaped while revealing something about themselves to their partner. The videotapes were later rated by trained judges for various signs of affiliation. Table 2–8 (reproduced from their Table 2) shows some of the results. Explain to a person who has never had a course in statistics the results for self-reported love for the partner and for the number of seconds “leaning toward the partner.”

Set II 9. (a) Describe and explain the difference between the mean, median, and mode. (b)

Make up an example (not in the book or in your lectures) in which the median would be the preferred measure of central tendency.

SD = 3.18

– 24- 13- 9- 5- 8- 1,- 1- 4- 5

Table 2–8 Mean Levels of Emotions and Cue Display in Study 1

Women ( ) Men ( )

Indicator M SD M SD

Emotion reports

Self-reported love 5.02 2.16 5.11 2.08

Partner-estimated love 4.85 2.13 4.58 2.20

Affiliation-cue display

Affirmative head nods 1.28 2.89 1.21 1.91

Duchenne smiles 4.45 5.24 5.78 5.59

Leaning toward partner 32.27 20.36 31.36 21.08

Gesticulation 0.13 0.40 0.25 0.77

Note: Emotions are rated on a scale of 0 (none) to 8 (extreme). Cue displays are shown as mean seconds displayed per 60 s. Source: Gonzaga, G. C., Keltner, D., Londahl, E. A., & Smith, M. D. (2001). Love and the commitment problem in romantic relationships and friendship. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 81, 247–262. Published by the American Psychological Association. Reprinted with permission.

n � 60n � 60

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 61

10. (a) Describe the variance and standard deviation. (b) Explain why the standard deviation is more often used as a descriptive statistic than the variance.

11. For the following scores, find the (a) mean, (b) median, (c) sum of squared deviations, (d) variance, and (e) standard deviation:

2, 2, 0, 5, 1, 4, 1, 3, 0, 0, 1, 4, 4, 0, 1, 4, 3, 4, 2, 1, 0

12. For the following scores, find the (a) mean, (b) median, (c) sum of squared deviations, (d) variance, and (e) standard deviation:

1,112; 1,245; 1,361; 1,372; 1,472

13. For the following scores, find the (a) mean, (b) median, (c) sum of squared deviations, (d) variance, and (e) standard deviation:

3.0, 3.4, 2.6, 3.3, 3.5, 3.2

14. For the following scores, find the (a) mean, (b) median, (c) sum of squared deviations, (d) variance, and (e) standard deviation:

8, –5, 7, –10, 5

15. Make up three sets of scores: (a) one with the mean greater than the median, (b) one with the median and the mean the same, and (c) one with the mode greater than the median. (Each made-up set of scores should include at least five scores.)

16. A psychologist interested in political behavior measured the square footage of the desks in the official office of four U.S. governors and of four chief executive offi- cers (CEOs) of major U.S. corporations. The figures for the governors were 44, 36, 52, and 40 square feet. The figures for the CEOs were 32, 60, 48, and 36 square feet. (a) Figure the means and standard deviations for the governors and for the CEOs. (b) Explain, to a person who has never had a course in statistics, what you have done. (c) Note the ways in which the means and standard deviations differ, and speculate on the possible meaning of these differences, presuming that they are representative of U.S. governors and large corporations’ CEOs in general.

17. A developmental psychologist studies the number of words that seven infants have learned at a particular age. The numbers are 10, 12, 8, 0, 3, 40, and 18. Fig- ure the (a) mean, (b) median, and (c) standard deviation for the number of words learned by these seven infants. (d) Explain what you have done and what the re- sults mean to a person who has never had a course in statistics.

18. Describe and explain the location of the mean, mode, and median of a distribu- tion of scores that is strongly skewed to the left.

19. You figure the variance of a distribution of scores to be – 4.26. Explain why your answer cannot be correct.

20. A study involves measuring the number of days absent from work for 216 em- ployees of a large company during the preceding year. As part of the results, the researcher reports, “The number of days absent during the preceding year ( ) was . . . .” Explain what is written in parentheses to a person who has never had a course in statistics.

21. Payne (2001) gave participants a computerized task in which they first see a face and then a picture of either a gun or a tool. The task was to press one button if it was a tool and a different one if it was a gun. Unknown to the participants while they were doing the study, the faces served as a “prime” (something that starts you thinking a particular way); half the time they were of a black person and half the time of a white person. Table 2–9 shows the means and standard de- viations for reaction times (the time to decide if the picture is of a gun or a tool) after either a black or white prime. (In Experiment 2, participants were told to

M = 9.21; SD = 7.34

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

62 Chapter 2

decide as fast as possible.) Explain the results to a person who has never had a course in statistics. (Be sure to explain some specific numbers as well as the general principle of the mean and standard deviation.)

Table 2–9 Mean Reaction Times (in Milliseconds) in Identifying Guns and Tools in Experiments 1 and 2

Prime

Black White

Target M SD M SD

Experiment 1

Gun 423 64 441 73

Tool 454 57 446 60

Experiment 2

Gun 299 28 295 31

Tool 307 29 304 29

Source: Payne, B. K. (2001). Prejudice and perception: The role of automatic and controlled processes in misperceiving a weapon. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 81, 181–192. Published by the American Psychological Association. Reprinted with permission.

Using SPSS

The U in the following steps indicates a mouse click. (We used SPSS version 15.0 to carry out these analyses. The steps and output may be slightly different for other versions of SPSS.)

Finding the Mean, Mode, and Median ❶ Enter the scores from your distribution in one column of the data window. ❷ U Analyze. ❸ U Descriptive statistics. ❹ U Frequencies. ➎ U on the variable for which you want to find the mean, mode, and median, and

then U the arrow. ➏ Statistics. ❼ U Mean, U Median, U Mode, U Continue. ❽ Optional: To instruct SPSS not to produce a frequency table, U the box labeled

Display frequency tables (this unchecks the box). ❾ U OK.

Practice the steps above by finding the mean, mode, and median for the number of dreams example at the start of the chapter (the scores are 7, 8, 8, 7, 3, 1, 6, 9, 3, 8). Your output window should look like Figure 2–14. (If you instructed SPSS not to show the frequency table, your output will show only the mean, median, and mode.)

Finding the Variance and Standard Deviation As mentioned earlier in the chapter, most calculators and computer software— including SPSS—calculate the variance and standard deviation using a formula that involves dividing by N – 1 instead of N. So, if you request the variance and standard

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 63

deviation directly from SPSS (for example, by clicking Variance and Std. deviation in Step ❼), the answers provided by SPSS will be different from the answers in this chapter.5 The following steps show you how to use SPSS to figure the variance and standard deviation using the dividing-by-N method you learned in this chapter. It is easier to learn these steps using actual numbers; so we will use the number of dreams example again.

❶ Enter the scores from your distribution in one column of the data window (the scores are 7, 8, 8, 7, 3, 1, 6, 9, 3, 8). We will call this variable “dreams.”

❷ Find the mean of the scores by following the preceding steps for Finding the Mean, Mode, and Median. The mean of the dreams variable is 6.

❸ You are now going to create a new variable that shows each score’s squared deviation from the mean. U Transform, U Compute Variable. You could call the new variable any name you want, but we will call it “sqdev” (for “squared

Figure 2–14 Using SPSS to find the mean, median, and mode for the number of dreams example.

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

64 Chapter 2

deviation”). So, write sqdev in the box labeled Target Variable. You are now going to tell SPSS how to figure sqdev. In the box labeled Numeric Expression, write (dreams ) * (dreams ). (The asterisk is how you show multiplication in SPSS.) As you can see, this formula takes each score’s deviation score and multiplies it by itself to give the squared deviation score. Your Compute Variable window should look like Figure 2–15. U OK. You will see that a new variable called sqdev has been added to the data window (see Figure 2–16). The scores are the squared deviations of each score from the mean.

❹ As you learned in this chapter, the variance is figured by dividing the sum of the squared deviations by the number of scores. This is the same as taking the mean of the squared deviation scores. So, to find the variance of the dreams scores, follow the steps shown earlier to find the mean of the sqdev variable. This comes out to 6.60; so the variance of the dreams scores is 6.60.

➎ To find the standard deviation, use a calculator to find the square root of 6.60, which is 2.57.

If you were conducting an actual research study, you would most likely request the variance and standard deviation directly from SPSS. However, for our purpose in this chapter (describing the variation in a group of scores), the steps we just outlined are entirely appropriate.

– 6- 6

Figure 2–15 SPSS compute variable window for Step ❸ of finding the variance and standard deviation for the number of dreams example.

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

Central Tendency and Variability 65

Figure 2–16 SPSS data window after Step ❸ for finding the variance and standard deviation for the number of dreams example.

1. In more formal, mathematical statistics writing, the symbols can be more com- plex. This complexity allows formulas to handle intricate situations without confusion. However, in books on statistics for psychologists, even fairly ad- vanced texts, the symbols are kept simple. The simplified form rarely creates ambiguities in the kinds of statistical formulas psychologists use.

2. This section focuses on the variance and standard deviation as indicators of spread, or variability. Another way to describe the spread of a group of scores is in terms of the range—the highest score minus the lowest score. Suppose that in a particular class the oldest student is 39 years of age and the youngest is 19; the range is 20 (that is, ). Psychology researchers rarely use the range because it is such an imprecise way to describe the spread; it does not take into account how clumped together the scores are within the range.

3. Why don’t statisticians use the deviation scores themselves, make all deviations positive, and just use their average? In fact, the average of the deviation scores (treating all deviations as positive) has a formal name—the average deviation or mean deviation. This procedure was actually used in the past, and some psy- chologists have noted subtle advantages of the average deviation (Catanzaro & Taylor, 1996). However, the average deviation does not work out very well as part of more complicated statistical procedures.

39 – 19 = 20

Chapter Notes

IS B

N 0-

55 8-

46 76

1- X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

66 Chapter 2

4. It is important to remember that the standard deviation is not exactly the average amount that scores differ from the mean. To be precise, the standard deviation is the square root of the average of scores’ squared deviations from the mean. This squaring, averaging, and then taking the square root gives a slightly different re- sult from simply averaging the scores’ deviations from the mean. Still, the result of this approach has technical advantages that outweigh the slight disadvantage of giving only an approximate description of the average variation from the mean (see Chapter Note 3).

5. Note that if you request the variance from SPSS, you can convert it to the vari- ance as we figure it in this chapter by multiplying the variance from SPSS by

(that is, the number of scores minus 1) and then dividing the result by N (the number of scores). (That is the variance as we are figuring it in this chapter � SPSS’s variance multiplied by [ ]�N.) Taking the square root of the resulting value will give you the standard deviation (using the formula you learned in this chapter). We use a slightly longer approach to figuring the variance and standard deviation in order to show you how to create new variables in SPSS.

N – 1

N – 1

IS B

N 0-558-46761-X

Statistics for Psychology, Fifth Edition, by Arthur Aron, Elaine N. Aron, and Elliot J. Coups. Published by Prentice Hall. Copyright © 2009 by Pearson Education, Inc.

 

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Psychology homework help

Psychology homework help

1. In an instance of _______ recovery, a conditioned response that has been extinguished reappears when a person is exposed to a related stimulus.

A. incomplete

B. spontaneous

C. generalized

D. automatic

 

2. You want to condition a pet pig to come running for a food reward when you blow a whistle. In the process of this conditioning effort, the main idea is to

A. teach the pig to pay attention to the sound of a whistle.

B. teach the pig to expect food when it’s hungry.

C. pair a conditioned stimulus with an unconditioned stimulus.

D. pair a neutral stimulus with an unconditioned stimulus.

 

3. Which of the following statements regarding latent learning is most accurate?

A. Latent learning occurs without reinforcement.

B. Latent learning occurs in spite of negative reinforcement.

C. Latent learning doesn’t require cognitive processes.

D. Latent learning suggests that environmental knowledge is genetically predetermined.

 

4. According to information provided in your text, circadian rhythms are associated with

A. attacks of sleep apnea.

B. the occurrence of anxiety attacks.

C. the time of month that pregnant women are likely to go into labor.

D. cycles of waking and sleeping.

 

5. A casino slot machine has a random chance of paying out a prize each time a wager is made. This would be an example of

A. variable-ratio schedule.

B. fixed-ratio schedule .

C. non-variable-ratio schedule.

D. random-variable ratio schedule.

 

6. An important reason why people forget something is that they didn’t pay much attention to it in the first place. Psychologists refer to this kind of forgetting as

A. encoding failure.

B. cue-dependent.

C. decay.

D. interference related.

 

7. The most frequently abused nervous system depressant is

A. cocaine.

B. caffeine.

C. alcohol.

D. marijuana.

 

8. After taking the drug, Rupert reported vivid hallucinations, altered perception of sounds and colors, and distorted time perception. It’s most likely that the drug Rupert took was

A. LSD.

B. MDMA.

C. cocaine.

D. marijuana.

 

9. Prescott is an old hand in the print shop. He insists that there’s only one dependable kind of process for printing a three-color brochure. By contrast, Baldwin recognizes several different approaches to three-color printing through the use of new digital technologies. Psychologists would say Prescott’s point of view is limited by his

A. obsessive perfectionism.

B. mental set.

C. mental laziness.

D. fundamental fixation.

 

10. A particular kind of neuron, called a _______ neuron, fires when we observe someone else’s behavior.

A. cognitive

B. mirror

C. reflective

D. modeling

 

11. During the _______ phase of problem solving, a means-ends analysis is a very common heuristic.

A. preparation

B. algorithm

C. production

D. judgment

 

12. While talking to Jim, Mary recalled that his birthday tomorrow. Mary wished him a happy birthday. What type of memory did Mary exhibit?

A. Implicit

B. Event

C. Explicit

D. Numerical

 

13. A common repetitive technique for moving new information from short-term memory to long-term memory is called

A. reduction.

B. selective reduction.

C. elaboration.

D. rehearsal.

 

14. A _______ reinforcement is one that satisfies a biological need.

A. conditional

B. positive

C. primary

D. neutral

 

15. In a lab devoted to sleep disorders, Julio points to the brain wave monitor, turns to Laura and says, “Subject is going into non-REM stage 2.” Laura looking at the monitor, says, “Got it; I’m recording the time.” What would Laura and Julio see on the monitor to assure them that the subject has entered stage 2 sleep?

A. Brain waves are irregular and episodic.

B. Brain waves are getting slower and more regular.

C. Sleep disturbance is indicated by sharp wave spikes.

D. Sleep spindles appear.

 

16. Which of the following would be considered an unconditioned response?

A. A monkey hits a red button when exposed to a bright light in order to receive a bit of food.

B. A dog barking when asked if it wants to go for a walk.

C. Pulling back your hand when touching a hot stove.

D. Getting excited when hearing a ring that sounds similar to the ringing of a winning casino game.

 

17. Which of the following statements regarding REM sleep is true?

A. REM sleep occurs during stage 3 sleep.

B. Dreaming causes major muscle contractions and tossing and turning.

C. REM sleep occurs only during stage 4 sleep.

D. Roughly 20 percent of adult sleep time is accompanied by REM.

 

18. You deprive your six-year-old of dessert each time he fails to eat his spinach. In this sort of _______, you weaken a response through taking away something pleasant or desired.

A. positive punishment

B. negative punishment

C. positive reinforcement

D. negative reinforcement

 

19. Trying to make sense of an article in the world events section of the Daily Mirror, Matlock turns to Thomas and asks, “Where’s Khartoum?” Thomas, looking up from his coffee, says, “Africa. It’s the capital of Sudan.” If you hold with the idea that long-term memory includes distinct modules, what sort of memory does Thomas’s reply indicate?

A. Declarative¡ªepisodic

B. Declarative¡ªsemantic

C. Procedural¡ªepisodic

D. Procedural¡ªsemantic

 

20. Natasha has been living Philadelphia for several months and is rapidly mastering the English language. However, she often turns to her American friend, Emily, when she is uncertain about a concept. One day, Natasha turns to Emily and asks, “What are you meaning when you say this word ‘vehicle’?” If you were Emily, which of these prototypes would be most likely to point to feel fairly certain that Natasha “gets it”?

A. An elevator

B. An automobile

C. A jet liner passing overhead.

D. An escalator

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Research Methods in Pivotal StudiesHomework Help

Research Methods in Pivotal StudiesHomework Help

  Title

ABC/123 Version X

1
  Week 4 Research Methods in Pivotal Studies

PSYCH/665 Version 3

2

University of Phoenix Material

Week 4: Research Methods in Pivotal Studies

Matching

Match the study with the individual researcher by entering the letter of the correct study to match the number of the researcher in the Answer column in the following tables.

Table 1

Researchers Study Answer
1. Edward Lee Thorndike A. Group Conflict 1. E
2. Solomon Asch B. Race and Self-Concept 2. H
3. Muzafer Sherif C. Strength of Situation 3.
4. Philip Zimbardo D. Cognitive Dissonance 4. C
5. Kenneth and Mamie Clark E. Puzzle Box and Learning 5. B
6. Leon Festinger F. Obedience 6. D
7. Stanley Milgrim G. Social Facilitation 7. F
8. Gordon Allport H. Conformity 8.

Table 2

Researchers Seminal Study Answer
1. Bibb Latane A. Operant Conditioning 1.
2. John Darley and Bibb Latane B. Learning 2.
3. Albert Bandura C. Cognitive Development 3.
4. B. F. Skinner D. Learned Helplessness 4.
5. Martin Seligman E. Social Loafing 5.
6. John B. Watson F. Modeling 6.
7. Jean Piaget G. Bystander Intervention 7.
8. Ivan Pavlov H. Classical Conditioning 8.

Multiple Choice

Choose one or more researchers who conducted each type of research.

1. Which of the following researcher(s) conducted a combination of observation and descriptive research?

a. Piaget

b. Clark

c. Thorndike

d. Milgram

2. Which of the following researcher(s) conducted experimental research?

a. Asch

b. Festinger

c. Sherif

d. Zimbardo

3. Which of the following researcher(s) conducted experimental research?

a. Latane

b. Bandura

c. Allport

d. Darley & Latane

4. Which of the following researcher(s) conducted experimental research?

a. Seligman

b. Watson

c. Pavlov

d. Skinner

5. Which of the following researcher(s) conducted quasi-experimental research?

a. Jung

b. Thorndike

c. Watson

d. Freud

For the following research questions, choose which research method would be most appropriate to use.

1. Is there a link between television and obesity?

a. True experiment

b. Correlation

c. Quasi-experiment

d. Historical

e. Observation/Descriptive

2. How does schizophrenia differ in young women and men?

a. Observation/Descriptive

b. True experiment

c. Historical

d. Correlation

e. Quasi-experiment

3. How does social anxiety disorder affect the routine life of a person?

a. Correlation

b. True experiment

c. Observation/Descriptive

d. Quasi-experiment

e. Historical

4. Does gender affect memory?

a. True experiment

b. Observation/Descriptive

c. Quasi-experiment

d. Correlation

e. Historical

5. Does room temperature affect long term memory?

a. Historical

b. Quasi-experiment

c. Observation/Descriptive

d. True experiment

e. Correlation

6. What is the influence of work environment on the worker’s self-esteem?

a. Correlation

b. Observation/Descriptive

c. Quasi-experiment

d. Historical

e. True experiment

7. How does in-store music influence product selection?

a. Observation/Descriptive

b. Quasi-experiment

c. Historical

d. True experiment

e. Correlation

8. How does over-crowding affect human beings?

a. True experiment

b. Observation/Descriptive

c. Quasi-experiment

d. Correlation

e. Historical

9. Does attractiveness affect our perception of others – are the attractive treated differently?

a. Quasi-experiment

b. Historical

c. Correlation

d. True experiment

e. Observation/Descriptive

10. What is the effect of color on mental states?

a. Observation/Descriptive

b. Correlation

c. Quasi-experiment

d. Historical

e. True Experiment

Copyright © XXXX by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 2017 by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved.

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Psychology Interviewing Presentation (Powerpoint) Assignment Help

Psychology Interviewing Presentation (Powerpoint) Assignment Help

Create a PowerPoint presentation that overviews how to properly conduct a psychological interview. (minimum number of slides is 10 maximum number undefined, but it must cover all the items listed below)

Content:  integrate course content and research into your presentation. Mandatory requirements,  must include the key principles of interviewing (e.g., preparation, introductions, open vs. closed questions, professionalism, etc.). May focus on interviews with a certain population (e.g., families in crisis, children, etc.) or present on interviewing in general.

Resources:

· Although research focused, many good tips can be found here: http://owl.english.purdue.edu/owl/resource/559/04/.

· Another thorough resource related to psychological interviews with families and children can be found at:

·http://www.centerforchildwelfare.org/preservice/participantguides/Intro%20to%20Interviewing%20Participant%20Guide.pdf

· Must use textbook as one of the reference:

Cohen, R. J. & Swerdlik, M. E. (2017). Psychological testing and assessment: An introduction to tests and measurement (9th ed.). Boston, MA: McGraw-Hill. ISBN: 9781259870507.

Textbook covers interviews on pp. 9–11, 453–459, and 464–466 (these are attached)

Presentation: Must be creative but within APA guidance on the “aesthetics” of your presentation (graphics, clarity, interest, etc.).

 

– discusses the importance of the appearance and professionalism of the interviewer

– describes both nonverbal and verbal  communication elements of psychological interviewing

– discusses how to begin and end a psychological interview

– discusses how to ask and how not to ask questions in a psychological interview

– discusses the role of follow-up questions in psychological interviewing

– integrates information from at least 1 peer-reviewed source (in addition to the textbook) into the presentation

– utilizes graphics that are professional, relevant and engaging, not busy or overwhelming

– uses an appropriate balance of text and graphics on slides as well as appropriate stopping points

– presentation includes in-text citations of sources, as well as a References slide/section. All citations and references are presented in current, accurate APA format

 

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Final Project: Executive Summary Assignment Help

Final Project: Executive Summary Assignment Help

1

 

 

 

PSY 310 Final Project Guidelines and Rubric

Overview The final project for this course is the creation of an executive summary report. You will write a summary, conduct a crime assessment, and create a profile of a criminal. You will then develop a conclusion and consider the investigative use of the information you have compiled. Criminal psychology encompasses a wide range of information about someone which can be drawn together, synthesized, and written into a format used by the criminal justice system prior to an arrest. Typically, criminal psychologists are called upon to provide advice and consultation when the crimes are not straightforward. Law enforcement officers are experts at tracking data and looking for crime-related clues to help them solve a case. However, when they need assistance determining who a criminal is, or what a criminal’s motivation might be—in a predictive sense—they rely on the capabilities of professionals who are versed both in criminology and psychology. A criminal profile emerges as data comes together. This is not the same as the information you see on the news; rather, it is a comprehensive look at the biological, psychological, social, and environmental factors that make a person unique to a criminal case. Some of the information is based on empirical data and some is based on educated assumptions made by the criminal psychologist.

In this executive summary report, you will look at a variety of factors and work to answer the question “who is this person?” You will examine criminal statistics, lifestyle, upbringing, medical and mental health information, along with a range of other information, that will help you answer the “who, what, when, where, and why” of your chosen case. It will be your job to draw from your previous education and training to learn how to understand what information is relevant to your case. There is no piece of information that is too small to help you build the mosaic of how past activity can help predict future activity. Your profile will be thorough, addressing all of the areas and questions above for the aim of assisting investigators to understand the criminal and his or her motivations and motives as well as the risk of the criminal activity continuing in the future. Through prompts and independent research outside of the text, you’ll peer into the world of investigative profiling.

The project is divided into two milestones, which will be submitted at various points throughout the course to scaffold learning and ensure quality final submissions. These milestones will be submitted in Modules Three and Five. The final product will be submitted in Module Seven.

In this assignment, you will demonstrate your mastery of the following course outcomes:

 

 PSY-310-01: Assess biological, developmental, and environmental factors to determine the impact on criminal behavior

 PSY-310-02: Apply relevant psychological theories to criminal behavior in order to analyze motivation

 PSY-310-03: Apply psychological methods to the development of a psychological profile that synthesizes relevant data  PSY-310-04: Determine appropriate intervention strategies related to criminal behavior supported by psychological theory and research

 

 

2

 

 

 

Prompt You will complete an executive summary report that includes criminal and psychological aspects of a particular crime to inform the executive team in order to prevent or intervene in criminal behavior. You may choose one of the following three scenarios to complete your final project:

 

1. White Collar Crime (Plain Text Version) 2. Serial Murderer (Plain Text Version) 3. Domestic Terror (Plain Text Version)

 

Specifically, you must address the critical elements listed below. Most of the critical elements align with a particular course outcome (shown in brackets).

I. Summary A. Summarize the case provided. In your summary, include key facts and demographic information. [PSY-310-01]

B. Develop initial hypothesis about the potential motivation to commit the crime. As you consider the motivation, identify the type of crime that was committed. [PSY-310-02]

 

II. Crime Assessment A. Compare data and evidence of similar crimes. [PSY-310-03] B. Identify patterns found in similar crimes. [PSY-310-03] C. Make inferences about motivation of the identified individual based on case evidence and comparison to similar crimes. [PSY-310-02]

 

III. Profile A. Develop a demographic summary of the individual based on analysis of data from the case. [PSY-310-03] B. Explain the impact that biological factors of the case had on the individual’s behavior. [PSY-310-01] C. Explain the impact that developmental factors of the case had on the individual’s behavior. [PSY-310-01] D. Explain the impact that environmental factors of the case had on the individual’s behavior. [PSY-310-01]

E. Apply theories to the emerging hypothesis of the motivation of your chosen subject. In your response, consider the biological, psychological, social, and criminal violence theories. [PSY-310-02]

IV. Conclusion and Investigative Use

A. Develop a global summary based on a synthesis of the inputs, crime assessment, and profile. [PSY-310-03] B. Anticipate future behavior based on predictive analysis. [PSY-310-04]

 

 

3

 

 

 

C. Develop intervention strategies to mitigate future criminal behavior. Be sure to explain how your strategies will impact future behavior. [PSY- 310-04]

D. Discuss limitations of data to developing your report. In your response, consider the information that was missing that you wish you had and reliability and validity of the data you reviewed. [PSY-310-04]

E. Based on your report, discuss how the information collected could contribute to the capture, understanding, and prosecution of the individual. [PSY-310-04]

 

 

 

Milestone One: Summary and Crime Assessment

Milestones

In Module Three, you will submit a draft of your summary and crime assessment. This milestone will be graded with the Milestone One Rubric.

Milestone Two: Profile In Module Five, you will submit a draft of the profile. This milestone will be graded with the Milestone Two Rubric.

 

Final Submission: Executive Summary Report

In Module Seven, you will submit your final project. It should be a complete, polished artifact containing all of the critical elements of the final product. It should reflect the incorporation of feedback gained throughout the course. You will add the conclusion and investigative use section to the final project submission. This submission will be graded with the Final Project Rubric.

 

 

4

 

 

 

Final Project Rubric Guidelines for Submission: Your executive summary report must be 4–6 pages in length (plus a cover page and references) and must be written in APA format. Use double spacing, 12-point Times New Roman font, and one-inch margins. Include at least five references cited in APA format.

 

Critical Elements Exemplary (100%) Proficient (85%) Needs Improvement (55%) Not Evident (0%) Value

Summary: Meets “Proficient” criteria and Summarizes the case study and Summarizes the case study but Does not summarize the case 6 Summarize the Case response demonstrates an includes key facts and summary is missing key facts or study

advanced ability to distill key demographic information demographic information details from a provided case study

Summary: Initial Meets “Proficient” criteria and Develops initial hypothesis Develops initial hypothesis Does not develop an initial 8 Hypothesis response demonstrates a about the potential motivation about the potential motivation hypothesis about the potential

sophisticated awareness of the to commit the crime to commit the crime but the motivation to commit the crime potential motivation to commit hypothesis is cursory or lacks the crime detail

Crime Assessment: Meets “Proficient” criteria and Compares data and evidence of Compares data and evidence of Does not compare data and 6 Compare comparison is exceptionally similar crimes similar crimes but comparison is evidence of similar crimes

clear and includes exceptional cursory or contains inaccuracies detail

Crime Assessment: Meets “Proficient” criteria and Identifies patterns found in Identifies patterns found in Does not identify patterns 6 Identify Patterns demonstrates keen ability to similar crimes similar crimes but response is found in similar crimes

identify patterns cursory or illogical or lacks detail

Crime Assessment: Meets “Proficient” criteria and Draws inferences about the Draws inferences about the Does not draw inferences about 8 Motivation inferences show advanced motivation of the individual to motivation of the individual to the motivation of the individual

ability to draw connections commit the crime based on commit the crime but response to commit the crime from evidence in multiple cases evidence in multiple cases is cursory or illogical or lacks

detail

 

 

5

 

 

 

Profile: Meets “Proficient” criteria and Develops a demographic Develops a demographic Does not analyze data from the 6 Demographic response demonstrates an summary of the individual summary of the individual case to develop a demographic

Summary exceptionally detailed summary based on analysis of data from based on analysis of data from summary of the individual …. the case the case but the demographic

summary of the individual is cursory or lacks detail

Profile: Biological Meets “Proficient” criteria and Explains the impact that Explains the impact that Does not explain the impact 6 Factors response demonstrates an biological factors of the case biological factors of the case that biological factors of the

insightful ability to assess the had on the individual’s behavior had on the individual’s behavior case had on the individual’s impact of biological factors but explanation lacks sufficient behavior detail

Profile: Meets “Proficient” criteria and Explains the impact that Explains the impact that Does not explain the impact 6 Developmental response demonstrates an developmental factors of the developmental factors of the that developmental factors of

Factors insightful ability to assess the case had on the individual’s case had on the individual’s the case had on the individual’s impact of developmental behavior behavior but explanation lacks behavior factors sufficient detail

Profile: Meets “Proficient” criteria and Explains the impact that Explains the impact that Does not explain the impact 6 Environmental response demonstrates an environmental factors of the environmental factors of the that environmental factors of

Factors insightful ability to assess the case had on the individual’s case had on the individual’s the case had on the individual’s impact of environmental factors behavior behavior but explanation lacks behavior sufficient detail

Profile: Apply Meets “Proficient” criteria and Applies theories to the Applies theories to the Does not apply theories to the 8 Theories description demonstrates a emerging hypothesis of emerging hypothesis of emerging hypothesis of

complex grasp of the motivation for the identified motivation for the identified motivation for the identified application of theories to the individual individual but response is individual hypothesis of motivation missing key theories

Conclusion and Meets “Proficient” criteria and Develops global summary based Develops global summary but Does not develop global 6 Investigative Use: demonstrates an advanced on a synthesis of the inputs, summary is missing key summary based on a synthesis Global Summary ability to synthesize key details crime assessment, and profile elements or lacks clear of the inputs, crime assessment,

synthesis of details and profile

Conclusion and Meets “Proficient” criteria and Anticipates future behavior of Anticipates future behavior of Does not anticipate future 6 Investigative Use: demonstrates keen insight into individual based on predictive individual based on predictive behavior of individual based on Future Behavior the application of predictive analysis analysis but response is cursory predictive analysis

analysis or illogical or lacks detail

 

 

6

 

 

 

Conclusion and Meets “Proficient” criteria and Develops intervention Develops intervention Does not develop intervention 6 Investigative Use: demonstrates a nuanced strategies, explaining how they strategies to mitigate this strategies to mitigate future

Intervention understanding of how will mitigate future criminal behavior in the future but criminal behavior Strategies intervention strategies mitigate behavior interventions are not applied

future criminal behavior appropriately or lack justification

Conclusion and Meets “Proficient” criteria and Discusses limitations of data in Discusses limitations to Does not discuss limitations to 6 Investigative Use: description demonstrates a developing the report developing the report but developing the report

Limitations sophisticated awareness of the response is cursory or illogical

case details or lacks detail

Conclusion and Meets “Proficient” criteria and Discusses how the information Discusses how the information Does not discuss how the 6 Investigative Use: demonstrates a sophisticated collected could contribute to collected could contribute to information collected could

Capture, understanding of how the the capture, understanding, and the capture, understanding, and contribute to the capture, Understanding, and report contributes to the prosecution of the individual prosecution of the individual understanding, and prosecution

Prosecution capture, understanding, and but description is cursory, of the individual prosecution of the individual illogical, or lacks detail

Articulation of Submission is free of errors Submission has no major errors Submission has major errors Submission has critical errors 4 Response related to citations, grammar, related to citations, grammar, related to citations, grammar, related to citations, grammar,

spelling, syntax, and spelling, syntax, or organization spelling, syntax, or organization spelling, syntax, or organization organization and is presented in that negatively impact that prevent understanding of a professional and easy-to-read readability and articulation of ideas format main idea

Total 100%

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Social Psychology homework help

Social Psychology homework help

925 North Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, CA 92701

www.calcoast.edu Phone: 714-547-9625 Fax: 714-547-5777

12/14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Tracking Your Academic Activities Verifying an accurate course completion time is essential for accreditation. To meet both accreditation requirements and award academic credit, educational institutions must document the total number of hours students spend completing designated academic activities related to their coursework.

The total hours are then translated into academic credit based on a prescribed method of measuring educational attainment known as the Carnegie Unit. 90 hours of student preparation time and 45 hours of student engagement time are required for a 3 credit hour course.

Using the attached form as an example, keep track of the time you spend on each lesson, pre-test, self-test, unit test, writing assignment, reading assignment, outside reading, final examination, etc. You will not be required to turn in the worksheet; however, at the end of the course you will receive a Student Course Survey and the final question will ask how long it took you to complete the course. Your assistance in completing this requirement and providing the university with this valuable data is greatly appreciated.

As you fill out the worksheet, please keep in mind that your Academic Engagement Activities should total approximately 45 hours. Some examples of this type of activity may include:

Lesson Review Exercises

Key Term Reviews

Analysis

Study Guide Review

Writing Assignments

Review Grading Rubric

Unit Examinations

Proctored Final Examination

Course Academic Online Discussions

Student/Instructor Interaction

Documents/Student Resources

As you fill out the Academic Preparation Activities, please keep in mind that these should total approximately 90 hours. Some samples of this type of activity may include:

Pre-Test

Reading Assignments

Key Term Reviews

Studying for Examinations

Writing Assignments

Review Grading Rubric

Study Lesson Review Exercises

Internet/Web Research

Reading Websites

Suggested Outside Reading

Sample Worksheet for Tracking Your Academic Activities

Upon completion of this course, you will be asked to complete a survey. The last question on the survey will ask you the number of hours it took to complete the course. The total hours are then translated into academic credit based on a prescribed method of measuring educational attainment known as the Carnegie Unit. 90 hours of student preparation time and 45 hours of student engagement time (135 hours) are required for a 3 credit hour course.

This worksheet was developed as a tool to help track your time. You are not required to turn it in.

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Totals

Academic Engagement Activities Lesson Review Exercises Key Term Review Exercises Study Guide Review Documents/Student Resources Writing Assignments Review Grading Rubric Unit Examinations Proctored Final Examination Case Studies/Critical Analysis Course Academic Online Discussions Student/Instructor Interactions

Total Academic Engagement required for a 3 unit course = 45 hours

Academic Preparation Activities Pre-Test Reading Assignments Analyze Case Studies/Critical Analysis Key Term Review Exercises Study for Examinations Suggested Outside Readings Web Research Writing Assignments Review Grading Rubric Reading Websites Study Lesson Review Exercises

Total Academic Preparation required for a 3 unit course = 90 hours

Grand total of hours of various learning activities in completing this course

Pre-test Instructions

Thank you for taking the time to complete the required pre-test. The purpose of the pre-test is to measure your knowledge of the subject matter at the beginning of each course.

Please be assured, your score on the pre-test will not be part of your course grade. We do not want you to try to study for it or be worried about doing well on the pre-test. It is simply a measure of your “starting place,” that will be used for improving course content and to meet accreditation requirements.

If you receive your course materials online: • Please log-in to your Coast Connection student portal to complete your pre-test.

If you receive your course materials by mail: • You will receive your answer sheets for the pre-test by mail. • Once you have completed your pre-test, please mail or fax your answer sheet to the University at:

California Coast University 925 N. Spurgeon Street Santa Ana, CA 92701 Fax: 714-547-1451

If you have any questions, please feel free to contact the Student Services Department. Thank you for your cooperation.

Pre-test

ix

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

Which early sociologist emphasized the role of society in the development of the self? 1.

George Herbert Meada. Karl Marxb. Georg Simmerc. Herbert Blumer d.

____________ is the study of the effects of society on social-psychological processes, also 2. known as sociological social psychology.

sociologya. microsociologyb. macrosociologyc. psychology d.

Which of the following is considered a major dimension of group processes? 3.

legitimacya. justiceb. powerc. All of the above. d.

Perspective within symbolic interactionism that focuses on the quantitative study of social 4. interaction processes because of the stable nature of social life.

Chicago Schoola. Indiana Schoolb. Iowa Schoolc. both b and c d.

The research technique called “autoethnograpy” is associated with which social psychological 5. perspective?

symbolic interactiona. social structure and personalityb. group processesc. structural functionalism d.

Participants of an experiment that are not exposed to the independent variable. 6.

control groupa. convenience sampleb. focus groupc. experimental groupd.

Pre-test

x

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment is based on a study that began in ____________ 7. that was primarily led by ____________.

1957; Sewella. 1962; Nielsonb. 1965; Granovetterc. 1973; Kohn d.

According to research by Lucas and others, how can individuals with lower cultural status best 8. gain status in groups?

Give that person legitimate authority to lead the group.a. The person should focus on the success of the group, rather then her own interests.b. The person should provide a “kick back” to others in a group to get their leadership c. position. both a and b d.

Research in the 1960s showed a considerable overlap in ___________ and ___________ 9. occupations.

fathers’; sons’a. fathers’; daughters’b. mothers’; daughters’c. mothers’; sons’ d.

How did Joanne Nagel explain the increase in the number of people identifying themselves as 10. “American Indian” when the birth rates stayed the same?

Legal changes made scholarships more available to American Indians.a. The development of the “Red Power” movement shifted negative stereotypes of Indians.b. Urbanization made it easier for people to find and interact with other people that had c. some American-Indian heritage. All of the above. d.

The use of narratives and personal-stories is important to the process of _____________. 11.

symbolic interaction processa. identity control theoryb. mpression managementc. All of the above. d.

Pre-test

xi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Socialization is a process that _____________. 12.

begins at around two years of agea. lasts until the young twentiesb. begins at birth and continues through the life cyclec. both a and b d.

Sampson and Laub’s research on the impact of World War II (WWII) on men’s lives generally 13. showed that _____________.

WWII served as a turning point for all American soldiersa. IQ was the biggest factor in finding work after the warb. WWII only had an impact on soldiers if they served overseasc. most of the positive effects of war on the lives of soldiers came through their experience d. overseas, in-service training and access to programs like the GI Bill

Ausdale and Feagin’s research on children learning racism is important because 14. _______________.

it shows how children use race as a way to differentiate between peersa. it shows that children apply adult biases and racism in their day-to-day interactionsb. it shows that children use their own race as a way to gain acceptance by teachersc. both a and b d.

Most college students represent which type of person in Merton’s typology of deviance? 15.

conformistsa. innovatorsb. ritualistsc. retreatists d.

Component of social control theory referring to emotional bonds with other people in society. 16.

commitmenta. attachmentb. involvementc. None of the above. d.

Pre-test

xii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Manuel’s job loss really did not bother him because he did not like his boss. However, he 17. really started getting anxious when he stopped getting his paycheck. In this example, the effect of job loss on anxiety is ______________ by loss of income.

distresseda. moderatedb. mediatedc. constrained d.

Exposure to poor community conditions such as crime, poor living conditions and lack of 18. services.

malaisea. intransigenceb. ambient hazardsc. chronic strain d.

Nathan started attending KKK meetings when he saw some of his African-American neighbors 19. getting better jobs than him. Which of the following theories best explains Nathan’s negative attitude toward African Americans?

social distance theorya. symbolic interactionb. Blumer’s theory of group positionc. status construction theory d.

Theory that prejudicial attitudes reflect a group’s position in society. 20.

status construction theorya. theory of group positionb. modified labeling theoryc. colonization theory d.

A positive or negative evaluation of an object, a person or group or an idea. 21.

attitudea. prejudiceb. opinionc. belief d.

Pre-test

xiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Following Smelser’s value-added theory, why wouldn’t we expect a poor, third-world nation, 22. based on a barter economy, to develop mass hysteria over stock market problems like the U.S. did in the 1920s?

lack of structural conducivenessa. lack of structural strainb. lack of generalized beliefc. action of social control d.

Expectations about when and how to act excited or angry or any other emotion. 23.

emotional cuesa. emotional scriptsb. emotional energiesc. situational cues d.

When large numbers of people become obsessed with something like the purchase of a 24. product or an activity.

maniaa. crazeb. hysteriac. panic d.

A key ingredient of contagious mental unity, referring to situations in which people lose their 25. inhibitions to act and the tempo of their behavior increases.

intensity of behaviora. panicb. irrational behaviorc. hostile outburstsd.

925 North Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, CA 92701

Text:

Author(s):

Publisher:

S tu

d y G

u id

e

www.calcoast.edu

Phone: 714-547-9625 Fax: 714-547-5777

Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives

Second Edition, 2011

ISBN-13: 9780205661060

David E. Rohall, Melissa A. Milkie and Jeffrey W. Lucas

Pearson

12/14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Message From the President

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Welcome to California Coast University. I hope you will find this course interesting and useful throughout your career. This course was designed to meet the unique needs of students like you who are both highly motivated and capable of completing a degree program through distance learning.

Our faculty and administration have been involved in distance learning for over forty years and understand the characteristics common to successful students in this unique educational environment.

This course was prepared by CCU faculty members who are not only outstanding educators but who have real world experience. They have prepared these guidelines to help you successfully complete your educational goals and to get the most from your distance learning experience.

Again, we hope that you will find this course both helpful and motivating. We send our best wishes as you work toward the completion of your program.

Sincerely,

Thomas M. Neal President

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system without written permission from the publisher, except for the inclusion of brief quotation in review. Copyright © 2014 by California Coast University

Syllabus

xxi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Course Number PSY 228

Course Title Social Psychology

Course Description This course offers students an in-depth look at how people come to understand themselves and others in a social context, with considerable emphasis on sociology’s role in social psychology. Students will be given detailed examples of current research studies relating to each of the topics covered in this course such as stratification, deviance and mental health and illness. Each chapter of the text covered in this course will also introduce students to key sociological social psychologists whose research has made a significant contribution to the field.

Units of Credit 3 Units of Credit

Course Objectives Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to:

• Characterize three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

• Differentiate between qualitative and quantitative research methods.

• Determine how group processes affect identity.

• Recognize important agents of socialization.

• Identify physiological, social and behavioral components of emotions.

Learning Resources Textbook: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives 2nd edition, 2011 David E. Rohall, Melissa A. Milkie, and Jeffrey W. Lucas Pearson

ISBN-13: 9780205661060

All course examinations are based on the contents of the textbook required for this course. To successfully complete the examinations, you will need the textbook. You may rent the textbook from the CCU rental library or you may purchase the textbook from another source.

Although this study guide is developed by California Coast University, it may contain materials provided by the publisher of the textbook.

The Study Guide

The study guide was designed to help you further understand the material in the textbook and master the course content. Each study guide chapter corresponds to a chapter in the textbook.

Syllabus

xxii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Additional Readings and Online Resources

To help you further understand this subject material, additional readings and/or online resources related to this course are listed in this syllabus.

The Library Information and Resources Network, Inc. (LIRN)

Students are provided access to the Library and Information Resources Network, Inc. (LIRN). LIRN provides a centralized management of electronic information resources that allow students to access multiple research databases through one portal. Detailed information on the Library and Information Resources Network, Inc. is available on the California Coast University website under the Resources Tab. For additional information on using the network, LIRN provides a User Guide to help students search for the needed information. This helpful resource is available on the LIRN website. For information on accessing LIRN, please contact California Coast University – library@calcoast.edu or (714) 547-9625.

Supplementary Materials

Unit Examination Answer Sheets* Final Examination Scheduling Form

*Master of Education and Doctor of Education students will not receive unit exam answer sheets. These programs require written responses only.

Your Course Grade

Your grades on course examinations are determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university uses the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

Your grade in this course will be based on the number of points you earn. Grades are based on the percentage of points you earned out of a total of 500 points:

Four Unit Examinations

100 points each 400 points total 80% of your grade

Final Examination

100 points 100 points total 20% of your grade

Syllabus

xxiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Mastering the Course Content

In order to successfully complete this course, we recommend that you do the following before beginning:

• Be sure that you have the correct edition of the course textbook. Check the ISBN number of your textbook with the ISBN number listed on the cover page of this study guide.

• Review the table of contents at the end of this syllabus. You will only be responsible for the chapters in the textbook that are listed in the table of contents.

Each study guide contains several components selected and developed by the faculty to help you master the content of the course. Each chapter in the study guide corresponds to a chapter in the textbook. Study guides vary depending on the course, but most will include:

Learning Objectives Overviews Self Tests Summaries Key Terms Critical Analysis Questions (graduate and doctoral students only)

The most efficient way to complete this course is to read the materials in both the study guide and textbook in the sequence in which it appears, generally from beginning to end.

Read the Overviews and Summaries

Before reading a chapter of your textbook, review the corresponding learning objectives, overview, key terms and summary sections in the study guide. These were prepared to give you an overview of the content to be learned.

Review the Self Test

After you have reviewed the study guide summaries, look at the items on the self test. As you identify your areas of relative strength and weakness, you will become more aware of the material you will need to learn in greater depth.

Review the Critical Analysis and/or Case Study Questions (Graduate and Doctoral Students Only) The critical analysis questions are designed to help you gain a deeper understanding and appreciation for the course subject matter. This section will encourage you to give additional thought to the topics discussed in the chapter by presenting vignettes or cases with real world relevance.

Syllabus

xxiv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Read and Review the Chapter

Once you have the scope and organization of the chapter in mind, turn to the corresponding chapter in the textbook and read the material carefully. Keep the learning objectives, self test, critical analysis questions and/or case study questions in mind as you read.

Highlight important concepts and information in your study guide and write notes in the study guide as you read the textbook. These notes will help you study for the unit and final examinations.

Check Your Mastery of Each Chapter

When you feel that you have mastered the concepts presented in the chapter, complete the study guide self test and critical analysis questions and/or case study questions without referring to the textbook or your notes. Correct your responses using the answer key and solutions guide provided in the study guide. Your results will help you identify any areas you need to review.

Unit Examinations

Each course contains four unit examinations and a final examination. Unit examinations usually consist of 25 objective (multiple choice or true/false) test questions. For Master of Education and Doctor of Education students, unit examinations consist of writing assignments only.

Unit examinations may be found approximately every four to six chapters throughout your study guide. Unit examinations are open-book, do not require a proctor and are not timed. This will allow you to proceed at your own pace.

It is recommended that you check your answers against the material in your textbook for accuracy.

Writing Assignments

Each unit examination includes a written component. This assignment may be in the form of written questions or case study problems. The writing assignment affords the student an opportunity to demonstrate a level of subject mastery beyond the objective unit examinations, which reflects his/her ability to analyze, synthesize, evaluate and apply his/her knowledge. The writing assignment materials are found immediately following each unit examination.

Writing assignments are judged on the quality of the response in regard to the question. Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Syllabus

xxv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

• Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages.

• Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages.

• Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Plagiarism consists of taking and using the ideas, writings or inventions of another, without giving credit to that person and presenting it as one’s own. This is an offense that the university takes very seriously. An example of a correctly prepared written response may be found by visiting the Coast Connection student portal.

Citation Styles

The majority of your response should be your own original writing based on what you have learned from the textbook. However, students may also use outside materials if applicable. Be sure to provide a reference (or citation) for any materials used, including the required textbook. The following points are designed to help you understand how to provide proper references for your work:

• References are listed in two places.

• The first reference is briefly listed within your answer. This includes identifying information that directs the reader to your list of references at the end of your writing assignment.

• The second reference is at the end of your work in the list of references section.

• All references cited should provide enough identifying information so that the reader can access the original material.

For more detailed information on the proper use of citations, please refer to the CCU Student Handbook located on the Coast Connection student portal.

Submitting Your Unit Examinations and Writing Assignments via the Internet

Students may access the online testing features via the Coast Connection student portal. Multiple choice unit examinations may be completed and submitted online.

Syllabus

xxvi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Go to the California Coast University homepage at www.calcoast.edu and click on the student login icon at the upper right hand corner. After logging into your account, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the unit examination. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

Writing assignments may be submitted online as well. After logging into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the writing assignment. Here, you will find further information and instructions on how to submit writing assignments through the student portal. Remember to keep a copy of your writing assignments for your own personal records.

Alternatively, if you experience diffulty submitting your writing assignments through the student portal, then you may email your assignments as a Word document attachment to essays@calcoast.edu. When doing so, please adhere to the following guidelines:

• Always submit your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number with your writing assignment.

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

• All responses must be typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size for ease of reading and grading.

Submitting Your Unit Examinations by Mail

Send your completed unit examination along with any writing assignments to the following mailing address:

California Coast University Testing Department 925 N. Spurgeon Street Santa Ana, CA 92701

Requests to retake a unit examination will only be honored if the final exam has NOT been sent.

Syllabus

xxvii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Students may retake one unit examination per course, free of charge. The cost for each additional, repeated exam will be $90. Payment must be paid in full to the accounting department prior to repeating unit exams.

Please contact Student Services for a repeat unit examination form. You may resubmit your unit examination once the original grade has been cleared from your online degree plan.

Final Examination

Scheduling a Final Examination

Final examination requests can be submitted via U.S. mail, online through the Coast Connection student portal, or by calling the Testing Department at (714) 547-9625.

A final exam scheduling form is located on the last page of this study guide. Please fill out ALL required fields and mail it to the university.

If you would like to request a final exam online, log into the Coast Connection student portal and click on My Academic Plan. Select the course you are working on and submit the Final Exam Request form located at the bottom of the page. ALL INFORMATION MUST BE FILLED IN.

Submitting Your Final Examination

Final Examinations can be submitted by mail, fax or online through the Coast Connection student portal.

After you have completed your exam, you or your proctor can fax it to the Grading Department at (714) 547-1451 or mail it to the university. When faxing exams, please do not resize your fax.

For online submissions, once you have logged into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the final examination. You must input the unique password that was sent to your proctor in order to unlock your final examination questions. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

Proctors

The university requires that all final examinations be completed under the supervision of a proctor.

A proctor can be anyone EXCEPT an immediate family member, someone who resides with you or a current/former CCU student.

Syllabus

xxviii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The purpose of the proctored final examination is to verify that you are, in fact, the person who is enrolled in the course of study. It is also to verify that you are completing the final examination without the aid of any outside assistance.

During the proctored final examination, you may use your textbook and any notes you have taken during the completion of your unit examinations. Your designated proctor will verify your identity and that you have completed the final examination without any outside assistance.

Your Overall Grade Point Average (G.P.A.)

In addition to receiving a passing grade for each course, all students must maintain a required overall G.P.A. in order to graduate. Undergraduate students need an overall G.P.A. of 2.0 (C) on a 4.0 scale. Graduate and doctoral students need an overall G.P.A. of 3.0 (B) on a 4.0 scale.

A = 4 grade points B = 3 grade points C = 2 grade points D = 1 grade point F = 0 grade points

Students who do not meet the overall G.P.A. requirement by the end of their program must pay the current cost of tuition to repeat courses until they improve their overall G.P.A.

Overall course grades of “F” will be displayed on your degree plan and count as 0 units completed. You must pay to retake these courses.

Doctoral students must repeat any courses in which the overall course grade is a “D” or “F”.

Be sure to keep a copy of all work you submit to the university.

Syllabus

xxix

PSY 228 Social Psychology

If you have any questions about how to proceed through the course or regarding any California Coast University policies and procedures, the easiest way to get help is to send us a message through the student portal, via email, or phone the university.

University office hours are Monday through Friday from 8:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Pacific Standard Time.

California Coast University

925 N. Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, California 92701 Phone: (714) 547-9625 Fax: (714) 547-5777 Test Answer Sheet Fax Line: (714) 547-1451

Email: testing@calcoast.edu

Don’t forget: You are not alone! We are here to help you achieve your dream!

PS Y

22 8

Syllabus

xxx

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

The learning objectives for this course are listed below:

Chapter 1: Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology

1. Define social psychology. 2. Differentiate between macrosociology and microsociology. 3. Compare and contrast sociologists and psychologists’ approach to social psychology. 4. Identify the three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

Chapter 2: Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology

1. Distinguish the major principles of the symbolic interaction perspective. 2. Define what it means to “construct” the world around us. 3. Characterize the social structure and personality perspective. 4. Identify key elements of the group processes perspective. 5. Consider elements of group structure.

Chapter 3: Studying People

1. Become acquainted with the vocabulary of social science research. 2. Differentiate qualitative sociology from quantitative sociology. 3. Determine major forms of qualitative and quantitative research. 4. Assess how social scientists begin to develop a research project.

Chapter 4: The Social Psychology of Stratification

1. Interpret how people construct inequality in society. 2. Determine how structure is linked to interactions. 3. Evaluate how stratification develops in group interaction. 4. Judge how inequalities from society-at-large get reproduced in groups.

Chapter 5: Self and Identity

1. Identify the components of the self. 2. Determine interactionist theories of the self and identity. 3. Characterize three dimensions of the self-concept. 4. Analyze what we know from research on the self-concept. 5. Interpret how group processes affect identity.

Syllabus

xxxi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter 6: Socialization Over the Life Course

1. Critique how society influences the social construction of the self. 2. Chart the stages involved in developing the self. 3. Name the four elements of life-course sociology. 4. Consider agents of socialization and how they affect our lives. 5. Assess how group processes researchers study socialization.

Chapter 7: The Social Psychology of Deviance

1. Analyze how we define what is normal and what is deviant. 2. Determine how the construction of deviant labels contribute to the development of deviant lifestyles. 3. Judge how structural conditions influence individuals’ decisions to commit deviant acts. 4. Consider how group relationships influence the development of deviance and perceptions of deviance.

Chapter 8: Mental Health and Illness

1. Determine what it means to be mentally healthy. 2. Interpret how the definition of mental illness is constructed. 3. List the structural conditions in society that contribute to distress. 4. Identify resources that can buffer stress. 5. Assess how mental health can influence our sense of identity and interactions with others.

Chapter 9: Attitudes, Values and Behaviors

1. Identify the nature of an attitude. 2. Evaluate how researchers study attitudes and behaviors. 3. Describe how people construct attitudes. 4. Analyze how attitudes toward other people form in group contexts.

Chapter 10: The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion

1. Distinguish the components of emotions. 2. Determine how people learn emotions. 3. Consider how identity relates to emotions. 4. Evaluate how our statuses in society affect our uses of emotions. 5. Interpret the norms that govern the use of emotions in different social settings. 6. Predict how group settings affect emotions.

Syllabus

xxxii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter 11: Collective Behavior

1. Analyze how crowds contribute to the development of mass hysteria. 2. Identify theories that explain individuals’ behavior in large groups. 3. Decide whether structural conditions affect crowd behaviors. 4. Chart the phases of collective behavior found in large social movements. 5. Evaluate how group and individual motivations interact in social movements.

Syllabus

xxxiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Best, Joel. 2006. Flavor of the Month: Why Smart People Fall for Fads. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.

Clarke, Lee. 2006. Worst Cases: Terror and Catastrophe in the Popular Imagination. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Gergen, Kenneth J. 2000. The Saturated Self: Dilemmas of Identity in Contemporary Life. New York: Basic Books.

Hertz, Rosanna. 2006. Single by Chance, Mothers by Choice: How Women are Choosing Parenthood without Marriage and Creating the New American Family. New York: Oxford University Press.

Horowitz, Allan V. 2002. Creating Mental Illness. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Lareau, Annette. 2003. Unequal Childhoods: Class, Race and Family Life. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.

Miller, David L. 2000. Introduction to Collective Behavior and Collective Action. Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland.

Polletta, Francesca. 2006. It was Like a Fever: Storytelling in Protest and Politics. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.

Ream, Robert Ketner. 2005. Uprooting Children: Mobility, Social Capital and Mexican American Underachievement. New York: LFB Scholarly Publishing.

Scheff, Thomas J. 1990. Microsociology: Discourse, Emotion and Social Structure. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Swidler, Ann. 2001. Talk of Love: How Culture Matters. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Turner,Ralph H. and Lewis M. Killian. 1972. Collective Behavior. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Zelizer, Viviana. 2005. The Purchase of Intimacy. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.

Suggested Readings

Table of Contents

xxxiv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Syllabus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii-xx

Unit One Chapter 1: Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 2: Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chapter 3: Studying People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Unit 1 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Unit 1 Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Unit 1 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Unit Two

Chapter 4: The Social Psychology of Stratification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Chapter 5: Self and Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Chapter 6: Socialization Over the Life Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Unit 2 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Unit 2 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Unit 2 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Unit Three

Chapter 7: The Social Psychology of Deviance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Chapter 8: Mental Health and Illness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Chapter 9: Attitudes, Values and Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Unit 3 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Unit 3 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Unit 3 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Unit Four Chapter 10: The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Chapter 11: Collective Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Unit 4 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Unit 4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Unit 4 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Final Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Final Exam Scheduling Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Objectives

1

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter One Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Define social psychology.

2. Differentiate between macrosociology and microsociology.

3. Compare and contrast sociologists and psychologists’ approach to social psychology.

4. Identify the three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

• Read pages 1-24 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

2

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter is designed to give students an understanding of how sociologists study social psychology and its role in the larger field of sociology. Students will gain an understanding of the distinction between psychology and sociology and be able to explain the major sociological social psychology perspectives.

Key Terms

3

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Breaching experiments:

Culture:

Ethnomethodology:

Macrosociology:

Organizations:

Psychology:

Roles:

Social norms:

Social psychology:

Sociological imagination:

Symbolic interactionism:

Summary

4

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociology is the study of society. Sociologists look at society from both the macro and the micro level of analysis. Both psychological and sociological social psychologists study the social contexts of human thoughts, feelings and behaviors. Sociologists, however, also apply the perspectives and methods of the field of sociology to the study of social psychology.

Sociology was first defined in 1838 by French social philosopher, August Comte, who applied the principles of the scientific method to society. Some of the founders of sociological social psychology include George Herbert Mead, W.E.B. Dubois, William Thomas, Charles Horton Cooley and George Simmel. Three major perspectives in sociological social psychology include symbolic interactionism, social structure and personality and group processes.

Sociologists use a tool kit consisting of methods and concepts for studying the role of society in social psychological processes. Their tools include such concepts as statuses, roles, norms and values, culture and social institutions—which they apply to the study of human thoughts—feelings and behavior.

Self Test

5

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. How can macrosociological perspectives be used to study individual, micro-level interactions?

a. Macrosociological conditions may cause some individual-level conditions to exist in the first place. b. Differences in our macrosociological conditions may change the way we react to life events. c. Life events that affect us the most are often caused by societal conditions. d. All of the above.

2. Janna wanted to study the effects of population size on individuals’ decision to commit suicide. Which social psychological perspective is she most likely to use?

a. psychology b. sociology c. sociological social psychology d. psychological social psychology

3. Which macrosociological perspective views society as social systems composed of parts that serve to keep the system working properly?

a. conflict perspective b. symbolic interactionism c. behavioralism d. structural functionalism

4. Joe started noticing that kids from the upper classes tend to get accepted at better colleges than the kids from the middle and lower classes. His analysis probably comes from which macrosociological perspective?

a. conflict perspective b. symbolic interactionism c. behavioralism d. structural functionalism

Self Test

6

PSY 228 Social Psychology

5. Sociological social psychology is different from psychological social psychology because:

a. it focuses on the effects of societal conditions on individuals’ thoughts, feelings and behavior. b. it incorporates sociological perspectives and theories to explain individuals’ thoughts, feelings and behavior. c. it is a subfield of sociology, not psychology. d. All of the above.

6. Social psychology is the systematic study of individual thoughts, feelings and behavior in a social context. Which of the following social contexts are more likely to be studied by sociologists than psychologists?

a. small groups b. family interactions c. ethnic groups d. friendship groups

Answer Keys

7

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Breaching experiments: Experiments that violate the established social order to assess how people construct social reality.

Culture: A society’s set of unique patterns of behavior and beliefs.

Ethnomethodology: A method of studying society through observation of people’s typical day-to-day interactions.

Macrosociology: The study of large-scale social processes.

Organizations: Groups that share a common purpose and contain a formal set of rules and authority structure.

Psychology: The study of human thought processes and behaviors.

Roles: A set of expectations about how to behave in a group.

Social norms: The rules that regulate our behavior in relationships.

Social psychology: The systematic study of people’s thoughts, feelings and behavior in social contexts.

Sociological imagination: The ability to see personal lives in the context of the larger society— its history, culture and social structure.

Symbolic interactionism: A perspective within sociological social psychology that emphasizes the study of how people negotiate the meaning of social life during their interactions with other people.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

8

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. c

3. d

4. a

5. d

6. c

Notes

9

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Objectives

10

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Two Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Distinguish the major principles of the symbolic interaction perspective.

2. Define what it means to “construct” the world around us.

3. Characterize the social structure and personality perspective.

4. Identify key elements of the group processes perspective.

5. Consider elements of group structure.

• Read pages 25-53 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

11

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter provides an extensive review of three major perspectives in sociological social psychology. Students will learn about the history, theoretical and empirical importance of the three perspectives. The chapter begins with an overview of the history and tenets of symbolic interactionism. This is followed by a review of the two major schools of symbolic interactionism.

Key Terms

12

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency:

Collective behavior:

Components principle:

Frame analysis:

Legitimacy:

Proximity principle:

Psychology principle:

Reference groups:

Social scripts:

Thomas theorem:

Summary

13

PSY 228 Social Psychology

There are three broad perspectives in sociological social psychology: symbolic interactionism, social structure and personality and group processes.

Symbolic interactionism is the study of how people negotiate meaning during their interactions with others. Within this approach, two schools of symbolic interactionism exists: the Chicago school and the Iowa and Indiana schools.

The social structure and personality perspective emphasizes how social structure affects individuals within a society. Structural forces include status, roles and social networks.

The group processes perspective focuses on interactions that occur within groups, characteristics of groups and relationships among groups. Processes studied by those in the group processes perspective include power, status, justice and legitimacy.

A group’s behavior is influenced by structural conditions including its size and its function. Group research may focus on structure or on other aspects of group processes, such as the relationship between groups and the behavior of larger groups of people called collective behavior.

Self Test

14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Which social theorists are most associated with the concept of the social construction of reality?

a. Marx and Engels b. Thomas and Thomas c. Berger and Luckmann d. Blumer and Mead

2. A local fraternity developed a special hand signal whenever they see each other on the university quad. In symbolic interactionist terms, this signal has become a ______________ for this group.

a. meaningful exchange b. important source of pride c. language d. symbol

3. Terence started to believe that a friend at work is really a spy from another company, leading him to avoid interactions with that person as much as possible. Ultimately, he treats all interactions with her as suspect, making him reluctant to share any work-related information with her. Which of the following best explains Terence’s behavior?

a. components principle of the social structure and personality perspective b. the Thomas theorem c. the peter principle d. the group processes concept of legitimacy

4. Who coined the expression “symbolic interaction”?

a. Emile Durkheim b. Herbert Blumer c. August Comte d. George Herbert Mead

5. Professor Swanson is studying the meaning of “goodness” using a survey of public attitudes toward the topic. Which school of symbolic interaction is she most likely using in her research?

a. the Chicago school b. the Indiana/Iowa school c. the Swanson school d. the sociological social psychology school

Self Test

15

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Socioeconomic status (social class), race or ethnicity, gender, age and sexuality all relate to which principle of the social structure and personality perspective?

a. components principle b. proximity principle c. psychology principle d. peter principle

Answer Keys

16

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency: The ability to act and think independent of the constraints imposed by social conditions.

Collective behavior: The action or behavior of people in groups or crowds.

Components principle: Within the social structure and personality perspective, the ability to identify the elements or components of society most likely to affect a given attitude or behavior.

Frame analysis: The process by which individuals transform the meaning of a situation using basic cognitive structures provided by society.

Legitimacy: The perception that a social arrangement or position is the way that things should be.

Proximity principle: Element of the social structure and personality perspective referring to how people are affected by social structure through their immediate social environments.

Psychology principle: Element of the social structure and personality perspective referring to how individuals internalize proximal experiences.

Reference groups: People we look to as a source of standards and identity.

Social scripts: The appropriate thoughts, feelings and behaviors that should be displayed in a particular social frame.

Thomas theorem: Theorem stating that when people define situations as real, the consequences of those situations become real.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

17

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. b

4. b

5. b

6. a

Notes

18

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Objectives

19

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Three Studying People

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Become acquainted with the vocabulary of social science research.

2. Differentiate qualitative sociology from quantitative sociology.

3. Determine major forms of qualitative and quantitative research.

4. Assess how social scientists begin to develop a research project.

• Read pages 54-82 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

20

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to provide an overview of the techniques sociological social psychologists use to study people, emphasizing theoretical differences on the appropriate means of obtaining social-psychological data.

Key Terms

21

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Categorical variables:

Ethnography:

Focus groups:

Indices:

Interval variables:

Ordinal variables:

Population:

Qualitative research methods:

Reliability:

Snowball sample:

Validity:

Summary

22

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Several concepts apply to almost any research project. Researchers regularly use terms such as theory, research questions or hypotheses and variables to describe ways of studying people.

Researchers employ qualitative and quantitative techniques to study human subjects. Qualitative research methods include field research and in-depth interviews. Quantitative methods include survey research and experiments.

The steps in developing most research projects include assessing the theory and literature of the research topic, developing research questions or specific hypotheses, choosing the appropriate research methods, conducting data analysis and reporting the results.

Although there is no rule about whether a particular theory should or should not use quantitative or qualitative methods to study people, symbolic interactionists have traditionally relied more on qualitative methods. Many researchers try to employ multiple methods of studying a particular phenomenon.

Self Test

23

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. How are social theories and hypotheses related to one another?

a. Theories include general statements about social relationships while hypotheses are more specific statements about how variables will relate to one another. b. Theories are an extension of hypotheses. c. Theories are used to develop hypotheses. d. both a and c

2. Samantha started a research project predicting that men would be more supportive of using military forces to go to war than women. In this case, attitudes toward going to war is what kind of variable?

a. index b. scale c. independent variable d. dependent variable

3. In preparing for a survey of country club members, Donella asked the manager of the club for a list of members. This list refers to a _______________.

a. random sample b. probability sample c. sample list d. sampling frame

4. Which of the following types of samples is considered most representative of any given population?

a. random sample b. convenience sample c. snowball sample d. both b and c

5. An instructor asks you to develop a study of the homeless that will provide a great deal of depth into what it is like to be homeless. Given this mandate, which of the following methods would most likely give the information you need for such a project?

a. ethnography b. focus group c. survey d. experiment

Self Test

24

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. A sample in which any available person is included in the study is known as a ____________ sample.

a. true b. convenience c. odd d. real time

Answer Keys

25

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Categorical variables: Measures for which the possible responses have no particular order.

Ethnography: A form of field research that includes a descriptive analysis of a group or organization.

Focus groups: Semistructured interviews with small groups of people.

Indices: A series of related questions designed to measure a concept such as mastery.

Interval variables: A type of variable in which the difference between any two adjacent values is the same.

Ordinal variables: Variables for which response categories are ordered but the distances between adjacent categories are not necessarily equal.

Population: The larger group of people about whom a researcher seeks to draw conclusions.

Qualitative research methods: In-depth, semi-structured modes of observation or interviewing of subjects.

Reliability: When a study yields the same results using the same techniques and data.

Snowball sample: Samples in which informants provide contact information about other people who share some of the characteristics necessary for a study.

Validity: How valid or accurate the findings of the study are.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

26

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. a

3. d

4. a

5. a

6. b

Notes

27

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 1 Examination Instructions

28

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit One Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 1 Examination

29

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Which early sociologists emphasized the role of society in the development of the self?

a. George Herbert Mead b. Karl Marx c. Georg Simmer d. Herbert Blumer

2. Which sociological social psychology perspective emphasizes the role of meaning and the social construction of meaning in the study of social psychology?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

3. Which sociological social psychology perspective is likely to emphasize the importance of roles and statuses in the study of social psychology?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

4. Which sociological social psychology perspective is likely to emphasize the importance of interactions within groups?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

5. The sociological imagination is associated with which social theorists?

a. Emile Durkheim b. Max Weber c. C. Wright Mills d. Auguste Comte

Unit 1 Examination

30

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. The expectation to look someone in the eye when talking with them refers to a _______________.

a. norm b. role c. value d. belief

7. Derek’s job as a supervisor refers to his relative _______________ in the company while the expectations for how to behave on the job refers to his ________________.

a. role; status b. job; role c. status; role d. status; job

8. Which institution regulates sexual relations and child-rearing in society?

a. economy and work b. politics c. family d. religion

9. Which institution refers to the rituals and beliefs regarding sacred things?

a. economy and work b. politics c. family d. religion

10. Franklin did not think much about how the economy or society affects his life until he lost his job. Franklin’s internal processesing of his job loss best represents which principle from the social structure and personality perspective?

a. components principle b. psychology principle c. propinquity principle d. proximity principle

Unit 1 Examination

31

PSY 228 Social Psychology

11. After Donna cheated on her most recent exam, she starts to feel a sense of guilt, making her reconsider whether she wants to do it again. Donna’s feelings of guilt can be considered a ______________, according to the social structure and personality perspective, leading her to rethink her future behaviors.

a. social more b. social norm c. social force d. social fear

12. Which of the following is considered a major dimension of group processes?

a. power b. justice c. legitimacy d. All of the above.

13. Janelle wants to study how and why some people are able to tell other people what to do while others can not. What aspect of group processes is she studying?

a. power b. status c. justice d. legitimacy

14. What social psychologist is most associated with the concepts of dyads and triads?

a. Emile Durkheim b. August Comte c. Herbert Blumer d. Georg Simmel

15. The difference between dyads and triads is important because:

a. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially increases the number of relationships available in an interaction. b. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially decreases the amount of intimacy possible in a group. c. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially decreases the number of relationships available in an interaction. d. both a and b

Unit 1 Examination

32

PSY 228 Social Psychology

16. A group of friends getting together for dinner represents a ______________ group while a group of people at your work represents a _____________ group.

a. reference; primary b. primary; reference c. primary; secondary d. secondary; reference

17. Bob goes to the beach on a hot summer day and is surprised when he observes a group of people dressed in formal wear sitting in beach chairs amongst sunbathers. Bob was surprised because the ______________ did not meet his expectations for that situation.

a. situation b. social scripts c. frame d. All of the above.

18. ____________ require the researcher to weigh individual items differently.

a. Indices b. Scales c. both a and b d. None of the above.

19. Which of the following methods is MOST likely to show causation?

a. ethnography b. focus group c. survey d. experiment

20. An instructor developed a study to determine ways of producing more participation in his classes. In one class she provided free donuts everyday of class while in another she gave them nothing. She had her assistant takes notes on the number of comments and questions students made in each class. Which of these classes represent the control group?

a. the class not given the donuts b. the class given the donuts c. other classes that are not part of the experiment d. both classes would be considered the control group

Unit 1 Examination

33

PSY 228 Social Psychology

21. ____________ developed the field of operant conditioning; much of his work relied on experiments using rats and pigeons.

a. Carl Jung b. B.F. Skinner c. Sigmund Freud d. Joseph Berger

22. At what step in the research process does the researcher employ the library and other resources and conduct a literature review?

a. step 1 b. step 2 c. step 3 d. step 4

23. At what step in the research process does the researcher actually go out and collect data?

a. step 1 b. step 2 c. step 3 d. step 4

24. Research conducted by interviews, participant observations and ethnographies is referred to as what kind of research?

a. quantitative b. qualitative c. breeching d. experimental

25. Social scientists must always be concerned with _______________ and _______________ to accurately capture the phenomena in question.

a. truth and reliability b. reliability and validity c. truth and validity d. probability and validity

Unit 1 Examination

34

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit One

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

1. Think about the concept of poverty. How would a macro-level sociologist study this concept differently than a micro-level sociologist?

2. Discuss how symbolic interactionists define the concept of society. What role do symbols and language play in the development of society?

3. Discuss the ways that group structures can impact interaction in groups. Specifically, examine how group size (i.e., dyads and triads) and types of groups (e.g., primary groups) impact interactions between people.

You Can Do It

35

PSY 228 Social Psychology

You have just completed Unit 1 of this course.

You are off to a great start!

Keep up the good work!

Objectives

36

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Four The Social Psychology of Stratification

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Interpret how people construct inequality in society.

2. Determine how structure is linked to interactions.

3. Evaluate how stratification develops in group interaction.

4. Judge how inequalities from society-at-large get reproduced in groups.

• Read pages 84-120 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

37

PSY 228 Social Psychology

One of the major ways that sociological social psychology is different from its counterpart in psychology is its greater emphasis on the role of stratification in social psychological processes. There are several ways in which stratification affects our lives and relationships. Symbolic interactionists sometimes address how we create and maintain definitions of different classes of people. Social structure and personality scholars emphasize how structural conditions, often related to work, education, or family settings affect people. Those in the group processes perspective examine how stratification systems from the larger society become reproduced in groups. We will use each of these perspectives to examine how stratification processes occur in our day-to-day lives.

Key Terms

38

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Borderwork:

Direct exchanges:

Doing difference:

Feedback loop:

Intersectionality:

Routinization:

Social capital:

Social exchange theory:

Social stratification:

Substantive complexity:

Summary

39

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Three ways that interactionist researchers focus on stratification processes include examining how social structure shapes who we interact with, accounting for inequalities in the content of interactions, acknowledging how people with certain status characteristics have more power in terms of role taking and examining people’s power to define situations and define themselves.

The Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment traces the relationships among individual’s class position, their abilities and their long-term occupational outcomes.

The effect of networking among individuals from different groups creates a variety of outcomes for those involved, depending on the status of the individuals in a group as well as the status of the group itself.

Values serve as a guide for making decisions about the future, ultimately affecting the types of jobs we attain and class position we have in life, producing a feedback loop between our personality and social positions.

Group processes contribute to our understanding of structural developments by studying the exchanges among individuals in groups. Exchange processes lend themselves to the development of status structures because people bring different types and quantities of resources into the process. People who contribute more to a group or have more resources generally achieve a higher status in groups.

Self Test

40

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Shirley Brice Heath’s research on the socialization of status and race among Whites and Blacks in the rural-Piedmont Carolinas is important because:

a. it shows how social class influences how we interact with other people. b. it shows how historical and social conditions can affect our day-to-day interactions. c. it shows that White people have an advantage over African-Americans in getting into good colleges. d. both a and b

2. Which perspective in sociological social psychology is more likely to examine the effects of stratification in day-to-day exchanges between people?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

3. Which of the following is the best example of “borderwork”?

a. a group of teenage boys smoking cigarettes in a high-school parking lot b. a group of girls at a slumber party c. a group of boys and girls playing “kiss and chase” d. a group of boys and girls being lectured to about poor behavior

4. Elijah Anderson’s study of inner city norms and values show that:

a. inner city residents tend to be submissive in the face of their poverty. b. inner city residents are taught to develop a toughness to deal with challenges of poverty and poor living conditions. c. most inner city residents accept most traditional norms from the larger culture. d. both b and c

5. An intersectional approach is essential to understanding the dynamics of stratification because it allows us to the look at the multitude of ways in which our statuses and positions affect our experience.

a. True b. False

Self Test

41

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. According to the Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment, how does our social background influence our occupational status in life?

a. It shows that our social background influences with whom we spend time. b. It shows that our social background influences our mental abilities. c. It shows that our social background affects our educational levels. d. All of the above.

Answer Keys

42

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Borderwork: The creation of social and physical boundaries between boys and girls.

Direct exchanges: Exchanges between two people.

Doing difference: Any way in which inequality in any form (race, class or gender) is perpetuated during our interactions as people are held accountable to the social categories in which they are a part.

Feedback loop: A process in which our class position influences the development of values that, in turn, influences the type of job we seek.

Intersectionality: The idea that race, gender and class statuses are not separate but interlocking systems of inequality.

Routinization: Part of Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment referring to the level of repetitiveness found on the job.

Social capital: Trust and support found in relationships with other people.

Social exchange theory: Theory based on the premise that individuals enter into relationships that provide some benefit to them and end or leave relationships that do not provide some sort of reward.

Social stratification: The ways in which individuals or groups are ranked in society.

Substantive complexity: Part of Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment referring to how complicated the actual work is on the job.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

43

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. a

3. c

4. d

5. a

6. d

Notes

44

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Objectives

45

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Five Self and Identity

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Identify the components of the self.

2. Determine interactionist theories of the self and identity.

3. Characterize three dimensions of the self-concept.

4. Analyze what we know from research on the self-concept.

5. Interpret how group processes affect identity.

• Read pages 121-149 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

46

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter reviews the different ways that sociologists study the meaning of the concepts of self and identity and the structural and group conditions that impact the self. It will address the components of the self; interactionist theories of the self and identity; three dimensions of self- concept; and how group processes affect identity.

Key Terms

47

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect-control theory:

Backstage:

Dramaturgical sociology:

Emotional arousal:

I:

Identity:

Mastery:

Mattering:

Me:

Personal characteristics:

Psychological centrality:

Self:

Self-enhancement:

Self-esteem:

Self-indication:

Verbal persuasion:

Vicarious experience:

Summary

48

PSY 228 Social Psychology

From a symbolic interactionist perspective, the self is a process in which we construct a sense of who we are. We use symbols and language to communicate with other people, but we also use language to think internally. The self includes a dialogue between the “I” and the “Me”.

Identity includes our social categories and personal characteristics. Identity theory examines how social conditions affect the salience of identities and thus our behavior. Affect-control theory incorporates emotions in identity processes.

The self-concept refers to all our thoughts and feelings about ourselves as an object, often studied in the form of identities, self-esteem, mattering and mastery. Class, race, and gender are important social statuses that influence our self-development over time. Social identity theory argues that people define and evaluate themselves in terms of the groups they belong to, including one’s race and gender.

Self Test

49

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. What part of the self-concept is mastery?

a. the self b. self-identities c. self-evaluations d. self indication

2. Debating what other people are thinking about you in a public setting is best represented by what term?

a. self-concept b.self-identities c. self-evaluations d. self indication

3. According to Mead, which aspect of our self is out in public, constantly processing new information related to the self?

a. the “I” b. the “Me” c. self-concept d. self indication

4. Which of the following is NOT an element of identity?

a. social categories b. role identities c. personal characteristics d. self attitudes

5. Being a Canadian applies to which aspect of identity?

a. social categories b. role identities c. personal characteristics d. self attitudes

Self Test

50

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Identity theory comes from which social-psychological perspective?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functional

Answer Keys

51

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect-control theory: The theory that incorporates elements of symbolic interactionism and identity theory to explain the role of emotion in identity processes.

Backstage: Part of dramaturgical sociology referring to the region where we relax our impression management efforts.

Dramaturgical sociology: The study of how we present ourselves, playing roles and managing impressions during interactions with other people.

Emotional arousal: Inferences about our abilities based on our emotional states that we use to build our sense of mastery.

I: The part of the self that is active, engaging in interactions with others.

Identity: Our internalized, stable sense of who we are.

Mastery: Our perceptions of our ability to control things important to us.

Mattering: Our sense that we are important to other people in the world.

Me: The part of the self that includes an organized set of attitudes toward the self.

Personal characteristics: Anything we use to describe our individual nature.

Psychological centrality: Our ability to shift aspects of the self to become more or less important to our overall self-concept.

Self: A process in which we construct a sense of who we are through interaction with others.

Self-enhancement: In social identity theory, the process through which we make comparisons that favor our own groups.

Self-esteem: The positive or negative evaluation of our self as an object.

Self-indication: The use of symbols and language to communicate internally.

Verbal persuasion: Information from others about our abilities used to derive mastery.

Vicarious experience: A way of building mastery by seeing other people perform tasks; it shows us that the task is accomplishable.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

52

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. a

4. d

5. a

6. a

Notes

53

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Objectives

54

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Six Socialization Over the Lifer Course

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Critique how society influences the social construction of the self.

2. Chart the stages involved in developing the self.

3. Name the four elements of life-course sociology.

4. Consider agents of socialization and how they affect our lives.

5. Assess how group processes researchers study socialization.

• Read pages 150-187 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

55

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to define socialization and the life course and the major theories and research associated with these ideas.

Key Terms

56

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency:

Birth cohort:

Contextual dissonance:

Gender socialization:

Idiocultures:

Life course:

Life events:

Linked lives:

Looking-glass self:

Pygmalion effect:

Socialization:

Summary

57

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociologists study socialization processes at every stage of development from childhood to late adulthood. The self develops through a symbolic process. An essential aspect of self-development is the ability to take the role of the other.

The sociology of childhood focuses on how children are active participants in creating culture. Life-course sociology is based on the notion that humans adapt to different situations based on their social and historical location, relative to different events and cultural “moments.” Four major themes in life-course sociology include historical context, timing, linked lives and agency.

Sociologists view agents of socialization as mediators of the larger society rather than direct causes of socialization. The family is considered the primary agent of socialization because children are raised from infancy with parents and often siblings. Schools and peers are two other important agents of socialization.

The group processes perspective often examines the role of socialization after it has occurred, reviewing, for instance, how expectations about gender or race affect group interactions.

Self Test

58

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Sammy is using dolls to represent people in a doll house. Based on Mead’s theory of child development, at what stage of development is she?

a. preparatory stage b. play stage c. game stage d. toy stage

2. A little boy playing in a baseball team is probably in which stage of development using Mead’s typology?

a. preparatory stage b. play stage c. game stage d. toy stage

3. Which social psychologist is associated with the looking-glass self?

a. George Herbert Mead b. Michel Foucault c. Georg Simmel d. Charles Horton Cooley

4. Studies have shown that factors such as parenting style, resources and status can dramatically affect the outcomes of children of divorced parents.

a. True b. False

5. Studies have found that father’s household labor participation has little effect on their son’s future household labor sharing.

a. True b. False

Self Test

59

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Several studies have shown that there is a correlation between watching violent television and aggressive behavior.

a. True b. False

Answer Keys

60

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency: An aspect of life-course sociology referring to our ability to improvise roles, make decisions and control our destiny.

Birth cohort: A group of people born around the same time period.

Contextual dissonance: A feeling that minority members of a group have because they are different from the majority members.

Gender socialization: Learning expectations about how to behave related to one’s gender.

Idiocultures: A system of knowledge, beliefs, behaviors and customs shared by an interacting group to which members refer and employ as a basis of further interaction.

Life course: The process of change from infancy to late adulthood resulting from personal and societal events and from transitions into and out of social roles.

Life events: Event that can cause significant changes in the course of our lives.

Linked lives: An aspect of life-course sociology referring to our relationships with other people.

Looking-glass self: How the self relies on imagined responses of others in its development.

Pygmalion effect: When children develop according to expectations of a group or society.

Socialization: The ways in which individuals attempt to align their own thoughts, feelings, and behavior to fit into a group or society.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

61

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. b

2. c

3. d

4. a

5. b

6. a

Notes

62

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 2 Examination Instructions

63

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Two Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 2 Examination

64

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. How does Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment link economic status, job characteristics and personality?

a. People with lower economic status tend to find work in jobs that have more supervision. b. People with lower economic status tend to find work in jobs that require less intellectual flexibility. c. People with less intellectual flexibility tend to seek jobs that are routinized. d. All of the above.

2. Bradley, a student at Big U, regularly seeks advice from his professor and mentor, Janet. According to exchange theory, what kind of exchange is most likely motivating Janet to stay in this relationship?

a. a direct exchange b. a reciprocal exchange c. a generalized exchange d. All of the above.

3. What was being exchanged among crew members and the captain in George Homan’s research about exchange processes on small warships?

a. support b. caring c. listening d. All of the above.

4. Who gets the most status in groups based on Bales’ research in social exchanges in small groups?

a. Those who are perceived as the best managers. b. Those who are perceived as being the smartest. c. Those who contribute the most to the group. d. Those who listen and care the most for the other members.

5. Which of the following best reflects a task group used to study status processes in groups?

a. A group of students at a class lecture. b. A group of people waiting in line to pay at a store. c. A group of citizens meeting to resolve a local problem. d. All of the above.

Unit 2 Examination

65

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Why are weak ties so important for finding work?

a. People with whom we have weak ties live and work in circles outside our own. b. People with whom we have weak ties tend to have better jobs. c. People with whom we have weak ties aren’t biased against us in the job market. d. People with whom we have weak ties provide training in getting better jobs.

7. According to status characteristics theory, gender, race and education levels are examples of _______________.

a. diffuse status characteristics b. specific status characteristics c. roles d. class positions

8. According to status characteristics theory, skill at playing basketball would be considered _______________.

a. diffuse status characteristics b. specific status characteristics c. roles d. class positions

9. People are ______________ aware of the status hierarchies that develop in task-oriented groups.

a. almost always b. usually not c. always d. None of the above.

10. Which theorist is most associated with impression management?

a. Auguste Comte b. Emile Durkheim c. Herbert Blumer d. Erving Goffman

11. According to dramaturgical sociology, what area of identity is associated with hanging out with friends while watching television?

a. front stage b. back stage c. performance stage d. informal groups

Unit 2 Examination

66

PSY 228 Social Psychology

12. A first date would most likely be associated with what area of identity?

a. front stage b. back stage c. performance stage d. informal groups

13. Spencer Cahill’s research on “bathroom behavior” clearly showed that _______________.

a. people act very differently in bathrooms than other areas of life b. serve as “self-service” repair shops c. people use bathrooms to “retire” from their front stage presentations d. All of the above.

14. Which of the following has the strongest impact on self-esteem?

a. social comparisons b. reflected appraisals c. psychological centrality d. self-perceptions

15. _____________ are observations of our behavior and its consequences.

a. Reflected appraisals b. Self-perceptions c. Social comparisons d. Psychological centrality

16. What is the best way to build a child’s sense of mastery or efficacy?

a. personal accomplishments b. vicarious experience c. verbal persuasion d. emotional arousal

17. Rosenberg’s early research on mattering found it positively related to _______________ and negatively related to ________________.

a. self-esteem; alcoholism b. depression; self-esteem c. self-esteem; depression d. mastery; depression

Unit 2 Examination

67

PSY 228 Social Psychology

18. Given research and theory in life-course sociology, which of the following groups are most likely to be negatively affected by Hurricane Katrina?

a. a poor White family who survived the storm together b. a poor African-American family who survived the storm together c. a middle-class White man who lost his income and had no access to family or friends during the event d. a middle-class African-American family who survived the storm together

19. Tony and Rose both received word that they were called up for active duty in the military out of the reserve component of the forces. Tony is several years older with a wife and child while Rose is just finishing college. Which dimension of life course sociology best explains why Tony is more likely to be affected by the mobilization than Rose?

a. historical context b. linked lives c. social timing d. agency

20. Which of the following is NOT considered a primary agent of socialization?

a. family b. peers c. schools d. government

21. Elder’s study of the Great Depression generally showed that ______________.

a. all children were negatively affected by growing up in the Great Depression b. only children growing up in poverty were affected by the Great Depression c. the Great Depression had the strongest impact on children’s lives by changing family roles d. both b and c

22. Kohn’s work on class socialization generally showed that middle-class families tend to stress ______________ while working-class families emphasize _______________ in raising their children.

a. autonomy; conformity b. conformity; freedom c. freedom; independence d. conformity; autonomy

Unit 2 Examination

68

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. Rosenthal and Jacobson’s study of classroom interaction is important because:

a. it showed that children are taught to be racist in the classroom. b. it showed that IQ scores could be manipulated based on a group prejudice. c. it showed that children’s IQ scores were not linked to race at all. d. it showed that racist beliefs and values exist in every classroom.

24. Which of the following groups are most prevalent in American schools based on Adler and Adler’s research on peer culture?

a. the popular click b. the wannabes c. middle friendship circles d. social isolates

25. Group processes researcher is important to the study of socialization in what way?

a. It shows the importance of peer-group interactions in socialization processes. b. It shows the importance of family interactions. c. It shows the importance of the media. d. It emphasizes the impact of socialization in group settings.

Unit 2 Examination

69

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Two

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. Describe the concept of “doing gender.” Apply this process to other statuses in society (e.g., race, ethnicity or sexuality).

2. Review the three ways that interactionists view the development and maintenance of stratification in society.

3. Discuss the similarities and differences between identity theory and social identity theory.

You Can Do It

70

PSY 228 Social Psychology

With Unit 2 complete, you are half way through the course.

Take a break and reward yourself

for a job well done!

Objectives

71

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Seven The Social Psychology of Deviance

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Analyze how we define what is normal and what is deviant.

2. Determine how the construction of deviant labels contribute to the development of deviant lifestyles.

3. Judge how structural conditions influence individuals’ decisions to commit deviant acts.

4. Consider how group relationships influence the development of deviance and perceptions of deviance.

• Read pages 190-220 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

72

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter examines major sociological concepts and theories associated with the concept of deviance.

Interactionists generally view deviance as a normal part of the symbolic interaction process. Structural and group-centered views of deviance tend to focus on the social conditions that increase the likelihood of breaking laws. These views come from the larger social science specialty of criminology. This chapter emphasizes the broader sense of deviance in everyday life, before reviewing traditional theories and research on criminal forms of deviance.

Key Terms

73

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Anomie:

Attachment:

Belief:

Covering:

Deviance:

Indexicality:

Labeling theory:

Mores:

Reflexivity:

Social control theory:

Summary

74

PSY 228 Social Psychology

From a social-psychological perspective, deviance is a necessary part of the symbolic interaction process of negotiating social reality. Interactionism assumes that individuals decide to maintain (or break) social norms and standards during every interaction. Deviance allows for change in relationships and society as a whole.

Ethnomethodological perspectives of deviance emphasize how individuals construct and defend their views of social reality—the “real” boundaries of social life. People who can provide better accounts can convince others of those accounts, thus controlling the meaning of good and bad— deviance and conformity—in society.

Labeling theory is a major interactionist perspective of deviance. It is based on the notion that deviance is a consequence of a social process in which a negative characteristic becomes an element of an individual’s identity.

Strain and social control theories apply macrosociological perspectives of deviant behavior, arguing that deviance results from a larger set of societal conditions. Societal norms create limitations to how we can achieve legitimate goals in life. They also give goals that are unattainable for some people.

Groups provide both the motives and the knowledge necessary to commit crime. Differential association theory states that deviance is learned through interaction with others. This theory may help explain how and why people rationalize deviant behavior, especially in white-collar crimes committed by middle- and upper-class people.

Self Test

75

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Some individuals choose a life of deviance because of the satisfaction they derive from the act and deviant lifestyle.

a. True b. False

2. Which of the following statements best describes interactionist perspective(s) on deviance?

a. Deviance is relative to a given group of people or society. b. Deviance is relatively consistent across groups and society. c. What it means to be deviant is constructed through a process of indexicality and reflexivity. d. both a and c

3. According to labeling theory, a primary act of deviance does not always lead to a secondary act of deviance.

a. true b. false

4. According to Edwin Lemert, how is society involved in the deviance process?

a. during primary deviance, when society makes deviance symbolic in nature b. during secondary deviance, when society labels a person as deviant c. during the process of hiring police personnel to put away criminals d. during the process of committing the deviant act and accepting the deviant label

5. Which of the following is true of William Chambliss’ research on the Saints and the Roughnecks?

a. The Saints committed significantly less crime than the Roughnecks but were more likely to get caught. b. The Saints committed significantly less crime than the Roughnecks but only the Roughnecks got caught. c. The Saints committed somewhat higher levels of deviance as the Roughnecks but the Roughnecks were more likely to be caught than the Saints. d. The Roughnecks committed less crime and were rarely caught.

Self Test

76

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. How did Howard Becker’s research contribute to the understanding of deviance?

a. It showed the important role of deviant subcultures in the maintenance of deviant identities. b. It reinforced the relationship between primary and secondary deviance. c. He showed that even drug experiences can be influenced by social conditions. d. All of the above.

Answer Keys

77

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Anomie: A sense of “normlessness” where there is little consensus about what is right and what is wrong.

Attachment: Component of social control theory referring to emotional bonds with other people in society.

Belief: Component of social control theory referring to people’s respect for law and order in society.

Covering: Keeping a known stigma from creating tensions in interaction by downplaying it.

Deviance: Any behavior that departs from accepted practices in a society or group.

Indexicality: The process by which individuals index thoughts, feelings and behaviors from their own perspective.

Labeling theory: Theory that argues deviance is a consequence of a social process in which a negative characteristic becomes an element of an individual’s identity.

Mores: Widely held values and beliefs in a society.

Reflexivity: The process by which individuals think about a behavior within its social context and give meaning to it.

Social control theory: Theory that deviance results when individuals’ bonds with conventional society are weakened in some way.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

78

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. a

2. d

3. a

4. b

5. c

6. d

Notes

79

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Objectives

80

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Eight Mental Health and Illness

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Determine what it means to be mentally healthy.

2. Interpret how the definition of mental illness is constructed.

3. List the structural conditions in society that contribute to distress.

4. Identify resources that can buffer stress.

5. Assess how mental health can influence our sense of identity and interactions with others.

• Read pages 221-246 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

81

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter examines mental health as an outcome of social life, influenced by social conditions and as a status characteristic that impacts our social interactions.

Once you read the sociological perspectives on mental health and illness, you may rethink what it means to have psychological problems.

Key Terms

82

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Ambient hazards:

Chronic strains:

Colonization:

Intransigence:

Malaise:

Moderators:

Negative life events:

Sociology of mental health:

Total institutions:

Withdrawal:

Summary

83

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The history of madness and civilization shows that the meaning and treatment of mental illness has changed dramatically over the centuries. In Europe, into the seventeenth century, mental illness was considered similar to other forms of deviance such as criminality.

Sociologists view many manifestations of mental illness to be the result of social conditions that tax individuals’ capacity to manage their lives. The stress process model helps us understand the relationship of negative life events and chronic strains to our mental health and well-being, focusing also on the resources we use to manage those stressors.

Social and economic characteristics are associated with different levels of distress, with social class status a critical factor in the stress process. Other important social characteristics that are implicated in the experience of stressors, the level of resources, and the expressions of distress include gender, age and race/ethnicity.

According to the group processes perspective, people set up different expectations for individuals’ performance depending on their status characteristics. Mental illness may be considered a diffuse status characteristic that influences members’ expectations of the mentally ill in a group setting, as well as the contributions made by those members.

Mental illness may be a form of stigma for individuals, an attribute that is deeply discrediting. Patients housed in mental institutions may try to cope in many different ways, including conversion, intransigence and forms of withdrawal and colonization.

Self Test

84

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Why was 1656 an important date in the history of mental illness according to Michel Foucault?

a. It is the year that psycho-tropic drugs started becoming widely available in Europe. b. It is the year that the “hospital general” opened, marking the beginning of the great confinement of mentally ill people. c. It is the first year in which psychoanalysis was used to treat mentally ill people. d. It was the first year that psychotropic drugs were introduced to the new world.

2. Which of the following forces are associated with putting aspects of social life, including mental illness, under the boundaries of medical professionals?

a. the power and authority of medical professionals b. activities of social movements and interest groups c. directed organization on professional activities d. All of the above are forces affecting medicalization.

3. Which social theorist argued that mental illness is a “myth?”

a. Peter Conrad b. Michel Foucault c. Thomas Szaz d. Herbert Blumer

4. Horwitz and Wakefield’s research focused on trends to increasingly diagnose individuals with clinical depression as the “loss of sadness” in society.

a. True b. False

5. What kind of stressors do college students typically report?

a. adjustment problems b. death of a loved one c. job loss d. fear of professors

Self Test

85

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Which of the following is NOT a measurement of someone’s depression levels?

a. I did not feel like eating. b. I felt depressed. c. I felt everything was an effort. d. All of the above are measures of depression.

Answer Keys

86

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Ambient hazards: Exposure to poor community conditions such as crime, poor living conditions and lack of services.

Chronic strains: Day-to-day role strains that may cause mental health problems over time by the accumulation of small amounts of stress.

Colonization: A way in which patients manage institutionalization by showing that their institution is a desirable place to live.

Intransigence: A way in which patients manage institutionalization by rebelling against the staff expectations.

Malaise: A psychological state of unhappiness associated with living conditions in rural or urban areas.

Moderators: Part of the stress process that includes the personal and social resources that affect the direction or strength of the relationship between a stressor and mental health.

Negative life events: Part of the stress process referring to any event deemed unwanted or stressful to an individual.

Sociology of mental health: The study of the social arrangements that affect mental illness and its consequences.

Total institutions: Places where individuals are isolated from the rest of society.

Withdrawal: A way of managing life in an institution involving the curtailing of interaction with others.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

87

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. b

2. d

3. c

4. a

5. a

6. d

Notes

88

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Objectives

89

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Nine Attitudes, Values, and Behaviors

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Identify the nature of an attitude.

2. Evaluate how researchers study attitudes and behaviors.

3. Describe how people construct attitudes.

4. Analyze how attitudes toward other people form in group contexts.

• Read pages 247-276 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

90

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to review the definition and measurement of attitudes and values and to examine research on how people use their time. Specific emphasis is given to prejudicial attitudes and behavior.

In this chapter, after discussing how attitudes are conceptualized, three areas of study within sociological social psychology will be emphasized. First, we will examine how attitudes are constructed from an interactionist perspective. Second, we will examine how attitudes vary by social location. Finally, we will apply the group processes perspective on attitudes, particularly related to attitudes toward other people in groups.

Key Terms

91

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Altruism:

Attitude:

In-groups:

Opinion:

Prejudice:

Prosocial behavior:

Social distance:

Status construction theory:

Time deepening:

Values and beliefs:

Summary

92

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Attitudes incorporate emotional, cognitive and behavioral dimensions—how we feel, think and act toward an object. Attitudes are measured in terms of their direction and strength, though people can also have nonattitudes toward objects. Time-use studies measure behaviors and can be characterized as either productive time, such as work and family care, or free time, including activities such as watching television or socializing.

The relationship between attitudes and behavior, on average, is typically small with an average correlation of 0.38. The weak relationship between attitudes and behavior—and of attitudes with other attitudes—may reflect poor measurement of attitudes or the complexities of attitudes themselves. Interactionist perspectives view attitudes like any other aspect of social life: they are constructed based on our interactions with other people. Our group memberships can have a large influence in our attitudes toward people in other groups based on the relative standing of those groups.

Some attitudes and opinions have been found to vary based on social statuses. Men and women regularly report different attitudes toward some social issues, as do African Americans and whites. Many attitudes toward major social issues have changed over the last half century, indicating that newer cohorts have different values than earlier generations.

Status construction theory posits that individuals develop status value through face-to-face interaction as well as from larger societal prejudices. Social identity theory emphasizes the role of in-groups and out-groups in our attitude development.

Self Test

93

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Your evaluation of a new political candidate may best be described as a(n) _____________ while your overall political ideology may better be described as a(n) _____________.

a. ideology; value b. value; attitude c. attitude; value d. both refer to attitudes

2. In a recent poll, Darnell told the interviewer that he does not care either way in the election. His response reflects what concept?

a. ideology b. values c. attitudes d. nonattitudes

3. Melissa had planned to play 18 holes of golf on the weekend but decided to cut it down to nine holes so that she could go to lunch with her boyfriend. What kind of behavior is she engaging in?

a. time deepening b. time management c. stress processing d. bureaucratic management

4. Americans have more productive time than free time.

a. true b. false

5. The relationship between our attitudes and behavior is typically ____________.

a. strong b. small c. 1 in average correlation d. 0 in average correlation

Self Test

94

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Research generally shows that American attitudes on most major social issues have been pretty stable over the last 30 years.

a. true b. false

Answer Keys

95

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Altruism: Refers to the motivation to help another person.

Attitude: A positive or negative evaluation of an object, a person, a group or an idea.

In-groups: Groups with whom we identify.

Opinion: The cognitive or “thinking” aspect of an attitude.

Prejudice: An attitude of dislike or active hostility toward a particular group in society.

Prosocial behavior: Includes any behavior that benefits another person.

Social distance: How close we feel to other people.

Status construction theory: Group processes theory that posits that individuals develop status value in face-to-face interactions with other people.

Time deepening: When people do more with the time that they have available to them.

Values and beliefs: Strongly held, relatively stable sets of attitudes.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

96

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. a

4. a

5. b

6. b

Notes

97

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 3 Examination Instructions

98

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Three Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 3 Examination

99

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Most college students represent which type of person in Merton’s typology of deviance?

a. conformists b. innovators c. ritualists d. retreatists

2. A homeless person who decides to live in the woods is probably best represented by which of the following people using Merton’s typology of deviance?

a. conformists b. innovators c. ritualists d. retreatists

3. Which of the following represent strain according to new interpretations of strain theory?

a. negative relationships with family and friends b. poverty c. unemployment d. All of the above.

4. Which theory of deviance tries to explain why individuals do not commit crime?

a. labeling theory b. strain theory c. social control theory d. theory of differential association

5. Sampson and Laub’s research on delinquent and non-delinquent youths in Boston found delinquency was greater when bonds with which social institutions were weakest?

a. family b. education c. work d. both a and c

Unit 3 Examination

100

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. In high school, Janet rarely got involved in smoking or drinking. In college, Janet found some friends who spent most of their off time consuming large amounts of alcohol and other drugs. Soon, she did the same and did not know anyone who did not spend their time that way. Which theory best explains Janet’s behavior given this limited amount of information?

a. labeling theory b. strain theory c. social control theory d. theory of differential association

7. Which of the following best exemplifies white collar crimes?

a. stealing a purse b. simple assault c. telling a lie to your friend d. embezzling from work

8. Murder would most likely be considered the breaking of a ________________ while picking your nose in public would be breaking a ________________.

a. more; folkway b. folkway; more c. norm; value d. both are mores

9. Scholars contend that ______________ and _______________ are two factors that affect the likelihood of committing a crime.

a. controls; formal sanctions b. certainty; severity c. certainty; informal sanctions d. severity; formal sanctions

10. Given the research on the epidemiology of mental health, which group is most likely to report problems with drinking? Depression?

a. married people; singles b. African-Americans; Latinos c. African-Americans; Whites d. men; women

Unit 3 Examination

101

PSY 228 Social Psychology

11. The stresses associated with living in urban areas come from _____________ while the stresses associated with rural areas tend to be a result of _____________.

a. lack of stimulation; ambient hazards b. ambient hazards; lack of stimulation c. urban malaise; rural malaise d. negative life events; chronic stresses

12. How do group processes scholars examine the concept of mental illness?

a. It is viewed as a status characteristic like race or gender. b. It is viewed as a normal part of group interactions. c. It is viewed as a major area of group research. d. It is viewed as a way for individuals in groups to negotiate identity.

13. Which of the following would be considered a total institution?

a. your college b. a police station c. a prison d. a family household

14. Which sociologist is most associated with the concept of stigma?

a. Erving Goffman b. Georg Simmel c. George Herbert Mead d. Herbert Blumer

15. Goffman’s research on total institutions showed that many patients in insane asylums generally ____________ their roles as patients.

a. resist b. accept c. use colonization to cope with d. None of the above.

16. Which of the following coping strategies emphasize patients’ attempts to rebel against asylum staff?

a. conversion b. intransigence c. withdrawal d. colonization

Unit 3 Examination

102

PSY 228 Social Psychology

17. The loss of a job is represented in which component of the stress process?

a. stressors b. outcomes c. mediators and moderators d. social and economic characteristics

18. LaPiere’s study of prejudice clearly showed that most people _____________.

a. have some prejudice b. act on their prejudices c. do not act on their prejudices d. both a and c

19. Overall, American political attitudes lean on being ______________.

a. very conservative b. moderately conservative c. moderately liberal d. very liberal

20. Which of the following groups could be identified as most liberal in the U.S.?

a. females living in the Midwest b. females living on the West Coast c. males living in the Midwest d. males living on the West Coast

21. Which of the following groups spend the most time on childcare? Which group has shown an increase in time spent with childcare?

a. women for both questions b. men for both questions c. men; women d. women; men

22. Which of the following social theorists is most associated with studying racial prejudice in the United States?

a. George Herbert Mead b. W.E.B. Du Bois c. Talcott Parsons d. William Thomas

Unit 3 Examination

103

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. Based on status construction theory, what would be the best way to get what you want out of a group and leave a positive impression?

a. Act like a very nice person. b. Act like a generous person. c. Act like a majority member of society. d. Act like a high-status person.

24. Willer’s research showing presidential approval ratings increasing after the 9/11 terrorist attacks in the U.S. clearly showed ____________.

a. in-group bias tendencies b. out-group bias tendencies c. prejudicial biases d. ideological alliances

25. The slow treatment of Hurricane Katrina victims was used as an example of ____________ in your text.

a. government inefficiency b. conscious racism c. unconscious racism d. None of the above.

Unit 3 Examination

104

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Three

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. How do symbolic interactionists examine the social construction of mental health? Specifically, review Foucault’s historical analysis of mental illness in western cultures and the medicalization of deviance.

2. Discuss how community conditions can impact individuals’ mental health. Be specific about the role of stressors and resources available under different community conditions (e.g., urban vs. rural; poor vs. middle class).

3. Review the different dimensions of attitudes. How does the complexity in attitudes help to explain the relatively weak relationship between a person’s attitudes and their behaviors?

You Can Do It

105

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 3 is done! You’re close to the finish line and we’re cheering you on to victory!

Objectives

106

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Ten The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Distinguish the components of emotions.

2. Determine how people learn emotions.

3. Consider how identity relates to emotions.

4. Evaluate how our statuses in society affect our uses of emotions.

5. Interpret the norms that govern the use of emotions in different social settings.

6. Predict how group settings affect emotions.

• Read pages 277-306 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

107

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter reviews the many dimensions of sentiment and emotions. It also examines the role of emotions in the development and maintenance of society, as well as the impact of society and culture on the development and expression of emotions.

This chapter will start by reviewing how sociologists study the upward movement of emotions in the creation of society and the social construction of emotions more generally. It will also review the structured nature of emotions and how society shapes the scope and expression of emotions.

Key Terms

108

925 North Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, CA 92701

 

www.calcoast.edu Phone: 714-547-9625 Fax: 714-547-5777

12/14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

 

Tracking Your Academic Activities Verifying an accurate course completion time is essential for accreditation. To meet both accreditation requirements and award academic credit, educational institutions must document the total number of hours students spend completing designated academic activities related to their coursework.

The total hours are then translated into academic credit based on a prescribed method of measuring educational attainment known as the Carnegie Unit. 90 hours of student preparation time and 45 hours of student engagement time are required for a 3 credit hour course.

Using the attached form as an example, keep track of the time you spend on each lesson, pre-test, self-test, unit test, writing assignment, reading assignment, outside reading, final examination, etc. You will not be required to turn in the worksheet; however, at the end of the course you will receive a Student Course Survey and the final question will ask how long it took you to complete the course. Your assistance in completing this requirement and providing the university with this valuable data is greatly appreciated.

As you fill out the worksheet, please keep in mind that your Academic Engagement Activities should total approximately 45 hours. Some examples of this type of activity may include:

Lesson Review Exercises

Key Term Reviews

Analysis

Study Guide Review

Writing Assignments

Review Grading Rubric

Unit Examinations

Proctored Final Examination

Course Academic Online Discussions

Student/Instructor Interaction

Documents/Student Resources

As you fill out the Academic Preparation Activities, please keep in mind that these should total approximately 90 hours. Some samples of this type of activity may include:

Pre-Test

Reading Assignments

Key Term Reviews

Studying for Examinations

Writing Assignments

Review Grading Rubric

Study Lesson Review Exercises

Internet/Web Research

Reading Websites

Suggested Outside Reading

 

 

 

Sample Worksheet for Tracking Your Academic Activities

Upon completion of this course, you will be asked to complete a survey. The last question on the survey will ask you the number of hours it took to complete the course. The total hours are then translated into academic credit based on a prescribed method of measuring educational attainment known as the Carnegie Unit. 90 hours of student preparation time and 45 hours of student engagement time (135 hours) are required for a 3 credit hour course.

This worksheet was developed as a tool to help track your time. You are not required to turn it in.

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Totals

Academic Engagement Activities Lesson Review Exercises Key Term Review Exercises Study Guide Review Documents/Student Resources Writing Assignments Review Grading Rubric Unit Examinations Proctored Final Examination Case Studies/Critical Analysis Course Academic Online Discussions Student/Instructor Interactions

Total Academic Engagement required for a 3 unit course = 45 hours

Academic Preparation Activities Pre-Test Reading Assignments Analyze Case Studies/Critical Analysis Key Term Review Exercises Study for Examinations Suggested Outside Readings Web Research Writing Assignments Review Grading Rubric Reading Websites Study Lesson Review Exercises

Total Academic Preparation required for a 3 unit course = 90 hours

Grand total of hours of various learning activities in completing this course

 

 

 

Pre-test Instructions

Thank you for taking the time to complete the required pre-test. The purpose of the pre-test is to measure your knowledge of the subject matter at the beginning of each course.

Please be assured, your score on the pre-test will not be part of your course grade. We do not want you to try to study for it or be worried about doing well on the pre-test. It is simply a measure of your “starting place,” that will be used for improving course content and to meet accreditation requirements.

If you receive your course materials online: • Please log-in to your Coast Connection student portal to complete your pre-test.

If you receive your course materials by mail: • You will receive your answer sheets for the pre-test by mail. • Once you have completed your pre-test, please mail or fax your answer sheet to the University at:

California Coast University 925 N. Spurgeon Street Santa Ana, CA 92701 Fax: 714-547-1451

If you have any questions, please feel free to contact the Student Services Department. Thank you for your cooperation.

 

 

 

Pre-test

ix

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

Which early sociologist emphasized the role of society in the development of the self? 1.

George Herbert Meada. Karl Marxb. Georg Simmerc. Herbert Blumer d.

____________ is the study of the effects of society on social-psychological processes, also 2. known as sociological social psychology.

sociologya. microsociologyb. macrosociologyc. psychology d.

Which of the following is considered a major dimension of group processes? 3.

legitimacya. justiceb. powerc. All of the above. d.

Perspective within symbolic interactionism that focuses on the quantitative study of social 4. interaction processes because of the stable nature of social life.

Chicago Schoola. Indiana Schoolb. Iowa Schoolc. both b and c d.

The research technique called “autoethnograpy” is associated with which social psychological 5. perspective?

symbolic interactiona. social structure and personalityb. group processesc. structural functionalism d.

Participants of an experiment that are not exposed to the independent variable. 6.

control groupa. convenience sampleb. focus groupc. experimental groupd.

 

 

Pre-test

x

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment is based on a study that began in ____________ 7. that was primarily led by ____________.

1957; Sewella. 1962; Nielsonb. 1965; Granovetterc. 1973; Kohn d.

According to research by Lucas and others, how can individuals with lower cultural status best 8. gain status in groups?

Give that person legitimate authority to lead the group.a. The person should focus on the success of the group, rather then her own interests.b. The person should provide a “kick back” to others in a group to get their leadership c. position. both a and b d.

Research in the 1960s showed a considerable overlap in ___________ and ___________ 9. occupations.

fathers’; sons’a. fathers’; daughters’b. mothers’; daughters’c. mothers’; sons’ d.

How did Joanne Nagel explain the increase in the number of people identifying themselves as 10. “American Indian” when the birth rates stayed the same?

Legal changes made scholarships more available to American Indians.a. The development of the “Red Power” movement shifted negative stereotypes of Indians.b. Urbanization made it easier for people to find and interact with other people that had c. some American-Indian heritage. All of the above. d.

The use of narratives and personal-stories is important to the process of _____________. 11.

symbolic interaction processa. identity control theoryb. mpression managementc. All of the above. d.

 

 

Pre-test

xi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Socialization is a process that _____________. 12.

begins at around two years of agea. lasts until the young twentiesb. begins at birth and continues through the life cyclec. both a and b d.

Sampson and Laub’s research on the impact of World War II (WWII) on men’s lives generally 13. showed that _____________.

WWII served as a turning point for all American soldiersa. IQ was the biggest factor in finding work after the warb. WWII only had an impact on soldiers if they served overseasc. most of the positive effects of war on the lives of soldiers came through their experience d. overseas, in-service training and access to programs like the GI Bill

Ausdale and Feagin’s research on children learning racism is important because 14. _______________.

it shows how children use race as a way to differentiate between peersa. it shows that children apply adult biases and racism in their day-to-day interactionsb. it shows that children use their own race as a way to gain acceptance by teachersc. both a and b d.

Most college students represent which type of person in Merton’s typology of deviance? 15.

conformistsa. innovatorsb. ritualistsc. retreatists d.

Component of social control theory referring to emotional bonds with other people in society. 16.

commitmenta. attachmentb. involvementc. None of the above. d.

 

 

Pre-test

xii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Manuel’s job loss really did not bother him because he did not like his boss. However, he 17. really started getting anxious when he stopped getting his paycheck. In this example, the effect of job loss on anxiety is ______________ by loss of income.

distresseda. moderatedb. mediatedc. constrained d.

Exposure to poor community conditions such as crime, poor living conditions and lack of 18. services.

malaisea. intransigenceb. ambient hazardsc. chronic strain d.

Nathan started attending KKK meetings when he saw some of his African-American neighbors 19. getting better jobs than him. Which of the following theories best explains Nathan’s negative attitude toward African Americans?

social distance theorya. symbolic interactionb. Blumer’s theory of group positionc. status construction theory d.

Theory that prejudicial attitudes reflect a group’s position in society. 20.

status construction theorya. theory of group positionb. modified labeling theoryc. colonization theory d.

A positive or negative evaluation of an object, a person or group or an idea. 21.

attitudea. prejudiceb. opinionc. belief d.

 

 

Pre-test

xiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Following Smelser’s value-added theory, why wouldn’t we expect a poor, third-world nation, 22. based on a barter economy, to develop mass hysteria over stock market problems like the U.S. did in the 1920s?

lack of structural conducivenessa. lack of structural strainb. lack of generalized beliefc. action of social control d.

Expectations about when and how to act excited or angry or any other emotion. 23.

emotional cuesa. emotional scriptsb. emotional energiesc. situational cues d.

When large numbers of people become obsessed with something like the purchase of a 24. product or an activity.

maniaa. crazeb. hysteriac. panic d.

A key ingredient of contagious mental unity, referring to situations in which people lose their 25. inhibitions to act and the tempo of their behavior increases.

intensity of behaviora. panicb. irrational behaviorc. hostile outburstsd.

 

 

 

925 North Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, CA 92701

Text:

Author(s):

Publisher:

S tu

d y G

u id

e

www.calcoast.edu

Phone: 714-547-9625 Fax: 714-547-5777

Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives

Second Edition, 2011

ISBN-13: 9780205661060

David E. Rohall, Melissa A. Milkie and Jeffrey W. Lucas

Pearson

12/14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

 

Message From the President

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Welcome to California Coast University. I hope you will find this course interesting and useful throughout your career. This course was designed to meet the unique needs of students like you who are both highly motivated and capable of completing a degree program through distance learning.

Our faculty and administration have been involved in distance learning for over forty years and understand the characteristics common to successful students in this unique educational environment.

This course was prepared by CCU faculty members who are not only outstanding educators but who have real world experience. They have prepared these guidelines to help you successfully complete your educational goals and to get the most from your distance learning experience.

Again, we hope that you will find this course both helpful and motivating. We send our best wishes as you work toward the completion of your program.

Sincerely,

Thomas M. Neal President

 

 

 

 

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system without written permission from the publisher, except for the inclusion of brief quotation in review. Copyright © 2014 by California Coast University

 

 

 

Syllabus

xxi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Course Number PSY 228

Course Title Social Psychology

Course Description This course offers students an in-depth look at how people come to understand themselves and others in a social context, with considerable emphasis on sociology’s role in social psychology. Students will be given detailed examples of current research studies relating to each of the topics covered in this course such as stratification, deviance and mental health and illness. Each chapter of the text covered in this course will also introduce students to key sociological social psychologists whose research has made a significant contribution to the field.

Units of Credit 3 Units of Credit

Course Objectives Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to:

• Characterize three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

• Differentiate between qualitative and quantitative research methods.

• Determine how group processes affect identity.

• Recognize important agents of socialization.

• Identify physiological, social and behavioral components of emotions.

Learning Resources Textbook: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives 2nd edition, 2011 David E. Rohall, Melissa A. Milkie, and Jeffrey W. Lucas Pearson

ISBN-13: 9780205661060

All course examinations are based on the contents of the textbook required for this course. To successfully complete the examinations, you will need the textbook. You may rent the textbook from the CCU rental library or you may purchase the textbook from another source.

Although this study guide is developed by California Coast University, it may contain materials provided by the publisher of the textbook.

The Study Guide

The study guide was designed to help you further understand the material in the textbook and master the course content. Each study guide chapter corresponds to a chapter in the textbook.

 

 

Syllabus

xxii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Additional Readings and Online Resources

To help you further understand this subject material, additional readings and/or online resources related to this course are listed in this syllabus.

The Library Information and Resources Network, Inc. (LIRN)

Students are provided access to the Library and Information Resources Network, Inc. (LIRN). LIRN provides a centralized management of electronic information resources that allow students to access multiple research databases through one portal. Detailed information on the Library and Information Resources Network, Inc. is available on the California Coast University website under the Resources Tab. For additional information on using the network, LIRN provides a User Guide to help students search for the needed information. This helpful resource is available on the LIRN website. For information on accessing LIRN, please contact California Coast University – library@calcoast.edu or (714) 547-9625.

Supplementary Materials

Unit Examination Answer Sheets* Final Examination Scheduling Form

*Master of Education and Doctor of Education students will not receive unit exam answer sheets. These programs require written responses only.

Your Course Grade

Your grades on course examinations are determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university uses the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

Your grade in this course will be based on the number of points you earn. Grades are based on the percentage of points you earned out of a total of 500 points:

Four Unit Examinations

100 points each 400 points total 80% of your grade

Final Examination

100 points 100 points total 20% of your grade

 

 

Syllabus

xxiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Mastering the Course Content

In order to successfully complete this course, we recommend that you do the following before beginning:

• Be sure that you have the correct edition of the course textbook. Check the ISBN number of your textbook with the ISBN number listed on the cover page of this study guide.

• Review the table of contents at the end of this syllabus. You will only be responsible for the chapters in the textbook that are listed in the table of contents.

Each study guide contains several components selected and developed by the faculty to help you master the content of the course. Each chapter in the study guide corresponds to a chapter in the textbook. Study guides vary depending on the course, but most will include:

Learning Objectives Overviews Self Tests Summaries Key Terms Critical Analysis Questions (graduate and doctoral students only)

The most efficient way to complete this course is to read the materials in both the study guide and textbook in the sequence in which it appears, generally from beginning to end.

Read the Overviews and Summaries

Before reading a chapter of your textbook, review the corresponding learning objectives, overview, key terms and summary sections in the study guide. These were prepared to give you an overview of the content to be learned.

Review the Self Test

After you have reviewed the study guide summaries, look at the items on the self test. As you identify your areas of relative strength and weakness, you will become more aware of the material you will need to learn in greater depth.

Review the Critical Analysis and/or Case Study Questions (Graduate and Doctoral Students Only) The critical analysis questions are designed to help you gain a deeper understanding and appreciation for the course subject matter. This section will encourage you to give additional thought to the topics discussed in the chapter by presenting vignettes or cases with real world relevance.

 

 

Syllabus

xxiv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Read and Review the Chapter

Once you have the scope and organization of the chapter in mind, turn to the corresponding chapter in the textbook and read the material carefully. Keep the learning objectives, self test, critical analysis questions and/or case study questions in mind as you read.

Highlight important concepts and information in your study guide and write notes in the study guide as you read the textbook. These notes will help you study for the unit and final examinations.

Check Your Mastery of Each Chapter

When you feel that you have mastered the concepts presented in the chapter, complete the study guide self test and critical analysis questions and/or case study questions without referring to the textbook or your notes. Correct your responses using the answer key and solutions guide provided in the study guide. Your results will help you identify any areas you need to review.

Unit Examinations

Each course contains four unit examinations and a final examination. Unit examinations usually consist of 25 objective (multiple choice or true/false) test questions. For Master of Education and Doctor of Education students, unit examinations consist of writing assignments only.

Unit examinations may be found approximately every four to six chapters throughout your study guide. Unit examinations are open-book, do not require a proctor and are not timed. This will allow you to proceed at your own pace.

It is recommended that you check your answers against the material in your textbook for accuracy.

Writing Assignments

Each unit examination includes a written component. This assignment may be in the form of written questions or case study problems. The writing assignment affords the student an opportunity to demonstrate a level of subject mastery beyond the objective unit examinations, which reflects his/her ability to analyze, synthesize, evaluate and apply his/her knowledge. The writing assignment materials are found immediately following each unit examination.

Writing assignments are judged on the quality of the response in regard to the question. Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

 

 

Syllabus

xxv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

• Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages.

• Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages.

• Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Plagiarism consists of taking and using the ideas, writings or inventions of another, without giving credit to that person and presenting it as one’s own. This is an offense that the university takes very seriously. An example of a correctly prepared written response may be found by visiting the Coast Connection student portal.

Citation Styles

The majority of your response should be your own original writing based on what you have learned from the textbook. However, students may also use outside materials if applicable. Be sure to provide a reference (or citation) for any materials used, including the required textbook. The following points are designed to help you understand how to provide proper references for your work:

• References are listed in two places.

• The first reference is briefly listed within your answer. This includes identifying information that directs the reader to your list of references at the end of your writing assignment.

• The second reference is at the end of your work in the list of references section.

• All references cited should provide enough identifying information so that the reader can access the original material.

For more detailed information on the proper use of citations, please refer to the CCU Student Handbook located on the Coast Connection student portal.

Submitting Your Unit Examinations and Writing Assignments via the Internet

Students may access the online testing features via the Coast Connection student portal. Multiple choice unit examinations may be completed and submitted online.

 

 

Syllabus

xxvi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Go to the California Coast University homepage at www.calcoast.edu and click on the student login icon at the upper right hand corner. After logging into your account, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the unit examination. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

Writing assignments may be submitted online as well. After logging into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the writing assignment. Here, you will find further information and instructions on how to submit writing assignments through the student portal. Remember to keep a copy of your writing assignments for your own personal records.

Alternatively, if you experience diffulty submitting your writing assignments through the student portal, then you may email your assignments as a Word document attachment to essays@calcoast.edu. When doing so, please adhere to the following guidelines:

• Always submit your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number with your writing assignment.

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

• All responses must be typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size for ease of reading and grading.

Submitting Your Unit Examinations by Mail

Send your completed unit examination along with any writing assignments to the following mailing address:

California Coast University Testing Department 925 N. Spurgeon Street Santa Ana, CA 92701

Requests to retake a unit examination will only be honored if the final exam has NOT been sent.

 

 

Syllabus

xxvii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Students may retake one unit examination per course, free of charge. The cost for each additional, repeated exam will be $90. Payment must be paid in full to the accounting department prior to repeating unit exams.

Please contact Student Services for a repeat unit examination form. You may resubmit your unit examination once the original grade has been cleared from your online degree plan.

Final Examination

Scheduling a Final Examination

Final examination requests can be submitted via U.S. mail, online through the Coast Connection student portal, or by calling the Testing Department at (714) 547-9625.

A final exam scheduling form is located on the last page of this study guide. Please fill out ALL required fields and mail it to the university.

If you would like to request a final exam online, log into the Coast Connection student portal and click on My Academic Plan. Select the course you are working on and submit the Final Exam Request form located at the bottom of the page. ALL INFORMATION MUST BE FILLED IN.

Submitting Your Final Examination

Final Examinations can be submitted by mail, fax or online through the Coast Connection student portal.

After you have completed your exam, you or your proctor can fax it to the Grading Department at (714) 547-1451 or mail it to the university. When faxing exams, please do not resize your fax.

For online submissions, once you have logged into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the final examination. You must input the unique password that was sent to your proctor in order to unlock your final examination questions. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

Proctors

The university requires that all final examinations be completed under the supervision of a proctor.

A proctor can be anyone EXCEPT an immediate family member, someone who resides with you or a current/former CCU student.

 

 

Syllabus

xxviii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The purpose of the proctored final examination is to verify that you are, in fact, the person who is enrolled in the course of study. It is also to verify that you are completing the final examination without the aid of any outside assistance.

During the proctored final examination, you may use your textbook and any notes you have taken during the completion of your unit examinations. Your designated proctor will verify your identity and that you have completed the final examination without any outside assistance.

Your Overall Grade Point Average (G.P.A.)

In addition to receiving a passing grade for each course, all students must maintain a required overall G.P.A. in order to graduate. Undergraduate students need an overall G.P.A. of 2.0 (C) on a 4.0 scale. Graduate and doctoral students need an overall G.P.A. of 3.0 (B) on a 4.0 scale.

A = 4 grade points B = 3 grade points C = 2 grade points D = 1 grade point F = 0 grade points

Students who do not meet the overall G.P.A. requirement by the end of their program must pay the current cost of tuition to repeat courses until they improve their overall G.P.A.

Overall course grades of “F” will be displayed on your degree plan and count as 0 units completed. You must pay to retake these courses.

Doctoral students must repeat any courses in which the overall course grade is a “D” or “F”.

Be sure to keep a copy of all work you submit to the university.

 

 

Syllabus

xxix

PSY 228 Social Psychology

If you have any questions about how to proceed through the course or regarding any California Coast University policies and procedures, the easiest way to get help is to send us a message through the student portal, via email, or phone the university.

University office hours are Monday through Friday from 8:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Pacific Standard Time.

California Coast University

925 N. Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, California 92701 Phone: (714) 547-9625 Fax: (714) 547-5777 Test Answer Sheet Fax Line: (714) 547-1451

Email: testing@calcoast.edu

Don’t forget: You are not alone! We are here to help you achieve your dream!

PS Y

22 8

 

 

Syllabus

xxx

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

The learning objectives for this course are listed below:

Chapter 1: Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology

1. Define social psychology. 2. Differentiate between macrosociology and microsociology. 3. Compare and contrast sociologists and psychologists’ approach to social psychology. 4. Identify the three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

Chapter 2: Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology

1. Distinguish the major principles of the symbolic interaction perspective. 2. Define what it means to “construct” the world around us. 3. Characterize the social structure and personality perspective. 4. Identify key elements of the group processes perspective. 5. Consider elements of group structure.

Chapter 3: Studying People

1. Become acquainted with the vocabulary of social science research. 2. Differentiate qualitative sociology from quantitative sociology. 3. Determine major forms of qualitative and quantitative research. 4. Assess how social scientists begin to develop a research project.

Chapter 4: The Social Psychology of Stratification

1. Interpret how people construct inequality in society. 2. Determine how structure is linked to interactions. 3. Evaluate how stratification develops in group interaction. 4. Judge how inequalities from society-at-large get reproduced in groups.

Chapter 5: Self and Identity

1. Identify the components of the self. 2. Determine interactionist theories of the self and identity. 3. Characterize three dimensions of the self-concept. 4. Analyze what we know from research on the self-concept. 5. Interpret how group processes affect identity.

 

 

Syllabus

xxxi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter 6: Socialization Over the Life Course

1. Critique how society influences the social construction of the self. 2. Chart the stages involved in developing the self. 3. Name the four elements of life-course sociology. 4. Consider agents of socialization and how they affect our lives. 5. Assess how group processes researchers study socialization.

Chapter 7: The Social Psychology of Deviance

1. Analyze how we define what is normal and what is deviant. 2. Determine how the construction of deviant labels contribute to the development of deviant lifestyles. 3. Judge how structural conditions influence individuals’ decisions to commit deviant acts. 4. Consider how group relationships influence the development of deviance and perceptions of deviance.

Chapter 8: Mental Health and Illness

1. Determine what it means to be mentally healthy. 2. Interpret how the definition of mental illness is constructed. 3. List the structural conditions in society that contribute to distress. 4. Identify resources that can buffer stress. 5. Assess how mental health can influence our sense of identity and interactions with others.

Chapter 9: Attitudes, Values and Behaviors

1. Identify the nature of an attitude. 2. Evaluate how researchers study attitudes and behaviors. 3. Describe how people construct attitudes. 4. Analyze how attitudes toward other people form in group contexts.

Chapter 10: The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion

1. Distinguish the components of emotions. 2. Determine how people learn emotions. 3. Consider how identity relates to emotions. 4. Evaluate how our statuses in society affect our uses of emotions. 5. Interpret the norms that govern the use of emotions in different social settings. 6. Predict how group settings affect emotions.

 

 

Syllabus

xxxii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter 11: Collective Behavior

1. Analyze how crowds contribute to the development of mass hysteria. 2. Identify theories that explain individuals’ behavior in large groups. 3. Decide whether structural conditions affect crowd behaviors. 4. Chart the phases of collective behavior found in large social movements. 5. Evaluate how group and individual motivations interact in social movements.

 

 

Syllabus

xxxiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Best, Joel. 2006. Flavor of the Month: Why Smart People Fall for Fads. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.

Clarke, Lee. 2006. Worst Cases: Terror and Catastrophe in the Popular Imagination. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Gergen, Kenneth J. 2000. The Saturated Self: Dilemmas of Identity in Contemporary Life. New York: Basic Books.

Hertz, Rosanna. 2006. Single by Chance, Mothers by Choice: How Women are Choosing Parenthood without Marriage and Creating the New American Family. New York: Oxford University Press.

Horowitz, Allan V. 2002. Creating Mental Illness. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Lareau, Annette. 2003. Unequal Childhoods: Class, Race and Family Life. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.

Miller, David L. 2000. Introduction to Collective Behavior and Collective Action. Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland.

Polletta, Francesca. 2006. It was Like a Fever: Storytelling in Protest and Politics. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.

Ream, Robert Ketner. 2005. Uprooting Children: Mobility, Social Capital and Mexican American Underachievement. New York: LFB Scholarly Publishing.

Scheff, Thomas J. 1990. Microsociology: Discourse, Emotion and Social Structure. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Swidler, Ann. 2001. Talk of Love: How Culture Matters. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Turner,Ralph H. and Lewis M. Killian. 1972. Collective Behavior. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Zelizer, Viviana. 2005. The Purchase of Intimacy. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.

Suggested Readings

 

 

Table of Contents

xxxiv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Syllabus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii-xx

Unit One Chapter 1: Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 2: Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chapter 3: Studying People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Unit 1 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Unit 1 Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Unit 1 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Unit Two

Chapter 4: The Social Psychology of Stratification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Chapter 5: Self and Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Chapter 6: Socialization Over the Life Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Unit 2 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Unit 2 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Unit 2 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Unit Three

Chapter 7: The Social Psychology of Deviance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Chapter 8: Mental Health and Illness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Chapter 9: Attitudes, Values and Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Unit 3 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Unit 3 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Unit 3 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Unit Four Chapter 10: The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Chapter 11: Collective Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Unit 4 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Unit 4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Unit 4 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Final Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Final Exam Scheduling Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

 

 

Objectives

1

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter One Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Define social psychology.

2. Differentiate between macrosociology and microsociology.

3. Compare and contrast sociologists and psychologists’ approach to social psychology.

4. Identify the three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

• Read pages 1-24 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

2

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter is designed to give students an understanding of how sociologists study social psychology and its role in the larger field of sociology. Students will gain an understanding of the distinction between psychology and sociology and be able to explain the major sociological social psychology perspectives.

 

 

Key Terms

3

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Breaching experiments:

Culture:

Ethnomethodology:

Macrosociology:

Organizations:

Psychology:

Roles:

Social norms:

Social psychology:

Sociological imagination:

Symbolic interactionism:

 

 

Summary

4

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociology is the study of society. Sociologists look at society from both the macro and the micro level of analysis. Both psychological and sociological social psychologists study the social contexts of human thoughts, feelings and behaviors. Sociologists, however, also apply the perspectives and methods of the field of sociology to the study of social psychology.

Sociology was first defined in 1838 by French social philosopher, August Comte, who applied the principles of the scientific method to society. Some of the founders of sociological social psychology include George Herbert Mead, W.E.B. Dubois, William Thomas, Charles Horton Cooley and George Simmel. Three major perspectives in sociological social psychology include symbolic interactionism, social structure and personality and group processes.

Sociologists use a tool kit consisting of methods and concepts for studying the role of society in social psychological processes. Their tools include such concepts as statuses, roles, norms and values, culture and social institutions—which they apply to the study of human thoughts—feelings and behavior.

 

 

Self Test

5

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. How can macrosociological perspectives be used to study individual, micro-level interactions?

a. Macrosociological conditions may cause some individual-level conditions to exist in the first place. b. Differences in our macrosociological conditions may change the way we react to life events. c. Life events that affect us the most are often caused by societal conditions. d. All of the above.

2. Janna wanted to study the effects of population size on individuals’ decision to commit suicide. Which social psychological perspective is she most likely to use?

a. psychology b. sociology c. sociological social psychology d. psychological social psychology

3. Which macrosociological perspective views society as social systems composed of parts that serve to keep the system working properly?

a. conflict perspective b. symbolic interactionism c. behavioralism d. structural functionalism

4. Joe started noticing that kids from the upper classes tend to get accepted at better colleges than the kids from the middle and lower classes. His analysis probably comes from which macrosociological perspective?

a. conflict perspective b. symbolic interactionism c. behavioralism d. structural functionalism

 

 

Self Test

6

PSY 228 Social Psychology

5. Sociological social psychology is different from psychological social psychology because:

a. it focuses on the effects of societal conditions on individuals’ thoughts, feelings and behavior. b. it incorporates sociological perspectives and theories to explain individuals’ thoughts, feelings and behavior. c. it is a subfield of sociology, not psychology. d. All of the above.

6. Social psychology is the systematic study of individual thoughts, feelings and behavior in a social context. Which of the following social contexts are more likely to be studied by sociologists than psychologists?

a. small groups b. family interactions c. ethnic groups d. friendship groups

 

 

Answer Keys

7

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Breaching experiments: Experiments that violate the established social order to assess how people construct social reality.

Culture: A society’s set of unique patterns of behavior and beliefs.

Ethnomethodology: A method of studying society through observation of people’s typical day-to-day interactions.

Macrosociology: The study of large-scale social processes.

Organizations: Groups that share a common purpose and contain a formal set of rules and authority structure.

Psychology: The study of human thought processes and behaviors.

Roles: A set of expectations about how to behave in a group.

Social norms: The rules that regulate our behavior in relationships.

Social psychology: The systematic study of people’s thoughts, feelings and behavior in social contexts.

Sociological imagination: The ability to see personal lives in the context of the larger society— its history, culture and social structure.

Symbolic interactionism: A perspective within sociological social psychology that emphasizes the study of how people negotiate the meaning of social life during their interactions with other people.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

8

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. c

3. d

4. a

5. d

6. c

 

 

Notes

9

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

10

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Two Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Distinguish the major principles of the symbolic interaction perspective.

2. Define what it means to “construct” the world around us.

3. Characterize the social structure and personality perspective.

4. Identify key elements of the group processes perspective.

5. Consider elements of group structure.

• Read pages 25-53 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

11

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter provides an extensive review of three major perspectives in sociological social psychology. Students will learn about the history, theoretical and empirical importance of the three perspectives. The chapter begins with an overview of the history and tenets of symbolic interactionism. This is followed by a review of the two major schools of symbolic interactionism.

 

 

Key Terms

12

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency:

Collective behavior:

Components principle:

Frame analysis:

Legitimacy:

Proximity principle:

Psychology principle:

Reference groups:

Social scripts:

Thomas theorem:

 

 

Summary

13

PSY 228 Social Psychology

There are three broad perspectives in sociological social psychology: symbolic interactionism, social structure and personality and group processes.

Symbolic interactionism is the study of how people negotiate meaning during their interactions with others. Within this approach, two schools of symbolic interactionism exists: the Chicago school and the Iowa and Indiana schools.

The social structure and personality perspective emphasizes how social structure affects individuals within a society. Structural forces include status, roles and social networks.

The group processes perspective focuses on interactions that occur within groups, characteristics of groups and relationships among groups. Processes studied by those in the group processes perspective include power, status, justice and legitimacy.

A group’s behavior is influenced by structural conditions including its size and its function. Group research may focus on structure or on other aspects of group processes, such as the relationship between groups and the behavior of larger groups of people called collective behavior.

 

 

Self Test

14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Which social theorists are most associated with the concept of the social construction of reality?

a. Marx and Engels b. Thomas and Thomas c. Berger and Luckmann d. Blumer and Mead

2. A local fraternity developed a special hand signal whenever they see each other on the university quad. In symbolic interactionist terms, this signal has become a ______________ for this group.

a. meaningful exchange b. important source of pride c. language d. symbol

3. Terence started to believe that a friend at work is really a spy from another company, leading him to avoid interactions with that person as much as possible. Ultimately, he treats all interactions with her as suspect, making him reluctant to share any work-related information with her. Which of the following best explains Terence’s behavior?

a. components principle of the social structure and personality perspective b. the Thomas theorem c. the peter principle d. the group processes concept of legitimacy

4. Who coined the expression “symbolic interaction”?

a. Emile Durkheim b. Herbert Blumer c. August Comte d. George Herbert Mead

5. Professor Swanson is studying the meaning of “goodness” using a survey of public attitudes toward the topic. Which school of symbolic interaction is she most likely using in her research?

a. the Chicago school b. the Indiana/Iowa school c. the Swanson school d. the sociological social psychology school

 

 

Self Test

15

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Socioeconomic status (social class), race or ethnicity, gender, age and sexuality all relate to which principle of the social structure and personality perspective?

a. components principle b. proximity principle c. psychology principle d. peter principle

 

 

Answer Keys

16

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency: The ability to act and think independent of the constraints imposed by social conditions.

Collective behavior: The action or behavior of people in groups or crowds.

Components principle: Within the social structure and personality perspective, the ability to identify the elements or components of society most likely to affect a given attitude or behavior.

Frame analysis: The process by which individuals transform the meaning of a situation using basic cognitive structures provided by society.

Legitimacy: The perception that a social arrangement or position is the way that things should be.

Proximity principle: Element of the social structure and personality perspective referring to how people are affected by social structure through their immediate social environments.

Psychology principle: Element of the social structure and personality perspective referring to how individuals internalize proximal experiences.

Reference groups: People we look to as a source of standards and identity.

Social scripts: The appropriate thoughts, feelings and behaviors that should be displayed in a particular social frame.

Thomas theorem: Theorem stating that when people define situations as real, the consequences of those situations become real.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

17

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. b

4. b

5. b

6. a

 

 

Notes

18

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

19

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Three Studying People

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Become acquainted with the vocabulary of social science research.

2. Differentiate qualitative sociology from quantitative sociology.

3. Determine major forms of qualitative and quantitative research.

4. Assess how social scientists begin to develop a research project.

• Read pages 54-82 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

20

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to provide an overview of the techniques sociological social psychologists use to study people, emphasizing theoretical differences on the appropriate means of obtaining social-psychological data.

 

 

Key Terms

21

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Categorical variables:

Ethnography:

Focus groups:

Indices:

Interval variables:

Ordinal variables:

Population:

Qualitative research methods:

Reliability:

Snowball sample:

Validity:

 

 

Summary

22

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Several concepts apply to almost any research project. Researchers regularly use terms such as theory, research questions or hypotheses and variables to describe ways of studying people.

Researchers employ qualitative and quantitative techniques to study human subjects. Qualitative research methods include field research and in-depth interviews. Quantitative methods include survey research and experiments.

The steps in developing most research projects include assessing the theory and literature of the research topic, developing research questions or specific hypotheses, choosing the appropriate research methods, conducting data analysis and reporting the results.

Although there is no rule about whether a particular theory should or should not use quantitative or qualitative methods to study people, symbolic interactionists have traditionally relied more on qualitative methods. Many researchers try to employ multiple methods of studying a particular phenomenon.

 

 

Self Test

23

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. How are social theories and hypotheses related to one another?

a. Theories include general statements about social relationships while hypotheses are more specific statements about how variables will relate to one another. b. Theories are an extension of hypotheses. c. Theories are used to develop hypotheses. d. both a and c

2. Samantha started a research project predicting that men would be more supportive of using military forces to go to war than women. In this case, attitudes toward going to war is what kind of variable?

a. index b. scale c. independent variable d. dependent variable

3. In preparing for a survey of country club members, Donella asked the manager of the club for a list of members. This list refers to a _______________.

a. random sample b. probability sample c. sample list d. sampling frame

4. Which of the following types of samples is considered most representative of any given population?

a. random sample b. convenience sample c. snowball sample d. both b and c

5. An instructor asks you to develop a study of the homeless that will provide a great deal of depth into what it is like to be homeless. Given this mandate, which of the following methods would most likely give the information you need for such a project?

a. ethnography b. focus group c. survey d. experiment

 

 

Self Test

24

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. A sample in which any available person is included in the study is known as a ____________ sample.

a. true b. convenience c. odd d. real time

 

 

Answer Keys

25

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Categorical variables: Measures for which the possible responses have no particular order.

Ethnography: A form of field research that includes a descriptive analysis of a group or organization.

Focus groups: Semistructured interviews with small groups of people.

Indices: A series of related questions designed to measure a concept such as mastery.

Interval variables: A type of variable in which the difference between any two adjacent values is the same.

Ordinal variables: Variables for which response categories are ordered but the distances between adjacent categories are not necessarily equal.

Population: The larger group of people about whom a researcher seeks to draw conclusions.

Qualitative research methods: In-depth, semi-structured modes of observation or interviewing of subjects.

Reliability: When a study yields the same results using the same techniques and data.

Snowball sample: Samples in which informants provide contact information about other people who share some of the characteristics necessary for a study.

Validity: How valid or accurate the findings of the study are.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

26

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. a

3. d

4. a

5. a

6. b

 

 

Notes

27

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 1 Examination Instructions

28

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit One Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

29

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Which early sociologists emphasized the role of society in the development of the self?

a. George Herbert Mead b. Karl Marx c. Georg Simmer d. Herbert Blumer

2. Which sociological social psychology perspective emphasizes the role of meaning and the social construction of meaning in the study of social psychology?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

3. Which sociological social psychology perspective is likely to emphasize the importance of roles and statuses in the study of social psychology?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

4. Which sociological social psychology perspective is likely to emphasize the importance of interactions within groups?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

5. The sociological imagination is associated with which social theorists?

a. Emile Durkheim b. Max Weber c. C. Wright Mills d. Auguste Comte

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

30

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. The expectation to look someone in the eye when talking with them refers to a _______________.

a. norm b. role c. value d. belief

7. Derek’s job as a supervisor refers to his relative _______________ in the company while the expectations for how to behave on the job refers to his ________________.

a. role; status b. job; role c. status; role d. status; job

8. Which institution regulates sexual relations and child-rearing in society?

a. economy and work b. politics c. family d. religion

9. Which institution refers to the rituals and beliefs regarding sacred things?

a. economy and work b. politics c. family d. religion

10. Franklin did not think much about how the economy or society affects his life until he lost his job. Franklin’s internal processesing of his job loss best represents which principle from the social structure and personality perspective?

a. components principle b. psychology principle c. propinquity principle d. proximity principle

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

31

PSY 228 Social Psychology

11. After Donna cheated on her most recent exam, she starts to feel a sense of guilt, making her reconsider whether she wants to do it again. Donna’s feelings of guilt can be considered a ______________, according to the social structure and personality perspective, leading her to rethink her future behaviors.

a. social more b. social norm c. social force d. social fear

12. Which of the following is considered a major dimension of group processes?

a. power b. justice c. legitimacy d. All of the above.

13. Janelle wants to study how and why some people are able to tell other people what to do while others can not. What aspect of group processes is she studying?

a. power b. status c. justice d. legitimacy

14. What social psychologist is most associated with the concepts of dyads and triads?

a. Emile Durkheim b. August Comte c. Herbert Blumer d. Georg Simmel

15. The difference between dyads and triads is important because:

a. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially increases the number of relationships available in an interaction. b. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially decreases the amount of intimacy possible in a group. c. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially decreases the number of relationships available in an interaction. d. both a and b

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

32

PSY 228 Social Psychology

16. A group of friends getting together for dinner represents a ______________ group while a group of people at your work represents a _____________ group.

a. reference; primary b. primary; reference c. primary; secondary d. secondary; reference

17. Bob goes to the beach on a hot summer day and is surprised when he observes a group of people dressed in formal wear sitting in beach chairs amongst sunbathers. Bob was surprised because the ______________ did not meet his expectations for that situation.

a. situation b. social scripts c. frame d. All of the above.

18. ____________ require the researcher to weigh individual items differently.

a. Indices b. Scales c. both a and b d. None of the above.

19. Which of the following methods is MOST likely to show causation?

a. ethnography b. focus group c. survey d. experiment

20. An instructor developed a study to determine ways of producing more participation in his classes. In one class she provided free donuts everyday of class while in another she gave them nothing. She had her assistant takes notes on the number of comments and questions students made in each class. Which of these classes represent the control group?

a. the class not given the donuts b. the class given the donuts c. other classes that are not part of the experiment d. both classes would be considered the control group

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

33

PSY 228 Social Psychology

21. ____________ developed the field of operant conditioning; much of his work relied on experiments using rats and pigeons.

a. Carl Jung b. B.F. Skinner c. Sigmund Freud d. Joseph Berger

22. At what step in the research process does the researcher employ the library and other resources and conduct a literature review?

a. step 1 b. step 2 c. step 3 d. step 4

23. At what step in the research process does the researcher actually go out and collect data?

a. step 1 b. step 2 c. step 3 d. step 4

24. Research conducted by interviews, participant observations and ethnographies is referred to as what kind of research?

a. quantitative b. qualitative c. breeching d. experimental

25. Social scientists must always be concerned with _______________ and _______________ to accurately capture the phenomena in question.

a. truth and reliability b. reliability and validity c. truth and validity d. probability and validity

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

34

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit One

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

1. Think about the concept of poverty. How would a macro-level sociologist study this concept differently than a micro-level sociologist?

2. Discuss how symbolic interactionists define the concept of society. What role do symbols and language play in the development of society?

3. Discuss the ways that group structures can impact interaction in groups. Specifically, examine how group size (i.e., dyads and triads) and types of groups (e.g., primary groups) impact interactions between people.

 

 

You Can Do It

35

PSY 228 Social Psychology

You have just completed Unit 1 of this course.

You are off to a great start!

Keep up the good work!

 

 

Objectives

36

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Four The Social Psychology of Stratification

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Interpret how people construct inequality in society.

2. Determine how structure is linked to interactions.

3. Evaluate how stratification develops in group interaction.

4. Judge how inequalities from society-at-large get reproduced in groups.

• Read pages 84-120 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

37

PSY 228 Social Psychology

One of the major ways that sociological social psychology is different from its counterpart in psychology is its greater emphasis on the role of stratification in social psychological processes. There are several ways in which stratification affects our lives and relationships. Symbolic interactionists sometimes address how we create and maintain definitions of different classes of people. Social structure and personality scholars emphasize how structural conditions, often related to work, education, or family settings affect people. Those in the group processes perspective examine how stratification systems from the larger society become reproduced in groups. We will use each of these perspectives to examine how stratification processes occur in our day-to-day lives.

 

 

Key Terms

38

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Borderwork:

Direct exchanges:

Doing difference:

Feedback loop:

Intersectionality:

Routinization:

Social capital:

Social exchange theory:

Social stratification:

Substantive complexity:

 

 

Summary

39

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Three ways that interactionist researchers focus on stratification processes include examining how social structure shapes who we interact with, accounting for inequalities in the content of interactions, acknowledging how people with certain status characteristics have more power in terms of role taking and examining people’s power to define situations and define themselves.

The Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment traces the relationships among individual’s class position, their abilities and their long-term occupational outcomes.

The effect of networking among individuals from different groups creates a variety of outcomes for those involved, depending on the status of the individuals in a group as well as the status of the group itself.

Values serve as a guide for making decisions about the future, ultimately affecting the types of jobs we attain and class position we have in life, producing a feedback loop between our personality and social positions.

Group processes contribute to our understanding of structural developments by studying the exchanges among individuals in groups. Exchange processes lend themselves to the development of status structures because people bring different types and quantities of resources into the process. People who contribute more to a group or have more resources generally achieve a higher status in groups.

 

 

Self Test

40

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Shirley Brice Heath’s research on the socialization of status and race among Whites and Blacks in the rural-Piedmont Carolinas is important because:

a. it shows how social class influences how we interact with other people. b. it shows how historical and social conditions can affect our day-to-day interactions. c. it shows that White people have an advantage over African-Americans in getting into good colleges. d. both a and b

2. Which perspective in sociological social psychology is more likely to examine the effects of stratification in day-to-day exchanges between people?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

3. Which of the following is the best example of “borderwork”?

a. a group of teenage boys smoking cigarettes in a high-school parking lot b. a group of girls at a slumber party c. a group of boys and girls playing “kiss and chase” d. a group of boys and girls being lectured to about poor behavior

4. Elijah Anderson’s study of inner city norms and values show that:

a. inner city residents tend to be submissive in the face of their poverty. b. inner city residents are taught to develop a toughness to deal with challenges of poverty and poor living conditions. c. most inner city residents accept most traditional norms from the larger culture. d. both b and c

5. An intersectional approach is essential to understanding the dynamics of stratification because it allows us to the look at the multitude of ways in which our statuses and positions affect our experience.

a. True b. False

 

 

Self Test

41

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. According to the Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment, how does our social background influence our occupational status in life?

a. It shows that our social background influences with whom we spend time. b. It shows that our social background influences our mental abilities. c. It shows that our social background affects our educational levels. d. All of the above.

 

 

Answer Keys

42

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Borderwork: The creation of social and physical boundaries between boys and girls.

Direct exchanges: Exchanges between two people.

Doing difference: Any way in which inequality in any form (race, class or gender) is perpetuated during our interactions as people are held accountable to the social categories in which they are a part.

Feedback loop: A process in which our class position influences the development of values that, in turn, influences the type of job we seek.

Intersectionality: The idea that race, gender and class statuses are not separate but interlocking systems of inequality.

Routinization: Part of Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment referring to the level of repetitiveness found on the job.

Social capital: Trust and support found in relationships with other people.

Social exchange theory: Theory based on the premise that individuals enter into relationships that provide some benefit to them and end or leave relationships that do not provide some sort of reward.

Social stratification: The ways in which individuals or groups are ranked in society.

Substantive complexity: Part of Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment referring to how complicated the actual work is on the job.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

43

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. a

3. c

4. d

5. a

6. d

 

 

Notes

44

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

45

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Five Self and Identity

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Identify the components of the self.

2. Determine interactionist theories of the self and identity.

3. Characterize three dimensions of the self-concept.

4. Analyze what we know from research on the self-concept.

5. Interpret how group processes affect identity.

• Read pages 121-149 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

46

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter reviews the different ways that sociologists study the meaning of the concepts of self and identity and the structural and group conditions that impact the self. It will address the components of the self; interactionist theories of the self and identity; three dimensions of self- concept; and how group processes affect identity.

 

 

Key Terms

47

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect-control theory:

Backstage:

Dramaturgical sociology:

Emotional arousal:

I:

Identity:

Mastery:

Mattering:

Me:

Personal characteristics:

Psychological centrality:

Self:

Self-enhancement:

Self-esteem:

Self-indication:

Verbal persuasion:

Vicarious experience:

 

 

Summary

48

PSY 228 Social Psychology

From a symbolic interactionist perspective, the self is a process in which we construct a sense of who we are. We use symbols and language to communicate with other people, but we also use language to think internally. The self includes a dialogue between the “I” and the “Me”.

Identity includes our social categories and personal characteristics. Identity theory examines how social conditions affect the salience of identities and thus our behavior. Affect-control theory incorporates emotions in identity processes.

The self-concept refers to all our thoughts and feelings about ourselves as an object, often studied in the form of identities, self-esteem, mattering and mastery. Class, race, and gender are important social statuses that influence our self-development over time. Social identity theory argues that people define and evaluate themselves in terms of the groups they belong to, including one’s race and gender.

 

 

Self Test

49

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. What part of the self-concept is mastery?

a. the self b. self-identities c. self-evaluations d. self indication

2. Debating what other people are thinking about you in a public setting is best represented by what term?

a. self-concept b.self-identities c. self-evaluations d. self indication

3. According to Mead, which aspect of our self is out in public, constantly processing new information related to the self?

a. the “I” b. the “Me” c. self-concept d. self indication

4. Which of the following is NOT an element of identity?

a. social categories b. role identities c. personal characteristics d. self attitudes

5. Being a Canadian applies to which aspect of identity?

a. social categories b. role identities c. personal characteristics d. self attitudes

 

 

Self Test

50

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Identity theory comes from which social-psychological perspective?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functional

 

 

Answer Keys

51

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect-control theory: The theory that incorporates elements of symbolic interactionism and identity theory to explain the role of emotion in identity processes.

Backstage: Part of dramaturgical sociology referring to the region where we relax our impression management efforts.

Dramaturgical sociology: The study of how we present ourselves, playing roles and managing impressions during interactions with other people.

Emotional arousal: Inferences about our abilities based on our emotional states that we use to build our sense of mastery.

I: The part of the self that is active, engaging in interactions with others.

Identity: Our internalized, stable sense of who we are.

Mastery: Our perceptions of our ability to control things important to us.

Mattering: Our sense that we are important to other people in the world.

Me: The part of the self that includes an organized set of attitudes toward the self.

Personal characteristics: Anything we use to describe our individual nature.

Psychological centrality: Our ability to shift aspects of the self to become more or less important to our overall self-concept.

Self: A process in which we construct a sense of who we are through interaction with others.

Self-enhancement: In social identity theory, the process through which we make comparisons that favor our own groups.

Self-esteem: The positive or negative evaluation of our self as an object.

Self-indication: The use of symbols and language to communicate internally.

Verbal persuasion: Information from others about our abilities used to derive mastery.

Vicarious experience: A way of building mastery by seeing other people perform tasks; it shows us that the task is accomplishable.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

52

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. a

4. d

5. a

6. a

 

 

Notes

53

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

54

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Six Socialization Over the Lifer Course

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Critique how society influences the social construction of the self.

2. Chart the stages involved in developing the self.

3. Name the four elements of life-course sociology.

4. Consider agents of socialization and how they affect our lives.

5. Assess how group processes researchers study socialization.

• Read pages 150-187 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

55

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to define socialization and the life course and the major theories and research associated with these ideas.

 

 

Key Terms

56

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency:

Birth cohort:

Contextual dissonance:

Gender socialization:

Idiocultures:

Life course:

Life events:

Linked lives:

Looking-glass self:

Pygmalion effect:

Socialization:

 

 

Summary

57

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociologists study socialization processes at every stage of development from childhood to late adulthood. The self develops through a symbolic process. An essential aspect of self-development is the ability to take the role of the other.

The sociology of childhood focuses on how children are active participants in creating culture. Life-course sociology is based on the notion that humans adapt to different situations based on their social and historical location, relative to different events and cultural “moments.” Four major themes in life-course sociology include historical context, timing, linked lives and agency.

Sociologists view agents of socialization as mediators of the larger society rather than direct causes of socialization. The family is considered the primary agent of socialization because children are raised from infancy with parents and often siblings. Schools and peers are two other important agents of socialization.

The group processes perspective often examines the role of socialization after it has occurred, reviewing, for instance, how expectations about gender or race affect group interactions.

 

 

Self Test

58

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Sammy is using dolls to represent people in a doll house. Based on Mead’s theory of child development, at what stage of development is she?

a. preparatory stage b. play stage c. game stage d. toy stage

2. A little boy playing in a baseball team is probably in which stage of development using Mead’s typology?

a. preparatory stage b. play stage c. game stage d. toy stage

3. Which social psychologist is associated with the looking-glass self?

a. George Herbert Mead b. Michel Foucault c. Georg Simmel d. Charles Horton Cooley

4. Studies have shown that factors such as parenting style, resources and status can dramatically affect the outcomes of children of divorced parents.

a. True b. False

5. Studies have found that father’s household labor participation has little effect on their son’s future household labor sharing.

a. True b. False

 

 

Self Test

59

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Several studies have shown that there is a correlation between watching violent television and aggressive behavior.

a. True b. False

 

 

Answer Keys

60

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency: An aspect of life-course sociology referring to our ability to improvise roles, make decisions and control our destiny.

Birth cohort: A group of people born around the same time period.

Contextual dissonance: A feeling that minority members of a group have because they are different from the majority members.

Gender socialization: Learning expectations about how to behave related to one’s gender.

Idiocultures: A system of knowledge, beliefs, behaviors and customs shared by an interacting group to which members refer and employ as a basis of further interaction.

Life course: The process of change from infancy to late adulthood resulting from personal and societal events and from transitions into and out of social roles.

Life events: Event that can cause significant changes in the course of our lives.

Linked lives: An aspect of life-course sociology referring to our relationships with other people.

Looking-glass self: How the self relies on imagined responses of others in its development.

Pygmalion effect: When children develop according to expectations of a group or society.

Socialization: The ways in which individuals attempt to align their own thoughts, feelings, and behavior to fit into a group or society.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

61

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. b

2. c

3. d

4. a

5. b

6. a

 

 

Notes

62

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 2 Examination Instructions

63

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Two Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

64

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. How does Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment link economic status, job characteristics and personality?

a. People with lower economic status tend to find work in jobs that have more supervision. b. People with lower economic status tend to find work in jobs that require less intellectual flexibility. c. People with less intellectual flexibility tend to seek jobs that are routinized. d. All of the above.

2. Bradley, a student at Big U, regularly seeks advice from his professor and mentor, Janet. According to exchange theory, what kind of exchange is most likely motivating Janet to stay in this relationship?

a. a direct exchange b. a reciprocal exchange c. a generalized exchange d. All of the above.

3. What was being exchanged among crew members and the captain in George Homan’s research about exchange processes on small warships?

a. support b. caring c. listening d. All of the above.

4. Who gets the most status in groups based on Bales’ research in social exchanges in small groups?

a. Those who are perceived as the best managers. b. Those who are perceived as being the smartest. c. Those who contribute the most to the group. d. Those who listen and care the most for the other members.

5. Which of the following best reflects a task group used to study status processes in groups?

a. A group of students at a class lecture. b. A group of people waiting in line to pay at a store. c. A group of citizens meeting to resolve a local problem. d. All of the above.

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

65

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Why are weak ties so important for finding work?

a. People with whom we have weak ties live and work in circles outside our own. b. People with whom we have weak ties tend to have better jobs. c. People with whom we have weak ties aren’t biased against us in the job market. d. People with whom we have weak ties provide training in getting better jobs.

7. According to status characteristics theory, gender, race and education levels are examples of _______________.

a. diffuse status characteristics b. specific status characteristics c. roles d. class positions

8. According to status characteristics theory, skill at playing basketball would be considered _______________.

a. diffuse status characteristics b. specific status characteristics c. roles d. class positions

9. People are ______________ aware of the status hierarchies that develop in task-oriented groups.

a. almost always b. usually not c. always d. None of the above.

10. Which theorist is most associated with impression management?

a. Auguste Comte b. Emile Durkheim c. Herbert Blumer d. Erving Goffman

11. According to dramaturgical sociology, what area of identity is associated with hanging out with friends while watching television?

a. front stage b. back stage c. performance stage d. informal groups

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

66

PSY 228 Social Psychology

12. A first date would most likely be associated with what area of identity?

a. front stage b. back stage c. performance stage d. informal groups

13. Spencer Cahill’s research on “bathroom behavior” clearly showed that _______________.

a. people act very differently in bathrooms than other areas of life b. serve as “self-service” repair shops c. people use bathrooms to “retire” from their front stage presentations d. All of the above.

14. Which of the following has the strongest impact on self-esteem?

a. social comparisons b. reflected appraisals c. psychological centrality d. self-perceptions

15. _____________ are observations of our behavior and its consequences.

a. Reflected appraisals b. Self-perceptions c. Social comparisons d. Psychological centrality

16. What is the best way to build a child’s sense of mastery or efficacy?

a. personal accomplishments b. vicarious experience c. verbal persuasion d. emotional arousal

17. Rosenberg’s early research on mattering found it positively related to _______________ and negatively related to ________________.

a. self-esteem; alcoholism b. depression; self-esteem c. self-esteem; depression d. mastery; depression

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

67

PSY 228 Social Psychology

18. Given research and theory in life-course sociology, which of the following groups are most likely to be negatively affected by Hurricane Katrina?

a. a poor White family who survived the storm together b. a poor African-American family who survived the storm together c. a middle-class White man who lost his income and had no access to family or friends during the event d. a middle-class African-American family who survived the storm together

19. Tony and Rose both received word that they were called up for active duty in the military out of the reserve component of the forces. Tony is several years older with a wife and child while Rose is just finishing college. Which dimension of life course sociology best explains why Tony is more likely to be affected by the mobilization than Rose?

a. historical context b. linked lives c. social timing d. agency

20. Which of the following is NOT considered a primary agent of socialization?

a. family b. peers c. schools d. government

21. Elder’s study of the Great Depression generally showed that ______________.

a. all children were negatively affected by growing up in the Great Depression b. only children growing up in poverty were affected by the Great Depression c. the Great Depression had the strongest impact on children’s lives by changing family roles d. both b and c

22. Kohn’s work on class socialization generally showed that middle-class families tend to stress ______________ while working-class families emphasize _______________ in raising their children.

a. autonomy; conformity b. conformity; freedom c. freedom; independence d. conformity; autonomy

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

68

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. Rosenthal and Jacobson’s study of classroom interaction is important because:

a. it showed that children are taught to be racist in the classroom. b. it showed that IQ scores could be manipulated based on a group prejudice. c. it showed that children’s IQ scores were not linked to race at all. d. it showed that racist beliefs and values exist in every classroom.

24. Which of the following groups are most prevalent in American schools based on Adler and Adler’s research on peer culture?

a. the popular click b. the wannabes c. middle friendship circles d. social isolates

25. Group processes researcher is important to the study of socialization in what way?

a. It shows the importance of peer-group interactions in socialization processes. b. It shows the importance of family interactions. c. It shows the importance of the media. d. It emphasizes the impact of socialization in group settings.

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

69

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Two

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. Describe the concept of “doing gender.” Apply this process to other statuses in society (e.g., race, ethnicity or sexuality).

2. Review the three ways that interactionists view the development and maintenance of stratification in society.

3. Discuss the similarities and differences between identity theory and social identity theory.

 

 

You Can Do It

70

PSY 228 Social Psychology

With Unit 2 complete, you are half way through the course.

Take a break and reward yourself

for a job well done!

 

 

Objectives

71

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Seven The Social Psychology of Deviance

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Analyze how we define what is normal and what is deviant.

2. Determine how the construction of deviant labels contribute to the development of deviant lifestyles.

3. Judge how structural conditions influence individuals’ decisions to commit deviant acts.

4. Consider how group relationships influence the development of deviance and perceptions of deviance.

• Read pages 190-220 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

72

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter examines major sociological concepts and theories associated with the concept of deviance.

Interactionists generally view deviance as a normal part of the symbolic interaction process. Structural and group-centered views of deviance tend to focus on the social conditions that increase the likelihood of breaking laws. These views come from the larger social science specialty of criminology. This chapter emphasizes the broader sense of deviance in everyday life, before reviewing traditional theories and research on criminal forms of deviance.

 

 

Key Terms

73

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Anomie:

Attachment:

Belief:

Covering:

Deviance:

Indexicality:

Labeling theory:

Mores:

Reflexivity:

Social control theory:

 

 

Summary

74

PSY 228 Social Psychology

From a social-psychological perspective, deviance is a necessary part of the symbolic interaction process of negotiating social reality. Interactionism assumes that individuals decide to maintain (or break) social norms and standards during every interaction. Deviance allows for change in relationships and society as a whole.

Ethnomethodological perspectives of deviance emphasize how individuals construct and defend their views of social reality—the “real” boundaries of social life. People who can provide better accounts can convince others of those accounts, thus controlling the meaning of good and bad— deviance and conformity—in society.

Labeling theory is a major interactionist perspective of deviance. It is based on the notion that deviance is a consequence of a social process in which a negative characteristic becomes an element of an individual’s identity.

Strain and social control theories apply macrosociological perspectives of deviant behavior, arguing that deviance results from a larger set of societal conditions. Societal norms create limitations to how we can achieve legitimate goals in life. They also give goals that are unattainable for some people.

Groups provide both the motives and the knowledge necessary to commit crime. Differential association theory states that deviance is learned through interaction with others. This theory may help explain how and why people rationalize deviant behavior, especially in white-collar crimes committed by middle- and upper-class people.

 

 

Self Test

75

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Some individuals choose a life of deviance because of the satisfaction they derive from the act and deviant lifestyle.

a. True b. False

2. Which of the following statements best describes interactionist perspective(s) on deviance?

a. Deviance is relative to a given group of people or society. b. Deviance is relatively consistent across groups and society. c. What it means to be deviant is constructed through a process of indexicality and reflexivity. d. both a and c

3. According to labeling theory, a primary act of deviance does not always lead to a secondary act of deviance.

a. true b. false

4. According to Edwin Lemert, how is society involved in the deviance process?

a. during primary deviance, when society makes deviance symbolic in nature b. during secondary deviance, when society labels a person as deviant c. during the process of hiring police personnel to put away criminals d. during the process of committing the deviant act and accepting the deviant label

5. Which of the following is true of William Chambliss’ research on the Saints and the Roughnecks?

a. The Saints committed significantly less crime than the Roughnecks but were more likely to get caught. b. The Saints committed significantly less crime than the Roughnecks but only the Roughnecks got caught. c. The Saints committed somewhat higher levels of deviance as the Roughnecks but the Roughnecks were more likely to be caught than the Saints. d. The Roughnecks committed less crime and were rarely caught.

 

 

Self Test

76

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. How did Howard Becker’s research contribute to the understanding of deviance?

a. It showed the important role of deviant subcultures in the maintenance of deviant identities. b. It reinforced the relationship between primary and secondary deviance. c. He showed that even drug experiences can be influenced by social conditions. d. All of the above.

 

 

Answer Keys

77

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Anomie: A sense of “normlessness” where there is little consensus about what is right and what is wrong.

Attachment: Component of social control theory referring to emotional bonds with other people in society.

Belief: Component of social control theory referring to people’s respect for law and order in society.

Covering: Keeping a known stigma from creating tensions in interaction by downplaying it.

Deviance: Any behavior that departs from accepted practices in a society or group.

Indexicality: The process by which individuals index thoughts, feelings and behaviors from their own perspective.

Labeling theory: Theory that argues deviance is a consequence of a social process in which a negative characteristic becomes an element of an individual’s identity.

Mores: Widely held values and beliefs in a society.

Reflexivity: The process by which individuals think about a behavior within its social context and give meaning to it.

Social control theory: Theory that deviance results when individuals’ bonds with conventional society are weakened in some way.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

78

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. a

2. d

3. a

4. b

5. c

6. d

 

 

Notes

79

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

80

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Eight Mental Health and Illness

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Determine what it means to be mentally healthy.

2. Interpret how the definition of mental illness is constructed.

3. List the structural conditions in society that contribute to distress.

4. Identify resources that can buffer stress.

5. Assess how mental health can influence our sense of identity and interactions with others.

• Read pages 221-246 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

81

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter examines mental health as an outcome of social life, influenced by social conditions and as a status characteristic that impacts our social interactions.

Once you read the sociological perspectives on mental health and illness, you may rethink what it means to have psychological problems.

 

 

Key Terms

82

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Ambient hazards:

Chronic strains:

Colonization:

Intransigence:

Malaise:

Moderators:

Negative life events:

Sociology of mental health:

Total institutions:

Withdrawal:

 

 

Summary

83

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The history of madness and civilization shows that the meaning and treatment of mental illness has changed dramatically over the centuries. In Europe, into the seventeenth century, mental illness was considered similar to other forms of deviance such as criminality.

Sociologists view many manifestations of mental illness to be the result of social conditions that tax individuals’ capacity to manage their lives. The stress process model helps us understand the relationship of negative life events and chronic strains to our mental health and well-being, focusing also on the resources we use to manage those stressors.

Social and economic characteristics are associated with different levels of distress, with social class status a critical factor in the stress process. Other important social characteristics that are implicated in the experience of stressors, the level of resources, and the expressions of distress include gender, age and race/ethnicity.

According to the group processes perspective, people set up different expectations for individuals’ performance depending on their status characteristics. Mental illness may be considered a diffuse status characteristic that influences members’ expectations of the mentally ill in a group setting, as well as the contributions made by those members.

Mental illness may be a form of stigma for individuals, an attribute that is deeply discrediting. Patients housed in mental institutions may try to cope in many different ways, including conversion, intransigence and forms of withdrawal and colonization.

 

 

Self Test

84

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Why was 1656 an important date in the history of mental illness according to Michel Foucault?

a. It is the year that psycho-tropic drugs started becoming widely available in Europe. b. It is the year that the “hospital general” opened, marking the beginning of the great confinement of mentally ill people. c. It is the first year in which psychoanalysis was used to treat mentally ill people. d. It was the first year that psychotropic drugs were introduced to the new world.

2. Which of the following forces are associated with putting aspects of social life, including mental illness, under the boundaries of medical professionals?

a. the power and authority of medical professionals b. activities of social movements and interest groups c. directed organization on professional activities d. All of the above are forces affecting medicalization.

3. Which social theorist argued that mental illness is a “myth?”

a. Peter Conrad b. Michel Foucault c. Thomas Szaz d. Herbert Blumer

4. Horwitz and Wakefield’s research focused on trends to increasingly diagnose individuals with clinical depression as the “loss of sadness” in society.

a. True b. False

5. What kind of stressors do college students typically report?

a. adjustment problems b. death of a loved one c. job loss d. fear of professors

 

 

Self Test

85

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Which of the following is NOT a measurement of someone’s depression levels?

a. I did not feel like eating. b. I felt depressed. c. I felt everything was an effort. d. All of the above are measures of depression.

 

 

Answer Keys

86

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Ambient hazards: Exposure to poor community conditions such as crime, poor living conditions and lack of services.

Chronic strains: Day-to-day role strains that may cause mental health problems over time by the accumulation of small amounts of stress.

Colonization: A way in which patients manage institutionalization by showing that their institution is a desirable place to live.

Intransigence: A way in which patients manage institutionalization by rebelling against the staff expectations.

Malaise: A psychological state of unhappiness associated with living conditions in rural or urban areas.

Moderators: Part of the stress process that includes the personal and social resources that affect the direction or strength of the relationship between a stressor and mental health.

Negative life events: Part of the stress process referring to any event deemed unwanted or stressful to an individual.

Sociology of mental health: The study of the social arrangements that affect mental illness and its consequences.

Total institutions: Places where individuals are isolated from the rest of society.

Withdrawal: A way of managing life in an institution involving the curtailing of interaction with others.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

87

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. b

2. d

3. c

4. a

5. a

6. d

 

 

Notes

88

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

89

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Nine Attitudes, Values, and Behaviors

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Identify the nature of an attitude.

2. Evaluate how researchers study attitudes and behaviors.

3. Describe how people construct attitudes.

4. Analyze how attitudes toward other people form in group contexts.

• Read pages 247-276 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

90

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to review the definition and measurement of attitudes and values and to examine research on how people use their time. Specific emphasis is given to prejudicial attitudes and behavior.

In this chapter, after discussing how attitudes are conceptualized, three areas of study within sociological social psychology will be emphasized. First, we will examine how attitudes are constructed from an interactionist perspective. Second, we will examine how attitudes vary by social location. Finally, we will apply the group processes perspective on attitudes, particularly related to attitudes toward other people in groups.

 

 

Key Terms

91

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Altruism:

Attitude:

In-groups:

Opinion:

Prejudice:

Prosocial behavior:

Social distance:

Status construction theory:

Time deepening:

Values and beliefs:

 

 

Summary

92

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Attitudes incorporate emotional, cognitive and behavioral dimensions—how we feel, think and act toward an object. Attitudes are measured in terms of their direction and strength, though people can also have nonattitudes toward objects. Time-use studies measure behaviors and can be characterized as either productive time, such as work and family care, or free time, including activities such as watching television or socializing.

The relationship between attitudes and behavior, on average, is typically small with an average correlation of 0.38. The weak relationship between attitudes and behavior—and of attitudes with other attitudes—may reflect poor measurement of attitudes or the complexities of attitudes themselves. Interactionist perspectives view attitudes like any other aspect of social life: they are constructed based on our interactions with other people. Our group memberships can have a large influence in our attitudes toward people in other groups based on the relative standing of those groups.

Some attitudes and opinions have been found to vary based on social statuses. Men and women regularly report different attitudes toward some social issues, as do African Americans and whites. Many attitudes toward major social issues have changed over the last half century, indicating that newer cohorts have different values than earlier generations.

Status construction theory posits that individuals develop status value through face-to-face interaction as well as from larger societal prejudices. Social identity theory emphasizes the role of in-groups and out-groups in our attitude development.

 

 

Self Test

93

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Your evaluation of a new political candidate may best be described as a(n) _____________ while your overall political ideology may better be described as a(n) _____________.

a. ideology; value b. value; attitude c. attitude; value d. both refer to attitudes

2. In a recent poll, Darnell told the interviewer that he does not care either way in the election. His response reflects what concept?

a. ideology b. values c. attitudes d. nonattitudes

3. Melissa had planned to play 18 holes of golf on the weekend but decided to cut it down to nine holes so that she could go to lunch with her boyfriend. What kind of behavior is she engaging in?

a. time deepening b. time management c. stress processing d. bureaucratic management

4. Americans have more productive time than free time.

a. true b. false

5. The relationship between our attitudes and behavior is typically ____________.

a. strong b. small c. 1 in average correlation d. 0 in average correlation

 

 

Self Test

94

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Research generally shows that American attitudes on most major social issues have been pretty stable over the last 30 years.

a. true b. false

 

 

Answer Keys

95

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Altruism: Refers to the motivation to help another person.

Attitude: A positive or negative evaluation of an object, a person, a group or an idea.

In-groups: Groups with whom we identify.

Opinion: The cognitive or “thinking” aspect of an attitude.

Prejudice: An attitude of dislike or active hostility toward a particular group in society.

Prosocial behavior: Includes any behavior that benefits another person.

Social distance: How close we feel to other people.

Status construction theory: Group processes theory that posits that individuals develop status value in face-to-face interactions with other people.

Time deepening: When people do more with the time that they have available to them.

Values and beliefs: Strongly held, relatively stable sets of attitudes.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

96

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. a

4. a

5. b

6. b

 

 

Notes

97

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 3 Examination Instructions

98

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Three Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

99

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Most college students represent which type of person in Merton’s typology of deviance?

a. conformists b. innovators c. ritualists d. retreatists

2. A homeless person who decides to live in the woods is probably best represented by which of the following people using Merton’s typology of deviance?

a. conformists b. innovators c. ritualists d. retreatists

3. Which of the following represent strain according to new interpretations of strain theory?

a. negative relationships with family and friends b. poverty c. unemployment d. All of the above.

4. Which theory of deviance tries to explain why individuals do not commit crime?

a. labeling theory b. strain theory c. social control theory d. theory of differential association

5. Sampson and Laub’s research on delinquent and non-delinquent youths in Boston found delinquency was greater when bonds with which social institutions were weakest?

a. family b. education c. work d. both a and c

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

100

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. In high school, Janet rarely got involved in smoking or drinking. In college, Janet found some friends who spent most of their off time consuming large amounts of alcohol and other drugs. Soon, she did the same and did not know anyone who did not spend their time that way. Which theory best explains Janet’s behavior given this limited amount of information?

a. labeling theory b. strain theory c. social control theory d. theory of differential association

7. Which of the following best exemplifies white collar crimes?

a. stealing a purse b. simple assault c. telling a lie to your friend d. embezzling from work

8. Murder would most likely be considered the breaking of a ________________ while picking your nose in public would be breaking a ________________.

a. more; folkway b. folkway; more c. norm; value d. both are mores

9. Scholars contend that ______________ and _______________ are two factors that affect the likelihood of committing a crime.

a. controls; formal sanctions b. certainty; severity c. certainty; informal sanctions d. severity; formal sanctions

10. Given the research on the epidemiology of mental health, which group is most likely to report problems with drinking? Depression?

a. married people; singles b. African-Americans; Latinos c. African-Americans; Whites d. men; women

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

101

PSY 228 Social Psychology

11. The stresses associated with living in urban areas come from _____________ while the stresses associated with rural areas tend to be a result of _____________.

a. lack of stimulation; ambient hazards b. ambient hazards; lack of stimulation c. urban malaise; rural malaise d. negative life events; chronic stresses

12. How do group processes scholars examine the concept of mental illness?

a. It is viewed as a status characteristic like race or gender. b. It is viewed as a normal part of group interactions. c. It is viewed as a major area of group research. d. It is viewed as a way for individuals in groups to negotiate identity.

13. Which of the following would be considered a total institution?

a. your college b. a police station c. a prison d. a family household

14. Which sociologist is most associated with the concept of stigma?

a. Erving Goffman b. Georg Simmel c. George Herbert Mead d. Herbert Blumer

15. Goffman’s research on total institutions showed that many patients in insane asylums generally ____________ their roles as patients.

a. resist b. accept c. use colonization to cope with d. None of the above.

16. Which of the following coping strategies emphasize patients’ attempts to rebel against asylum staff?

a. conversion b. intransigence c. withdrawal d. colonization

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

102

PSY 228 Social Psychology

17. The loss of a job is represented in which component of the stress process?

a. stressors b. outcomes c. mediators and moderators d. social and economic characteristics

18. LaPiere’s study of prejudice clearly showed that most people _____________.

a. have some prejudice b. act on their prejudices c. do not act on their prejudices d. both a and c

19. Overall, American political attitudes lean on being ______________.

a. very conservative b. moderately conservative c. moderately liberal d. very liberal

20. Which of the following groups could be identified as most liberal in the U.S.?

a. females living in the Midwest b. females living on the West Coast c. males living in the Midwest d. males living on the West Coast

21. Which of the following groups spend the most time on childcare? Which group has shown an increase in time spent with childcare?

a. women for both questions b. men for both questions c. men; women d. women; men

22. Which of the following social theorists is most associated with studying racial prejudice in the United States?

a. George Herbert Mead b. W.E.B. Du Bois c. Talcott Parsons d. William Thomas

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

103

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. Based on status construction theory, what would be the best way to get what you want out of a group and leave a positive impression?

a. Act like a very nice person. b. Act like a generous person. c. Act like a majority member of society. d. Act like a high-status person.

24. Willer’s research showing presidential approval ratings increasing after the 9/11 terrorist attacks in the U.S. clearly showed ____________.

a. in-group bias tendencies b. out-group bias tendencies c. prejudicial biases d. ideological alliances

25. The slow treatment of Hurricane Katrina victims was used as an example of ____________ in your text.

a. government inefficiency b. conscious racism c. unconscious racism d. None of the above.

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

104

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Three

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. How do symbolic interactionists examine the social construction of mental health? Specifically, review Foucault’s historical analysis of mental illness in western cultures and the medicalization of deviance.

2. Discuss how community conditions can impact individuals’ mental health. Be specific about the role of stressors and resources available under different community conditions (e.g., urban vs. rural; poor vs. middle class).

3. Review the different dimensions of attitudes. How does the complexity in attitudes help to explain the relatively weak relationship between a person’s attitudes and their behaviors?

 

 

You Can Do It

105

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 3 is done! You’re close to the finish line and we’re cheering you on to victory!

 

 

Objectives

106

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Ten The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Distinguish the components of emotions.

2. Determine how people learn emotions.

3. Consider how identity relates to emotions.

4. Evaluate how our statuses in society affect our uses of emotions.

5. Interpret the norms that govern the use of emotions in different social settings.

6. Predict how group settings affect emotions.

• Read pages 277-306 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

107

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter reviews the many dimensions of sentiment and emotions. It also examines the role of emotions in the development and maintenance of society, as well as the impact of society and culture on the development and expression of emotions.

This chapter will start by reviewing how sociologists study the upward movement of emotions in the creation of society and the social construction of emotions more generally. It will also review the structured nature of emotions and how society shapes the scope and expression of emotions.

 

 

Key Terms

108

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect:

Cybernetic approach:

Distributive justice:

Edgework:

Emotional cues:

Emotional intelligence:

Emotional scripts:

Emotions:

Interaction ritual:

Mood:

Potency:

Procedure justice:

Sentiment:

Transient sentiments:

 

 

Summary

109

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociological perspectives on emotion emphasize the cybernetic approach to the study of emotions: emotions radiate upward from individual-level interactions to maintain social structures as well as downward when social structure helps to shape our emotions.

Symbolic interactionists believe we learn emotions like we learn about other aspects of social life: through interaction with other people. The sociocentric model of emotional socialization argues that the primary means of learning about emotions comes from social instruction, whereas affect control theory argues that people use emotions as signals as to how well they are performing their role in a given situation.

People use emotional scripts and cues to help use and manage emotions in day-to-day life. The theory of interaction ritual chains emphasizes the role of emotions in maintaining macrosociological social institutions.

The power-status approach to emotions says that emotions result from real, anticipated, imagined or recollected outcomes of social interactions. The gain or loss of power and status are primary ways in which our position affects our emotional life.

The norms that govern our emotional lives are called feeling rules. We may receive “rule reminders” from friends and family when we do not “feel” appropriately. Emotion work refers to the generation of prescribed emotion to meet the demands of a job. The commodification of emotions is associated with the concept of “McDonaldization.”

The socioemotional economy is a system for regulating emotional resources among people that links individuals into larger networks of people. Sympathy is an important example of this economy. Emotion culture refers to a society’s expectation about how to experience different emotions. According to the group processes perspective, there are at least two ways in which exchange processes may affect your emotions: the concern over getting what is fair out of the group and the way in which distributions are made in a group. Emotions can also affect status relationships in group exchanges such that higher-status people are freer to express certain emotions than lower status people.

 

 

Self Test

110

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Based on Thoit’s treatment of emotions, which of the following is NOT a dimension of emotion?

a. situational cues b. physiological changes c. an arousal d. an emotion label

2. The moment that society gives meaning to an emotion it becomes a _____________.

a. sentiment b. feeling c. mood d. affect

3. Clem has been feeling sad all day long. What term best describes his emotional state?

a. sentiment b. feeling c. mood d. affect

4. Which of the following would be considered a primary emotion?

a. anger b. fear c. depression d. All of the above are primary emotions.

5. Non-verbal behaviors play a lesser role than verbal communication does.

a. True b. False

6. The meanings of emotions are stable over a life course.

a. True b. False

 

 

Self Test

111

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Answer Keys

112

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect: An evaluative component of an emotion.

Cybernetic approach: The study of emotion that assumes that social conditions shape our emotions; and in turn, our emotions act to maintain social structures.

Distributive justice: In exchange theory, it is the belief about the fairness of what people get.

Edgework: Thrill-seeking behaviors designed to produce intense emotions.

Emotional cues: Information about when and what emotions are appropriate in a given social setting.

Emotional intelligence: Our ability to control and employ emotions in our social environments.

Emotional scripts: Expectations about when and how to act excited, angry, sad and so on.

Emotions: Feelings that incorporate situational cures, physiological changes, expressive gestures and an emotion label.

Interaction ritual: The exchange of symbols and emotion between individuals essential to maintaining society.

Mood: A diffuse emotional state that lasts a relatively long period of time.

Potency: Element of affect control theory referring to how a person’s sentiment toward an object is powerful or powerless.

Procedure justice: In exchange theory, it is the beliefs about the fairness of the methods used to make distributions.

Sentiment: A feeling that has been given meaning by society.

Transient sentiments: Sentiments unique to specific interactions.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

113

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. a

3. c

4. d

5. b

6. b

 

 

Notes

114

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

115

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Eleven Collective Behavior

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Analyze how crowds contribute to the development of mass hysteria.

2. Identify theories that explain individuals’ behavior in large groups.

3. Decide whether structural conditions affect crowd behaviors.

4. Chart the phases of collective behavior found in large social movements.

5. Evaluate how group and individual motivations interact in social movements.

• Read pages 307-336 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

116

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to review theories of collective behavior and the current research on behaviors that occur during collective events.

This chapter will review theories and research related to the concepts of collective behavior, collective action and social movements.

 

 

Key Terms

117

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Acting crowds:

Collective identity:

Craze:

Expressive crowd:

Hostile outbursts:

Mass:

Milling:

Routine dispersal:

Social dilemma:

Structural strain:

 

 

Summary

118

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Traditional theories of collective behavior, collective action and social movements emphasize the ways in which crowds transform the individuals acting in them, turning them into irrational beings. Rational choice perspectives on collective action emphasize the idea that people in groups are purposive in their decisions and actions in everyday life, including group events.

Research on protests in the United States over the last decades has shown that most protests and marches are small in nature. Very few marches go over 100,000 participants and very few involve civil disobedience. However, only the largest protests receive much media attention.

Sociological social psychologists also study how we develop collective memories, examining the conditions that produce spontaneous thoughts or feelings at the same time; how conditions coalesce to bring us to believe something is true; what an event means to a people; and, finally, how we categorize those memories with other historical events.

Research evidence in the group processes tradition indicates that people will be likely to form coalitions when they are faced with large power disparities. The free-rider problem and social dilemmas are typical problems found in behavior within and between groups.

 

 

Self Test

119

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. The March for Life protest against abortion is probably best described as a ______________.

a. social action b. collective action c. social movement d. collective movement

2. Gustave LeBon’s book, The Crowd, is based on observations of which of the following events?

a. the Russian Revolution b. The French Revolution c. WWII d. the Chinese Revolution

3. Which theorist is most associated with mass hysteria theory?

a. Carl Couch b. Herbert Blumer c. Neil Smelser d. Gustave LeBon

4. According to Blumer’s theory of circular reaction, when do individuals in crowds start to lose control and act without much rationality?

a. during the milling phase when individuals are encouraged to act out against authorities b. during the interpretation phase when individuals are encouraged to act out against authorities c. during the interpretation phase when individuals lose their ability to communicate about appropriate behavior d. during the milling phase when individuals lose their ability to communicate about appropriate behavior

5. Research on crowd and protest behaviors has generally supported LeBon and other scholars from the mass hysteria tradition.

a. true b. false

 

 

Self Test

120

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Guilford went to a protest against the school’s smoking policy because he truly believed that it was wrong and should be changed. He had been a leader in the anti-smoking group for a number of years prior to the march. According to Turner and Killian, which kind of participant is he?

a. ego-involved participant b. concerned participant c. insecure participant d. curiosity seeker

 

 

Answer Keys

121

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Acting crowds: Groups of people with a focus,or goal who act with unity to achieve the goal.

Collective identity: An individual’s sense of connection with a larger community or group.

Craze: When large numbers of people become obsessed with something like the purchase of a product or an activity.

Expressive crowd: Crowd that lacks a goal and is primarily a setting for emotional release, which often occurs through rhythmical actions such as applause, dancing or singing.

Hostile outbursts: Any type of mass violence or killings.

Mass: Anonymous individuals from many social strata that are loosely organized.

Milling: Part of the circular reaction process in which individuals at an event anxiously move about in a seemingly aimless and random fashion.

Routine dispersal: A dispersal in which participants leave a gathering in a rational, orderly fashion.

Social dilemma: A situation whereby if every person acts in his or her own best interests, the results will be bad for the group.

Structural strain: Element of value-added theory stating there must be some level of conflict over some issue or problem to initiate collective action.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

122

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. b

3. d

4. c

5. b

6. a

 

 

Notes

123

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 4 Examination Instructions

124

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Four Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

125

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Which of the following jobs is most likely to have an extensive set of feeling rules?

a. a stay-at-home mother b. a cashier at McDonalds c. a plumber d. a farmer

2. Zurcher’s concept of emotional scripts most closely resembles what other concept reviewed in this chapter?

a. emotion rules b. emotional energy c. feeling rules d. sentiment

3. Milan was a little perturbed when his boss refused to accept some flowers he had brought as a sign of his sadness over the loss of her sister. Which sympathy rule did his boss break?

a. Do not make false claims of sympathy. b. Do not claim too much sympathy. c. Claim some sympathy. d. Reciprocate to other for their gift of sympathy.

4. Based on Lofland’s analysis of the role of culture in the expression of grief in society, which of the following places would have the hardest time coping with the loss of a child?

a. modern day Asia b. modern day Europe c. modern day Ethiopia d. modern day America

5. Swidler’s research on love in American culture revealed what?

a. Americans find it hard to fall in love. b. Americans initiate relationships based on a mythical view of emotional bonding between lovers. c. Americans use a more realistic view of love to sustain relationships on a day-to-day basis. d. both b and c

 

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

126

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. According to exchange theory and research, which of the following situations is most likely to produce a positive emotion?

a. an exchange in which people get the amount equal to their position in the group b. an exchange in which you get as much as you gave c. an exchange in which you get less than you gave d. All of these exchanges will produce a positive emotion.

7. According to the exchange theory, what sentiment is EXPECTED when you get more out of an exchange than you give?

a. sadness b. guilt c. happiness d. joy

8. According to research and theory of group processes, how does power in relationships affect our emotions?

a. Relationships characterized as having equal power engender positive emotion. b. Power makes us feel guilty in social exchanges. c. Relationships characterized as having unequal power engender positive emotion. d. Power gives us a positive feeling only when we deserve it during social exchanges.

9. Secondary emotions are ________________.

a. learned through socialization b. similar to sentiments c. social emotions d. All the above.

10. Your feeling that a district attorney has a lot of power refer to which dimension of affect control theory?

a. evaluation b. potency c. activity d. strength

11. What emotion did wheelchair users employ when managing interactions with “stand-up” people in Cahill and Eggleston’s study of people with a handicap?

a. fear b. humor c. love d. anger

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

127

PSY 228 Social Psychology

12. Your friend, Chloe, goes through a bad break-up and her cat runs away all in the same week. When you and Chloe are out to dinner one night you run into Sarah, a good friend of yours from school. Chloe expresses the tragedies that have befallen her the past week to Sarah who proceeds to listen and then changes the conversation. Once back to your dinner, Chloe expresses her dismay and hurt that Sarah did not seem concerned about her break-up or loss of her cat. Sarah is upset because her ______________ were not met.

a. social scripts b. emotional scripts c. sentiments d. emotions

13. According to Randall Collins’ theory of interaction ritual chains, what role does emotion play in the maintenance of society?

a. Emotional energies provide the reason for maintaining interactions in society. b. Emotional scripts provide information about how to behave in society. c. Emotions give us cues as to whether we are performing our roles in society adequately. d. Emotions exist within a series of “feeling rules” about how to behave in society.

14. Which of the following jobs does NOT demand high levels of emotion work.

a. waitress b. teacher c. customer service agent d. None of the above.

15. Steve turned to the people around him for help in deciding how to act at a local protest. According to perception control theory, what form of perception control is he using?

a. independent instruction b. interdependent instruction c. organizational instruction d. interactional instruction

16. What is the best predictor of an individual participating in a march or a riot?

a. her structural position b. her concern over a social condition in society c. her being asked to go to the event d. her access to resources

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

128

PSY 228 Social Psychology

17. The vast majority of protests and other collective events have which kind of dispersal?

a. routine dispersal b. emergency dispersal c. coerced dispersal d. active dispersal

18. Which of the following are typical behaviors at a large protest march?

a. People break off into a series of smaller groups. b. People form lines to access various facilities. c. People develop arcs and circles around speakers. d. All of the above are typical behaviors.

19. ____________ is thrill-seeking behaviors designed to produce intense emotions.

a. Potency b. Edgework c. Cyberneticism d. None of the above.

20. Enduring emotional meanings in a given society is known as _____________.

a. fundamental sentiments b. transient sentiments c. emotional cues d. emotion work

21. The debate as to whether or not you should stop and look at an accident while driving by, possibly slowing down the traffic behind you, is an example of a ______________.

a. social dilemma b. free rider problem c. group conformity d. mass hysteria

22. Public radio—radio stations that rely, in part, on listener support to stay in business—run the risk of what problem?

a. a social dilemma b. the free rider problem c. group conformity d. mass hysteria

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

129

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. The use of _______________ is important to the forming of collective memories.

a. storytelling b. collective behavior c. collective emotion d. framing

24. According to emergent norm theory, the _______________ is the type of person who participates in the group out of curiosity.

a. ego-involved participant b. curiosity seeker c. concerned participant d. insecure participant

25. Phase of collective behavior referring to the factors that bring people together into the same place at the same time.

a. gathering phase b. homogeneity of mood c. assembling phase d. interpretive phase

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

130

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Four

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. Review the theory of interaction ritual chains. How do our emotions contribute to the maintenance of society according to this theory?

2. Review the role of emotions in exchange processes. What conditions are most likely to produce positive emotions? Negative emotions? What role does power and status play in the development of emotions in exchange relationships?

3. Apply group processes theory and research related to coalitions to explain the development of social movements more broadly. First, define the concept of coalition. Second, describe how coalitions work and the conditions that make them successful. Third, apply this information to explain how and why people initiate social movements in society.

 

 

You Can Do It

131

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Congratulations! You have completed Unit 4.

Now let’s sharpen our pencils for the Final Exam.

We are confident you will do well.

 

 

Final Examination Instructions

132

PSY 228 Social Psychology

About the Final Examination

After you have successfully completed all of the unit examinations and writing assignments, it will be time for you to take the final examination.

The final examination will be provided by student services only after you have completed all four unit examinations and submitted all four writing assignments.

Scheduling a Final Examination

Final examination requests can be submitted via U.S. mail, online through the Coast Connection student portal, or by calling the Testing Department at (714) 547-9625.

A final exam scheduling form is located on the last page of this study guide. Please fill out ALL required fields and mail it to the university.

If you would like to request a final exam online, log into the Coast Connection student portal and click on My Academic Plan. Select the course you are working on and submit the Final Exam Request form located at the bottom of the page. ALL INFORMATION MUST BE FILLED IN.

Final exams will only be sent if you have completed all four unit examinations and submitted all four writing assignments.

Submitting Your Final Examination

Final Examinations can be submitted by mail, fax or online through the Coast Connection student portal.

After you have completed your exam, you or your proctor can fax it to the Grading Department at (714) 547-1451 or mail it to the university. When faxing exams, please do not resize your fax.

For online submissions, once you have logged into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the final examination. You must input the unique password that was sent to your proctor in order to unlock your final examination questions. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

 

 

Final Exam Scheduling Form

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The university requires all final examinations to be completed under the supervision of a proctor. Please provide information on your designated proctor. ALL information must be filled in; otherwise, your request will not be processed.

Date _____________________________ Student I.D. ______________________________________________

Student Name ________________________________________________________________________________

Address ______________________________________________________________________________________

City __________________________________________________ State _________________________________

Zip Code ________________ Country ____________________________________________________________

E-Mail Address _______________________________________________________________________________

Daytime Telephone _____________________________ Evening Telephone _____________________________

Course Information:

Course Number ___________ Course Title _______________________________________________________

Please send the Final Examination to:

Proctor’s Name _______________________________________________________________________________

Proctor’s Relationship to Student ________________________________________________________________

Street Address _______________________________________________________________________

City ______________________________ State _________________ Zip Code __________________________

Country __________________________________ Email Address ___________________________

Daytime Telephone _________________________ Evening Telephone _________________________________

Student’s Signature ________________________________________________________________________

133

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect:

Cybernetic approach:

Distributive justice:

Edgework:

Emotional cues:

Emotional intelligence:

Emotional scripts:

Emotions:

Interaction ritual:

Mood:

Potency:

Procedure justice:

Sentiment:

Transient sentiments:

Summary

109

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociological perspectives on emotion emphasize the cybernetic approach to the study of emotions: emotions radiate upward from individual-level interactions to maintain social structures as well as downward when social structure helps to shape our emotions.

Symbolic interactionists believe we learn emotions like we learn about other aspects of social life: through interaction with other people. The sociocentric model of emotional socialization argues that the primary means of learning about emotions comes from social instruction, whereas affect control theory argues that people use emotions as signals as to how well they are performing their role in a given situation.

People use emotional scripts and cues to help use and manage emotions in day-to-day life. The theory of interaction ritual chains emphasizes the role of emotions in maintaining macrosociological social institutions.

The power-status approach to emotions says that emotions result from real, anticipated, imagined or recollected outcomes of social interactions. The gain or loss of power and status are primary ways in which our position affects our emotional life.

The norms that govern our emotional lives are called feeling rules. We may receive “rule reminders” from friends and family when we do not “feel” appropriately. Emotion work refers to the generation of prescribed emotion to meet the demands of a job. The commodification of emotions is associated with the concept of “McDonaldization.”

The socioemotional economy is a system for regulating emotional resources among people that links individuals into larger networks of people. Sympathy is an important example of this economy. Emotion culture refers to a society’s expectation about how to experience different emotions. According to the group processes perspective, there are at least two ways in which exchange processes may affect your emotions: the concern over getting what is fair out of the group and the way in which distributions are made in a group. Emotions can also affect status relationships in group exchanges such that higher-status people are freer to express certain emotions than lower status people.

Self Test

110

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Based on Thoit’s treatment of emotions, which of the following is NOT a dimension of emotion?

a. situational cues b. physiological changes c. an arousal d. an emotion label

2. The moment that society gives meaning to an emotion it becomes a _____________.

a. sentiment b. feeling c. mood d. affect

3. Clem has been feeling sad all day long. What term best describes his emotional state?

a. sentiment b. feeling c. mood d. affect

4. Which of the following would be considered a primary emotion?

a. anger b. fear c. depression d. All of the above are primary emotions.

5. Non-verbal behaviors play a lesser role than verbal communication does.

a. True b. False

6. The meanings of emotions are stable over a life course.

a. True b. False

Self Test

111

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Answer Keys

112

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect: An evaluative component of an emotion.

Cybernetic approach: The study of emotion that assumes that social conditions shape our emotions; and in turn, our emotions act to maintain social structures.

Distributive justice: In exchange theory, it is the belief about the fairness of what people get.

Edgework: Thrill-seeking behaviors designed to produce intense emotions.

Emotional cues: Information about when and what emotions are appropriate in a given social setting.

Emotional intelligence: Our ability to control and employ emotions in our social environments.

Emotional scripts: Expectations about when and how to act excited, angry, sad and so on.

Emotions: Feelings that incorporate situational cures, physiological changes, expressive gestures and an emotion label.

Interaction ritual: The exchange of symbols and emotion between individuals essential to maintaining society.

Mood: A diffuse emotional state that lasts a relatively long period of time.

Potency: Element of affect control theory referring to how a person’s sentiment toward an object is powerful or powerless.

Procedure justice: In exchange theory, it is the beliefs about the fairness of the methods used to make distributions.

Sentiment: A feeling that has been given meaning by society.

Transient sentiments: Sentiments unique to specific interactions.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

113

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. a

3. c

4. d

5. b

6. b

Notes

114

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Objectives

115

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Eleven Collective Behavior

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Analyze how crowds contribute to the development of mass hysteria.

2. Identify theories that explain individuals’ behavior in large groups.

3. Decide whether structural conditions affect crowd behaviors.

4. Chart the phases of collective behavior found in large social movements.

5. Evaluate how group and individual motivations interact in social movements.

• Read pages 307-336 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

Overview

116

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to review theories of collective behavior and the current research on behaviors that occur during collective events.

This chapter will review theories and research related to the concepts of collective behavior, collective action and social movements.

Key Terms

117

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Acting crowds:

Collective identity:

Craze:

Expressive crowd:

Hostile outbursts:

Mass:

Milling:

Routine dispersal:

Social dilemma:

Structural strain:

Summary

118

925 North Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, CA 92701

 

www.calcoast.edu Phone: 714-547-9625 Fax: 714-547-5777

12/14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

 

Tracking Your Academic Activities Verifying an accurate course completion time is essential for accreditation. To meet both accreditation requirements and award academic credit, educational institutions must document the total number of hours students spend completing designated academic activities related to their coursework.

The total hours are then translated into academic credit based on a prescribed method of measuring educational attainment known as the Carnegie Unit. 90 hours of student preparation time and 45 hours of student engagement time are required for a 3 credit hour course.

Using the attached form as an example, keep track of the time you spend on each lesson, pre-test, self-test, unit test, writing assignment, reading assignment, outside reading, final examination, etc. You will not be required to turn in the worksheet; however, at the end of the course you will receive a Student Course Survey and the final question will ask how long it took you to complete the course. Your assistance in completing this requirement and providing the university with this valuable data is greatly appreciated.

As you fill out the worksheet, please keep in mind that your Academic Engagement Activities should total approximately 45 hours. Some examples of this type of activity may include:

Lesson Review Exercises

Key Term Reviews

Analysis

Study Guide Review

Writing Assignments

Review Grading Rubric

Unit Examinations

Proctored Final Examination

Course Academic Online Discussions

Student/Instructor Interaction

Documents/Student Resources

As you fill out the Academic Preparation Activities, please keep in mind that these should total approximately 90 hours. Some samples of this type of activity may include:

Pre-Test

Reading Assignments

Key Term Reviews

Studying for Examinations

Writing Assignments

Review Grading Rubric

Study Lesson Review Exercises

Internet/Web Research

Reading Websites

Suggested Outside Reading

 

 

 

Sample Worksheet for Tracking Your Academic Activities

Upon completion of this course, you will be asked to complete a survey. The last question on the survey will ask you the number of hours it took to complete the course. The total hours are then translated into academic credit based on a prescribed method of measuring educational attainment known as the Carnegie Unit. 90 hours of student preparation time and 45 hours of student engagement time (135 hours) are required for a 3 credit hour course.

This worksheet was developed as a tool to help track your time. You are not required to turn it in.

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete

length of time to

complete Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Totals

Academic Engagement Activities Lesson Review Exercises Key Term Review Exercises Study Guide Review Documents/Student Resources Writing Assignments Review Grading Rubric Unit Examinations Proctored Final Examination Case Studies/Critical Analysis Course Academic Online Discussions Student/Instructor Interactions

Total Academic Engagement required for a 3 unit course = 45 hours

Academic Preparation Activities Pre-Test Reading Assignments Analyze Case Studies/Critical Analysis Key Term Review Exercises Study for Examinations Suggested Outside Readings Web Research Writing Assignments Review Grading Rubric Reading Websites Study Lesson Review Exercises

Total Academic Preparation required for a 3 unit course = 90 hours

Grand total of hours of various learning activities in completing this course

 

 

 

Pre-test Instructions

Thank you for taking the time to complete the required pre-test. The purpose of the pre-test is to measure your knowledge of the subject matter at the beginning of each course.

Please be assured, your score on the pre-test will not be part of your course grade. We do not want you to try to study for it or be worried about doing well on the pre-test. It is simply a measure of your “starting place,” that will be used for improving course content and to meet accreditation requirements.

If you receive your course materials online: • Please log-in to your Coast Connection student portal to complete your pre-test.

If you receive your course materials by mail: • You will receive your answer sheets for the pre-test by mail. • Once you have completed your pre-test, please mail or fax your answer sheet to the University at:

California Coast University 925 N. Spurgeon Street Santa Ana, CA 92701 Fax: 714-547-1451

If you have any questions, please feel free to contact the Student Services Department. Thank you for your cooperation.

 

 

 

Pre-test

ix

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

Which early sociologist emphasized the role of society in the development of the self? 1.

George Herbert Meada. Karl Marxb. Georg Simmerc. Herbert Blumer d.

____________ is the study of the effects of society on social-psychological processes, also 2. known as sociological social psychology.

sociologya. microsociologyb. macrosociologyc. psychology d.

Which of the following is considered a major dimension of group processes? 3.

legitimacya. justiceb. powerc. All of the above. d.

Perspective within symbolic interactionism that focuses on the quantitative study of social 4. interaction processes because of the stable nature of social life.

Chicago Schoola. Indiana Schoolb. Iowa Schoolc. both b and c d.

The research technique called “autoethnograpy” is associated with which social psychological 5. perspective?

symbolic interactiona. social structure and personalityb. group processesc. structural functionalism d.

Participants of an experiment that are not exposed to the independent variable. 6.

control groupa. convenience sampleb. focus groupc. experimental groupd.

 

 

Pre-test

x

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment is based on a study that began in ____________ 7. that was primarily led by ____________.

1957; Sewella. 1962; Nielsonb. 1965; Granovetterc. 1973; Kohn d.

According to research by Lucas and others, how can individuals with lower cultural status best 8. gain status in groups?

Give that person legitimate authority to lead the group.a. The person should focus on the success of the group, rather then her own interests.b. The person should provide a “kick back” to others in a group to get their leadership c. position. both a and b d.

Research in the 1960s showed a considerable overlap in ___________ and ___________ 9. occupations.

fathers’; sons’a. fathers’; daughters’b. mothers’; daughters’c. mothers’; sons’ d.

How did Joanne Nagel explain the increase in the number of people identifying themselves as 10. “American Indian” when the birth rates stayed the same?

Legal changes made scholarships more available to American Indians.a. The development of the “Red Power” movement shifted negative stereotypes of Indians.b. Urbanization made it easier for people to find and interact with other people that had c. some American-Indian heritage. All of the above. d.

The use of narratives and personal-stories is important to the process of _____________. 11.

symbolic interaction processa. identity control theoryb. mpression managementc. All of the above. d.

 

 

Pre-test

xi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Socialization is a process that _____________. 12.

begins at around two years of agea. lasts until the young twentiesb. begins at birth and continues through the life cyclec. both a and b d.

Sampson and Laub’s research on the impact of World War II (WWII) on men’s lives generally 13. showed that _____________.

WWII served as a turning point for all American soldiersa. IQ was the biggest factor in finding work after the warb. WWII only had an impact on soldiers if they served overseasc. most of the positive effects of war on the lives of soldiers came through their experience d. overseas, in-service training and access to programs like the GI Bill

Ausdale and Feagin’s research on children learning racism is important because 14. _______________.

it shows how children use race as a way to differentiate between peersa. it shows that children apply adult biases and racism in their day-to-day interactionsb. it shows that children use their own race as a way to gain acceptance by teachersc. both a and b d.

Most college students represent which type of person in Merton’s typology of deviance? 15.

conformistsa. innovatorsb. ritualistsc. retreatists d.

Component of social control theory referring to emotional bonds with other people in society. 16.

commitmenta. attachmentb. involvementc. None of the above. d.

 

 

Pre-test

xii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Manuel’s job loss really did not bother him because he did not like his boss. However, he 17. really started getting anxious when he stopped getting his paycheck. In this example, the effect of job loss on anxiety is ______________ by loss of income.

distresseda. moderatedb. mediatedc. constrained d.

Exposure to poor community conditions such as crime, poor living conditions and lack of 18. services.

malaisea. intransigenceb. ambient hazardsc. chronic strain d.

Nathan started attending KKK meetings when he saw some of his African-American neighbors 19. getting better jobs than him. Which of the following theories best explains Nathan’s negative attitude toward African Americans?

social distance theorya. symbolic interactionb. Blumer’s theory of group positionc. status construction theory d.

Theory that prejudicial attitudes reflect a group’s position in society. 20.

status construction theorya. theory of group positionb. modified labeling theoryc. colonization theory d.

A positive or negative evaluation of an object, a person or group or an idea. 21.

attitudea. prejudiceb. opinionc. belief d.

 

 

Pre-test

xiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Following Smelser’s value-added theory, why wouldn’t we expect a poor, third-world nation, 22. based on a barter economy, to develop mass hysteria over stock market problems like the U.S. did in the 1920s?

lack of structural conducivenessa. lack of structural strainb. lack of generalized beliefc. action of social control d.

Expectations about when and how to act excited or angry or any other emotion. 23.

emotional cuesa. emotional scriptsb. emotional energiesc. situational cues d.

When large numbers of people become obsessed with something like the purchase of a 24. product or an activity.

maniaa. crazeb. hysteriac. panic d.

A key ingredient of contagious mental unity, referring to situations in which people lose their 25. inhibitions to act and the tempo of their behavior increases.

intensity of behaviora. panicb. irrational behaviorc. hostile outburstsd.

 

 

 

925 North Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, CA 92701

Text:

Author(s):

Publisher:

S tu

d y G

u id

e

www.calcoast.edu

Phone: 714-547-9625 Fax: 714-547-5777

Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives

Second Edition, 2011

ISBN-13: 9780205661060

David E. Rohall, Melissa A. Milkie and Jeffrey W. Lucas

Pearson

12/14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

 

Message From the President

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Welcome to California Coast University. I hope you will find this course interesting and useful throughout your career. This course was designed to meet the unique needs of students like you who are both highly motivated and capable of completing a degree program through distance learning.

Our faculty and administration have been involved in distance learning for over forty years and understand the characteristics common to successful students in this unique educational environment.

This course was prepared by CCU faculty members who are not only outstanding educators but who have real world experience. They have prepared these guidelines to help you successfully complete your educational goals and to get the most from your distance learning experience.

Again, we hope that you will find this course both helpful and motivating. We send our best wishes as you work toward the completion of your program.

Sincerely,

Thomas M. Neal President

 

 

 

 

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system without written permission from the publisher, except for the inclusion of brief quotation in review. Copyright © 2014 by California Coast University

 

 

 

Syllabus

xxi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Course Number PSY 228

Course Title Social Psychology

Course Description This course offers students an in-depth look at how people come to understand themselves and others in a social context, with considerable emphasis on sociology’s role in social psychology. Students will be given detailed examples of current research studies relating to each of the topics covered in this course such as stratification, deviance and mental health and illness. Each chapter of the text covered in this course will also introduce students to key sociological social psychologists whose research has made a significant contribution to the field.

Units of Credit 3 Units of Credit

Course Objectives Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to:

• Characterize three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

• Differentiate between qualitative and quantitative research methods.

• Determine how group processes affect identity.

• Recognize important agents of socialization.

• Identify physiological, social and behavioral components of emotions.

Learning Resources Textbook: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives 2nd edition, 2011 David E. Rohall, Melissa A. Milkie, and Jeffrey W. Lucas Pearson

ISBN-13: 9780205661060

All course examinations are based on the contents of the textbook required for this course. To successfully complete the examinations, you will need the textbook. You may rent the textbook from the CCU rental library or you may purchase the textbook from another source.

Although this study guide is developed by California Coast University, it may contain materials provided by the publisher of the textbook.

The Study Guide

The study guide was designed to help you further understand the material in the textbook and master the course content. Each study guide chapter corresponds to a chapter in the textbook.

 

 

Syllabus

xxii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Additional Readings and Online Resources

To help you further understand this subject material, additional readings and/or online resources related to this course are listed in this syllabus.

The Library Information and Resources Network, Inc. (LIRN)

Students are provided access to the Library and Information Resources Network, Inc. (LIRN). LIRN provides a centralized management of electronic information resources that allow students to access multiple research databases through one portal. Detailed information on the Library and Information Resources Network, Inc. is available on the California Coast University website under the Resources Tab. For additional information on using the network, LIRN provides a User Guide to help students search for the needed information. This helpful resource is available on the LIRN website. For information on accessing LIRN, please contact California Coast University – library@calcoast.edu or (714) 547-9625.

Supplementary Materials

Unit Examination Answer Sheets* Final Examination Scheduling Form

*Master of Education and Doctor of Education students will not receive unit exam answer sheets. These programs require written responses only.

Your Course Grade

Your grades on course examinations are determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university uses the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

Your grade in this course will be based on the number of points you earn. Grades are based on the percentage of points you earned out of a total of 500 points:

Four Unit Examinations

100 points each 400 points total 80% of your grade

Final Examination

100 points 100 points total 20% of your grade

 

 

Syllabus

xxiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Mastering the Course Content

In order to successfully complete this course, we recommend that you do the following before beginning:

• Be sure that you have the correct edition of the course textbook. Check the ISBN number of your textbook with the ISBN number listed on the cover page of this study guide.

• Review the table of contents at the end of this syllabus. You will only be responsible for the chapters in the textbook that are listed in the table of contents.

Each study guide contains several components selected and developed by the faculty to help you master the content of the course. Each chapter in the study guide corresponds to a chapter in the textbook. Study guides vary depending on the course, but most will include:

Learning Objectives Overviews Self Tests Summaries Key Terms Critical Analysis Questions (graduate and doctoral students only)

The most efficient way to complete this course is to read the materials in both the study guide and textbook in the sequence in which it appears, generally from beginning to end.

Read the Overviews and Summaries

Before reading a chapter of your textbook, review the corresponding learning objectives, overview, key terms and summary sections in the study guide. These were prepared to give you an overview of the content to be learned.

Review the Self Test

After you have reviewed the study guide summaries, look at the items on the self test. As you identify your areas of relative strength and weakness, you will become more aware of the material you will need to learn in greater depth.

Review the Critical Analysis and/or Case Study Questions (Graduate and Doctoral Students Only) The critical analysis questions are designed to help you gain a deeper understanding and appreciation for the course subject matter. This section will encourage you to give additional thought to the topics discussed in the chapter by presenting vignettes or cases with real world relevance.

 

 

Syllabus

xxiv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Read and Review the Chapter

Once you have the scope and organization of the chapter in mind, turn to the corresponding chapter in the textbook and read the material carefully. Keep the learning objectives, self test, critical analysis questions and/or case study questions in mind as you read.

Highlight important concepts and information in your study guide and write notes in the study guide as you read the textbook. These notes will help you study for the unit and final examinations.

Check Your Mastery of Each Chapter

When you feel that you have mastered the concepts presented in the chapter, complete the study guide self test and critical analysis questions and/or case study questions without referring to the textbook or your notes. Correct your responses using the answer key and solutions guide provided in the study guide. Your results will help you identify any areas you need to review.

Unit Examinations

Each course contains four unit examinations and a final examination. Unit examinations usually consist of 25 objective (multiple choice or true/false) test questions. For Master of Education and Doctor of Education students, unit examinations consist of writing assignments only.

Unit examinations may be found approximately every four to six chapters throughout your study guide. Unit examinations are open-book, do not require a proctor and are not timed. This will allow you to proceed at your own pace.

It is recommended that you check your answers against the material in your textbook for accuracy.

Writing Assignments

Each unit examination includes a written component. This assignment may be in the form of written questions or case study problems. The writing assignment affords the student an opportunity to demonstrate a level of subject mastery beyond the objective unit examinations, which reflects his/her ability to analyze, synthesize, evaluate and apply his/her knowledge. The writing assignment materials are found immediately following each unit examination.

Writing assignments are judged on the quality of the response in regard to the question. Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

 

 

Syllabus

xxv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

• Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages.

• Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages.

• Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Plagiarism consists of taking and using the ideas, writings or inventions of another, without giving credit to that person and presenting it as one’s own. This is an offense that the university takes very seriously. An example of a correctly prepared written response may be found by visiting the Coast Connection student portal.

Citation Styles

The majority of your response should be your own original writing based on what you have learned from the textbook. However, students may also use outside materials if applicable. Be sure to provide a reference (or citation) for any materials used, including the required textbook. The following points are designed to help you understand how to provide proper references for your work:

• References are listed in two places.

• The first reference is briefly listed within your answer. This includes identifying information that directs the reader to your list of references at the end of your writing assignment.

• The second reference is at the end of your work in the list of references section.

• All references cited should provide enough identifying information so that the reader can access the original material.

For more detailed information on the proper use of citations, please refer to the CCU Student Handbook located on the Coast Connection student portal.

Submitting Your Unit Examinations and Writing Assignments via the Internet

Students may access the online testing features via the Coast Connection student portal. Multiple choice unit examinations may be completed and submitted online.

 

 

Syllabus

xxvi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Go to the California Coast University homepage at www.calcoast.edu and click on the student login icon at the upper right hand corner. After logging into your account, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the unit examination. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

Writing assignments may be submitted online as well. After logging into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the writing assignment. Here, you will find further information and instructions on how to submit writing assignments through the student portal. Remember to keep a copy of your writing assignments for your own personal records.

Alternatively, if you experience diffulty submitting your writing assignments through the student portal, then you may email your assignments as a Word document attachment to essays@calcoast.edu. When doing so, please adhere to the following guidelines:

• Always submit your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number with your writing assignment.

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

• All responses must be typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size for ease of reading and grading.

Submitting Your Unit Examinations by Mail

Send your completed unit examination along with any writing assignments to the following mailing address:

California Coast University Testing Department 925 N. Spurgeon Street Santa Ana, CA 92701

Requests to retake a unit examination will only be honored if the final exam has NOT been sent.

 

 

Syllabus

xxvii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Students may retake one unit examination per course, free of charge. The cost for each additional, repeated exam will be $90. Payment must be paid in full to the accounting department prior to repeating unit exams.

Please contact Student Services for a repeat unit examination form. You may resubmit your unit examination once the original grade has been cleared from your online degree plan.

Final Examination

Scheduling a Final Examination

Final examination requests can be submitted via U.S. mail, online through the Coast Connection student portal, or by calling the Testing Department at (714) 547-9625.

A final exam scheduling form is located on the last page of this study guide. Please fill out ALL required fields and mail it to the university.

If you would like to request a final exam online, log into the Coast Connection student portal and click on My Academic Plan. Select the course you are working on and submit the Final Exam Request form located at the bottom of the page. ALL INFORMATION MUST BE FILLED IN.

Submitting Your Final Examination

Final Examinations can be submitted by mail, fax or online through the Coast Connection student portal.

After you have completed your exam, you or your proctor can fax it to the Grading Department at (714) 547-1451 or mail it to the university. When faxing exams, please do not resize your fax.

For online submissions, once you have logged into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the final examination. You must input the unique password that was sent to your proctor in order to unlock your final examination questions. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

Proctors

The university requires that all final examinations be completed under the supervision of a proctor.

A proctor can be anyone EXCEPT an immediate family member, someone who resides with you or a current/former CCU student.

 

 

Syllabus

xxviii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The purpose of the proctored final examination is to verify that you are, in fact, the person who is enrolled in the course of study. It is also to verify that you are completing the final examination without the aid of any outside assistance.

During the proctored final examination, you may use your textbook and any notes you have taken during the completion of your unit examinations. Your designated proctor will verify your identity and that you have completed the final examination without any outside assistance.

Your Overall Grade Point Average (G.P.A.)

In addition to receiving a passing grade for each course, all students must maintain a required overall G.P.A. in order to graduate. Undergraduate students need an overall G.P.A. of 2.0 (C) on a 4.0 scale. Graduate and doctoral students need an overall G.P.A. of 3.0 (B) on a 4.0 scale.

A = 4 grade points B = 3 grade points C = 2 grade points D = 1 grade point F = 0 grade points

Students who do not meet the overall G.P.A. requirement by the end of their program must pay the current cost of tuition to repeat courses until they improve their overall G.P.A.

Overall course grades of “F” will be displayed on your degree plan and count as 0 units completed. You must pay to retake these courses.

Doctoral students must repeat any courses in which the overall course grade is a “D” or “F”.

Be sure to keep a copy of all work you submit to the university.

 

 

Syllabus

xxix

PSY 228 Social Psychology

If you have any questions about how to proceed through the course or regarding any California Coast University policies and procedures, the easiest way to get help is to send us a message through the student portal, via email, or phone the university.

University office hours are Monday through Friday from 8:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Pacific Standard Time.

California Coast University

925 N. Spurgeon Street, Santa Ana, California 92701 Phone: (714) 547-9625 Fax: (714) 547-5777 Test Answer Sheet Fax Line: (714) 547-1451

Email: testing@calcoast.edu

Don’t forget: You are not alone! We are here to help you achieve your dream!

PS Y

22 8

 

 

Syllabus

xxx

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

The learning objectives for this course are listed below:

Chapter 1: Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology

1. Define social psychology. 2. Differentiate between macrosociology and microsociology. 3. Compare and contrast sociologists and psychologists’ approach to social psychology. 4. Identify the three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

Chapter 2: Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology

1. Distinguish the major principles of the symbolic interaction perspective. 2. Define what it means to “construct” the world around us. 3. Characterize the social structure and personality perspective. 4. Identify key elements of the group processes perspective. 5. Consider elements of group structure.

Chapter 3: Studying People

1. Become acquainted with the vocabulary of social science research. 2. Differentiate qualitative sociology from quantitative sociology. 3. Determine major forms of qualitative and quantitative research. 4. Assess how social scientists begin to develop a research project.

Chapter 4: The Social Psychology of Stratification

1. Interpret how people construct inequality in society. 2. Determine how structure is linked to interactions. 3. Evaluate how stratification develops in group interaction. 4. Judge how inequalities from society-at-large get reproduced in groups.

Chapter 5: Self and Identity

1. Identify the components of the self. 2. Determine interactionist theories of the self and identity. 3. Characterize three dimensions of the self-concept. 4. Analyze what we know from research on the self-concept. 5. Interpret how group processes affect identity.

 

 

Syllabus

xxxi

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter 6: Socialization Over the Life Course

1. Critique how society influences the social construction of the self. 2. Chart the stages involved in developing the self. 3. Name the four elements of life-course sociology. 4. Consider agents of socialization and how they affect our lives. 5. Assess how group processes researchers study socialization.

Chapter 7: The Social Psychology of Deviance

1. Analyze how we define what is normal and what is deviant. 2. Determine how the construction of deviant labels contribute to the development of deviant lifestyles. 3. Judge how structural conditions influence individuals’ decisions to commit deviant acts. 4. Consider how group relationships influence the development of deviance and perceptions of deviance.

Chapter 8: Mental Health and Illness

1. Determine what it means to be mentally healthy. 2. Interpret how the definition of mental illness is constructed. 3. List the structural conditions in society that contribute to distress. 4. Identify resources that can buffer stress. 5. Assess how mental health can influence our sense of identity and interactions with others.

Chapter 9: Attitudes, Values and Behaviors

1. Identify the nature of an attitude. 2. Evaluate how researchers study attitudes and behaviors. 3. Describe how people construct attitudes. 4. Analyze how attitudes toward other people form in group contexts.

Chapter 10: The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion

1. Distinguish the components of emotions. 2. Determine how people learn emotions. 3. Consider how identity relates to emotions. 4. Evaluate how our statuses in society affect our uses of emotions. 5. Interpret the norms that govern the use of emotions in different social settings. 6. Predict how group settings affect emotions.

 

 

Syllabus

xxxii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter 11: Collective Behavior

1. Analyze how crowds contribute to the development of mass hysteria. 2. Identify theories that explain individuals’ behavior in large groups. 3. Decide whether structural conditions affect crowd behaviors. 4. Chart the phases of collective behavior found in large social movements. 5. Evaluate how group and individual motivations interact in social movements.

 

 

Syllabus

xxxiii

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Best, Joel. 2006. Flavor of the Month: Why Smart People Fall for Fads. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.

Clarke, Lee. 2006. Worst Cases: Terror and Catastrophe in the Popular Imagination. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Gergen, Kenneth J. 2000. The Saturated Self: Dilemmas of Identity in Contemporary Life. New York: Basic Books.

Hertz, Rosanna. 2006. Single by Chance, Mothers by Choice: How Women are Choosing Parenthood without Marriage and Creating the New American Family. New York: Oxford University Press.

Horowitz, Allan V. 2002. Creating Mental Illness. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Lareau, Annette. 2003. Unequal Childhoods: Class, Race and Family Life. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.

Miller, David L. 2000. Introduction to Collective Behavior and Collective Action. Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland.

Polletta, Francesca. 2006. It was Like a Fever: Storytelling in Protest and Politics. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.

Ream, Robert Ketner. 2005. Uprooting Children: Mobility, Social Capital and Mexican American Underachievement. New York: LFB Scholarly Publishing.

Scheff, Thomas J. 1990. Microsociology: Discourse, Emotion and Social Structure. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Swidler, Ann. 2001. Talk of Love: How Culture Matters. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

Turner,Ralph H. and Lewis M. Killian. 1972. Collective Behavior. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Zelizer, Viviana. 2005. The Purchase of Intimacy. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.

Suggested Readings

 

 

Table of Contents

xxxiv

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Syllabus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii-xx

Unit One Chapter 1: Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 2: Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chapter 3: Studying People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Unit 1 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Unit 1 Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Unit 1 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Unit Two

Chapter 4: The Social Psychology of Stratification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Chapter 5: Self and Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Chapter 6: Socialization Over the Life Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Unit 2 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Unit 2 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Unit 2 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Unit Three

Chapter 7: The Social Psychology of Deviance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Chapter 8: Mental Health and Illness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Chapter 9: Attitudes, Values and Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Unit 3 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Unit 3 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Unit 3 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Unit Four Chapter 10: The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Chapter 11: Collective Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Unit 4 Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Unit 4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Unit 4 Writing Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Final Examination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Final Exam Scheduling Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

 

 

Objectives

1

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter One Introduction to Sociological Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Define social psychology.

2. Differentiate between macrosociology and microsociology.

3. Compare and contrast sociologists and psychologists’ approach to social psychology.

4. Identify the three major perspectives in sociological social psychology.

• Read pages 1-24 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

2

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter is designed to give students an understanding of how sociologists study social psychology and its role in the larger field of sociology. Students will gain an understanding of the distinction between psychology and sociology and be able to explain the major sociological social psychology perspectives.

 

 

Key Terms

3

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Breaching experiments:

Culture:

Ethnomethodology:

Macrosociology:

Organizations:

Psychology:

Roles:

Social norms:

Social psychology:

Sociological imagination:

Symbolic interactionism:

 

 

Summary

4

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociology is the study of society. Sociologists look at society from both the macro and the micro level of analysis. Both psychological and sociological social psychologists study the social contexts of human thoughts, feelings and behaviors. Sociologists, however, also apply the perspectives and methods of the field of sociology to the study of social psychology.

Sociology was first defined in 1838 by French social philosopher, August Comte, who applied the principles of the scientific method to society. Some of the founders of sociological social psychology include George Herbert Mead, W.E.B. Dubois, William Thomas, Charles Horton Cooley and George Simmel. Three major perspectives in sociological social psychology include symbolic interactionism, social structure and personality and group processes.

Sociologists use a tool kit consisting of methods and concepts for studying the role of society in social psychological processes. Their tools include such concepts as statuses, roles, norms and values, culture and social institutions—which they apply to the study of human thoughts—feelings and behavior.

 

 

Self Test

5

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. How can macrosociological perspectives be used to study individual, micro-level interactions?

a. Macrosociological conditions may cause some individual-level conditions to exist in the first place. b. Differences in our macrosociological conditions may change the way we react to life events. c. Life events that affect us the most are often caused by societal conditions. d. All of the above.

2. Janna wanted to study the effects of population size on individuals’ decision to commit suicide. Which social psychological perspective is she most likely to use?

a. psychology b. sociology c. sociological social psychology d. psychological social psychology

3. Which macrosociological perspective views society as social systems composed of parts that serve to keep the system working properly?

a. conflict perspective b. symbolic interactionism c. behavioralism d. structural functionalism

4. Joe started noticing that kids from the upper classes tend to get accepted at better colleges than the kids from the middle and lower classes. His analysis probably comes from which macrosociological perspective?

a. conflict perspective b. symbolic interactionism c. behavioralism d. structural functionalism

 

 

Self Test

6

PSY 228 Social Psychology

5. Sociological social psychology is different from psychological social psychology because:

a. it focuses on the effects of societal conditions on individuals’ thoughts, feelings and behavior. b. it incorporates sociological perspectives and theories to explain individuals’ thoughts, feelings and behavior. c. it is a subfield of sociology, not psychology. d. All of the above.

6. Social psychology is the systematic study of individual thoughts, feelings and behavior in a social context. Which of the following social contexts are more likely to be studied by sociologists than psychologists?

a. small groups b. family interactions c. ethnic groups d. friendship groups

 

 

Answer Keys

7

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Breaching experiments: Experiments that violate the established social order to assess how people construct social reality.

Culture: A society’s set of unique patterns of behavior and beliefs.

Ethnomethodology: A method of studying society through observation of people’s typical day-to-day interactions.

Macrosociology: The study of large-scale social processes.

Organizations: Groups that share a common purpose and contain a formal set of rules and authority structure.

Psychology: The study of human thought processes and behaviors.

Roles: A set of expectations about how to behave in a group.

Social norms: The rules that regulate our behavior in relationships.

Social psychology: The systematic study of people’s thoughts, feelings and behavior in social contexts.

Sociological imagination: The ability to see personal lives in the context of the larger society— its history, culture and social structure.

Symbolic interactionism: A perspective within sociological social psychology that emphasizes the study of how people negotiate the meaning of social life during their interactions with other people.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

8

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. c

3. d

4. a

5. d

6. c

 

 

Notes

9

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

10

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Two Perspectives in Sociological Social Psychology

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Distinguish the major principles of the symbolic interaction perspective.

2. Define what it means to “construct” the world around us.

3. Characterize the social structure and personality perspective.

4. Identify key elements of the group processes perspective.

5. Consider elements of group structure.

• Read pages 25-53 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

11

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter provides an extensive review of three major perspectives in sociological social psychology. Students will learn about the history, theoretical and empirical importance of the three perspectives. The chapter begins with an overview of the history and tenets of symbolic interactionism. This is followed by a review of the two major schools of symbolic interactionism.

 

 

Key Terms

12

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency:

Collective behavior:

Components principle:

Frame analysis:

Legitimacy:

Proximity principle:

Psychology principle:

Reference groups:

Social scripts:

Thomas theorem:

 

 

Summary

13

PSY 228 Social Psychology

There are three broad perspectives in sociological social psychology: symbolic interactionism, social structure and personality and group processes.

Symbolic interactionism is the study of how people negotiate meaning during their interactions with others. Within this approach, two schools of symbolic interactionism exists: the Chicago school and the Iowa and Indiana schools.

The social structure and personality perspective emphasizes how social structure affects individuals within a society. Structural forces include status, roles and social networks.

The group processes perspective focuses on interactions that occur within groups, characteristics of groups and relationships among groups. Processes studied by those in the group processes perspective include power, status, justice and legitimacy.

A group’s behavior is influenced by structural conditions including its size and its function. Group research may focus on structure or on other aspects of group processes, such as the relationship between groups and the behavior of larger groups of people called collective behavior.

 

 

Self Test

14

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Which social theorists are most associated with the concept of the social construction of reality?

a. Marx and Engels b. Thomas and Thomas c. Berger and Luckmann d. Blumer and Mead

2. A local fraternity developed a special hand signal whenever they see each other on the university quad. In symbolic interactionist terms, this signal has become a ______________ for this group.

a. meaningful exchange b. important source of pride c. language d. symbol

3. Terence started to believe that a friend at work is really a spy from another company, leading him to avoid interactions with that person as much as possible. Ultimately, he treats all interactions with her as suspect, making him reluctant to share any work-related information with her. Which of the following best explains Terence’s behavior?

a. components principle of the social structure and personality perspective b. the Thomas theorem c. the peter principle d. the group processes concept of legitimacy

4. Who coined the expression “symbolic interaction”?

a. Emile Durkheim b. Herbert Blumer c. August Comte d. George Herbert Mead

5. Professor Swanson is studying the meaning of “goodness” using a survey of public attitudes toward the topic. Which school of symbolic interaction is she most likely using in her research?

a. the Chicago school b. the Indiana/Iowa school c. the Swanson school d. the sociological social psychology school

 

 

Self Test

15

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Socioeconomic status (social class), race or ethnicity, gender, age and sexuality all relate to which principle of the social structure and personality perspective?

a. components principle b. proximity principle c. psychology principle d. peter principle

 

 

Answer Keys

16

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency: The ability to act and think independent of the constraints imposed by social conditions.

Collective behavior: The action or behavior of people in groups or crowds.

Components principle: Within the social structure and personality perspective, the ability to identify the elements or components of society most likely to affect a given attitude or behavior.

Frame analysis: The process by which individuals transform the meaning of a situation using basic cognitive structures provided by society.

Legitimacy: The perception that a social arrangement or position is the way that things should be.

Proximity principle: Element of the social structure and personality perspective referring to how people are affected by social structure through their immediate social environments.

Psychology principle: Element of the social structure and personality perspective referring to how individuals internalize proximal experiences.

Reference groups: People we look to as a source of standards and identity.

Social scripts: The appropriate thoughts, feelings and behaviors that should be displayed in a particular social frame.

Thomas theorem: Theorem stating that when people define situations as real, the consequences of those situations become real.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

17

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. b

4. b

5. b

6. a

 

 

Notes

18

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

19

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Three Studying People

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Become acquainted with the vocabulary of social science research.

2. Differentiate qualitative sociology from quantitative sociology.

3. Determine major forms of qualitative and quantitative research.

4. Assess how social scientists begin to develop a research project.

• Read pages 54-82 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

20

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to provide an overview of the techniques sociological social psychologists use to study people, emphasizing theoretical differences on the appropriate means of obtaining social-psychological data.

 

 

Key Terms

21

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Categorical variables:

Ethnography:

Focus groups:

Indices:

Interval variables:

Ordinal variables:

Population:

Qualitative research methods:

Reliability:

Snowball sample:

Validity:

 

 

Summary

22

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Several concepts apply to almost any research project. Researchers regularly use terms such as theory, research questions or hypotheses and variables to describe ways of studying people.

Researchers employ qualitative and quantitative techniques to study human subjects. Qualitative research methods include field research and in-depth interviews. Quantitative methods include survey research and experiments.

The steps in developing most research projects include assessing the theory and literature of the research topic, developing research questions or specific hypotheses, choosing the appropriate research methods, conducting data analysis and reporting the results.

Although there is no rule about whether a particular theory should or should not use quantitative or qualitative methods to study people, symbolic interactionists have traditionally relied more on qualitative methods. Many researchers try to employ multiple methods of studying a particular phenomenon.

 

 

Self Test

23

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. How are social theories and hypotheses related to one another?

a. Theories include general statements about social relationships while hypotheses are more specific statements about how variables will relate to one another. b. Theories are an extension of hypotheses. c. Theories are used to develop hypotheses. d. both a and c

2. Samantha started a research project predicting that men would be more supportive of using military forces to go to war than women. In this case, attitudes toward going to war is what kind of variable?

a. index b. scale c. independent variable d. dependent variable

3. In preparing for a survey of country club members, Donella asked the manager of the club for a list of members. This list refers to a _______________.

a. random sample b. probability sample c. sample list d. sampling frame

4. Which of the following types of samples is considered most representative of any given population?

a. random sample b. convenience sample c. snowball sample d. both b and c

5. An instructor asks you to develop a study of the homeless that will provide a great deal of depth into what it is like to be homeless. Given this mandate, which of the following methods would most likely give the information you need for such a project?

a. ethnography b. focus group c. survey d. experiment

 

 

Self Test

24

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. A sample in which any available person is included in the study is known as a ____________ sample.

a. true b. convenience c. odd d. real time

 

 

Answer Keys

25

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Categorical variables: Measures for which the possible responses have no particular order.

Ethnography: A form of field research that includes a descriptive analysis of a group or organization.

Focus groups: Semistructured interviews with small groups of people.

Indices: A series of related questions designed to measure a concept such as mastery.

Interval variables: A type of variable in which the difference between any two adjacent values is the same.

Ordinal variables: Variables for which response categories are ordered but the distances between adjacent categories are not necessarily equal.

Population: The larger group of people about whom a researcher seeks to draw conclusions.

Qualitative research methods: In-depth, semi-structured modes of observation or interviewing of subjects.

Reliability: When a study yields the same results using the same techniques and data.

Snowball sample: Samples in which informants provide contact information about other people who share some of the characteristics necessary for a study.

Validity: How valid or accurate the findings of the study are.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

26

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. a

3. d

4. a

5. a

6. b

 

 

Notes

27

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 1 Examination Instructions

28

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit One Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

29

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Which early sociologists emphasized the role of society in the development of the self?

a. George Herbert Mead b. Karl Marx c. Georg Simmer d. Herbert Blumer

2. Which sociological social psychology perspective emphasizes the role of meaning and the social construction of meaning in the study of social psychology?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

3. Which sociological social psychology perspective is likely to emphasize the importance of roles and statuses in the study of social psychology?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

4. Which sociological social psychology perspective is likely to emphasize the importance of interactions within groups?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

5. The sociological imagination is associated with which social theorists?

a. Emile Durkheim b. Max Weber c. C. Wright Mills d. Auguste Comte

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

30

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. The expectation to look someone in the eye when talking with them refers to a _______________.

a. norm b. role c. value d. belief

7. Derek’s job as a supervisor refers to his relative _______________ in the company while the expectations for how to behave on the job refers to his ________________.

a. role; status b. job; role c. status; role d. status; job

8. Which institution regulates sexual relations and child-rearing in society?

a. economy and work b. politics c. family d. religion

9. Which institution refers to the rituals and beliefs regarding sacred things?

a. economy and work b. politics c. family d. religion

10. Franklin did not think much about how the economy or society affects his life until he lost his job. Franklin’s internal processesing of his job loss best represents which principle from the social structure and personality perspective?

a. components principle b. psychology principle c. propinquity principle d. proximity principle

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

31

PSY 228 Social Psychology

11. After Donna cheated on her most recent exam, she starts to feel a sense of guilt, making her reconsider whether she wants to do it again. Donna’s feelings of guilt can be considered a ______________, according to the social structure and personality perspective, leading her to rethink her future behaviors.

a. social more b. social norm c. social force d. social fear

12. Which of the following is considered a major dimension of group processes?

a. power b. justice c. legitimacy d. All of the above.

13. Janelle wants to study how and why some people are able to tell other people what to do while others can not. What aspect of group processes is she studying?

a. power b. status c. justice d. legitimacy

14. What social psychologist is most associated with the concepts of dyads and triads?

a. Emile Durkheim b. August Comte c. Herbert Blumer d. Georg Simmel

15. The difference between dyads and triads is important because:

a. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially increases the number of relationships available in an interaction. b. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially decreases the amount of intimacy possible in a group. c. moving from a dyad to a triad exponentially decreases the number of relationships available in an interaction. d. both a and b

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

32

PSY 228 Social Psychology

16. A group of friends getting together for dinner represents a ______________ group while a group of people at your work represents a _____________ group.

a. reference; primary b. primary; reference c. primary; secondary d. secondary; reference

17. Bob goes to the beach on a hot summer day and is surprised when he observes a group of people dressed in formal wear sitting in beach chairs amongst sunbathers. Bob was surprised because the ______________ did not meet his expectations for that situation.

a. situation b. social scripts c. frame d. All of the above.

18. ____________ require the researcher to weigh individual items differently.

a. Indices b. Scales c. both a and b d. None of the above.

19. Which of the following methods is MOST likely to show causation?

a. ethnography b. focus group c. survey d. experiment

20. An instructor developed a study to determine ways of producing more participation in his classes. In one class she provided free donuts everyday of class while in another she gave them nothing. She had her assistant takes notes on the number of comments and questions students made in each class. Which of these classes represent the control group?

a. the class not given the donuts b. the class given the donuts c. other classes that are not part of the experiment d. both classes would be considered the control group

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

33

PSY 228 Social Psychology

21. ____________ developed the field of operant conditioning; much of his work relied on experiments using rats and pigeons.

a. Carl Jung b. B.F. Skinner c. Sigmund Freud d. Joseph Berger

22. At what step in the research process does the researcher employ the library and other resources and conduct a literature review?

a. step 1 b. step 2 c. step 3 d. step 4

23. At what step in the research process does the researcher actually go out and collect data?

a. step 1 b. step 2 c. step 3 d. step 4

24. Research conducted by interviews, participant observations and ethnographies is referred to as what kind of research?

a. quantitative b. qualitative c. breeching d. experimental

25. Social scientists must always be concerned with _______________ and _______________ to accurately capture the phenomena in question.

a. truth and reliability b. reliability and validity c. truth and validity d. probability and validity

 

 

Unit 1 Examination

34

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit One

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

1. Think about the concept of poverty. How would a macro-level sociologist study this concept differently than a micro-level sociologist?

2. Discuss how symbolic interactionists define the concept of society. What role do symbols and language play in the development of society?

3. Discuss the ways that group structures can impact interaction in groups. Specifically, examine how group size (i.e., dyads and triads) and types of groups (e.g., primary groups) impact interactions between people.

 

 

You Can Do It

35

PSY 228 Social Psychology

You have just completed Unit 1 of this course.

You are off to a great start!

Keep up the good work!

 

 

Objectives

36

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Four The Social Psychology of Stratification

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Interpret how people construct inequality in society.

2. Determine how structure is linked to interactions.

3. Evaluate how stratification develops in group interaction.

4. Judge how inequalities from society-at-large get reproduced in groups.

• Read pages 84-120 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

37

PSY 228 Social Psychology

One of the major ways that sociological social psychology is different from its counterpart in psychology is its greater emphasis on the role of stratification in social psychological processes. There are several ways in which stratification affects our lives and relationships. Symbolic interactionists sometimes address how we create and maintain definitions of different classes of people. Social structure and personality scholars emphasize how structural conditions, often related to work, education, or family settings affect people. Those in the group processes perspective examine how stratification systems from the larger society become reproduced in groups. We will use each of these perspectives to examine how stratification processes occur in our day-to-day lives.

 

 

Key Terms

38

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Borderwork:

Direct exchanges:

Doing difference:

Feedback loop:

Intersectionality:

Routinization:

Social capital:

Social exchange theory:

Social stratification:

Substantive complexity:

 

 

Summary

39

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Three ways that interactionist researchers focus on stratification processes include examining how social structure shapes who we interact with, accounting for inequalities in the content of interactions, acknowledging how people with certain status characteristics have more power in terms of role taking and examining people’s power to define situations and define themselves.

The Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment traces the relationships among individual’s class position, their abilities and their long-term occupational outcomes.

The effect of networking among individuals from different groups creates a variety of outcomes for those involved, depending on the status of the individuals in a group as well as the status of the group itself.

Values serve as a guide for making decisions about the future, ultimately affecting the types of jobs we attain and class position we have in life, producing a feedback loop between our personality and social positions.

Group processes contribute to our understanding of structural developments by studying the exchanges among individuals in groups. Exchange processes lend themselves to the development of status structures because people bring different types and quantities of resources into the process. People who contribute more to a group or have more resources generally achieve a higher status in groups.

 

 

Self Test

40

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Shirley Brice Heath’s research on the socialization of status and race among Whites and Blacks in the rural-Piedmont Carolinas is important because:

a. it shows how social class influences how we interact with other people. b. it shows how historical and social conditions can affect our day-to-day interactions. c. it shows that White people have an advantage over African-Americans in getting into good colleges. d. both a and b

2. Which perspective in sociological social psychology is more likely to examine the effects of stratification in day-to-day exchanges between people?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functionalism

3. Which of the following is the best example of “borderwork”?

a. a group of teenage boys smoking cigarettes in a high-school parking lot b. a group of girls at a slumber party c. a group of boys and girls playing “kiss and chase” d. a group of boys and girls being lectured to about poor behavior

4. Elijah Anderson’s study of inner city norms and values show that:

a. inner city residents tend to be submissive in the face of their poverty. b. inner city residents are taught to develop a toughness to deal with challenges of poverty and poor living conditions. c. most inner city residents accept most traditional norms from the larger culture. d. both b and c

5. An intersectional approach is essential to understanding the dynamics of stratification because it allows us to the look at the multitude of ways in which our statuses and positions affect our experience.

a. True b. False

 

 

Self Test

41

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. According to the Wisconsin Model of Status Attainment, how does our social background influence our occupational status in life?

a. It shows that our social background influences with whom we spend time. b. It shows that our social background influences our mental abilities. c. It shows that our social background affects our educational levels. d. All of the above.

 

 

Answer Keys

42

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Borderwork: The creation of social and physical boundaries between boys and girls.

Direct exchanges: Exchanges between two people.

Doing difference: Any way in which inequality in any form (race, class or gender) is perpetuated during our interactions as people are held accountable to the social categories in which they are a part.

Feedback loop: A process in which our class position influences the development of values that, in turn, influences the type of job we seek.

Intersectionality: The idea that race, gender and class statuses are not separate but interlocking systems of inequality.

Routinization: Part of Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment referring to the level of repetitiveness found on the job.

Social capital: Trust and support found in relationships with other people.

Social exchange theory: Theory based on the premise that individuals enter into relationships that provide some benefit to them and end or leave relationships that do not provide some sort of reward.

Social stratification: The ways in which individuals or groups are ranked in society.

Substantive complexity: Part of Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment referring to how complicated the actual work is on the job.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

43

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. d

2. a

3. c

4. d

5. a

6. d

 

 

Notes

44

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

45

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Five Self and Identity

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Identify the components of the self.

2. Determine interactionist theories of the self and identity.

3. Characterize three dimensions of the self-concept.

4. Analyze what we know from research on the self-concept.

5. Interpret how group processes affect identity.

• Read pages 121-149 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

46

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter reviews the different ways that sociologists study the meaning of the concepts of self and identity and the structural and group conditions that impact the self. It will address the components of the self; interactionist theories of the self and identity; three dimensions of self- concept; and how group processes affect identity.

 

 

Key Terms

47

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect-control theory:

Backstage:

Dramaturgical sociology:

Emotional arousal:

I:

Identity:

Mastery:

Mattering:

Me:

Personal characteristics:

Psychological centrality:

Self:

Self-enhancement:

Self-esteem:

Self-indication:

Verbal persuasion:

Vicarious experience:

 

 

Summary

48

PSY 228 Social Psychology

From a symbolic interactionist perspective, the self is a process in which we construct a sense of who we are. We use symbols and language to communicate with other people, but we also use language to think internally. The self includes a dialogue between the “I” and the “Me”.

Identity includes our social categories and personal characteristics. Identity theory examines how social conditions affect the salience of identities and thus our behavior. Affect-control theory incorporates emotions in identity processes.

The self-concept refers to all our thoughts and feelings about ourselves as an object, often studied in the form of identities, self-esteem, mattering and mastery. Class, race, and gender are important social statuses that influence our self-development over time. Social identity theory argues that people define and evaluate themselves in terms of the groups they belong to, including one’s race and gender.

 

 

Self Test

49

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. What part of the self-concept is mastery?

a. the self b. self-identities c. self-evaluations d. self indication

2. Debating what other people are thinking about you in a public setting is best represented by what term?

a. self-concept b.self-identities c. self-evaluations d. self indication

3. According to Mead, which aspect of our self is out in public, constantly processing new information related to the self?

a. the “I” b. the “Me” c. self-concept d. self indication

4. Which of the following is NOT an element of identity?

a. social categories b. role identities c. personal characteristics d. self attitudes

5. Being a Canadian applies to which aspect of identity?

a. social categories b. role identities c. personal characteristics d. self attitudes

 

 

Self Test

50

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Identity theory comes from which social-psychological perspective?

a. symbolic interaction b. social structure and personality c. group processes d. structural functional

 

 

Answer Keys

51

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect-control theory: The theory that incorporates elements of symbolic interactionism and identity theory to explain the role of emotion in identity processes.

Backstage: Part of dramaturgical sociology referring to the region where we relax our impression management efforts.

Dramaturgical sociology: The study of how we present ourselves, playing roles and managing impressions during interactions with other people.

Emotional arousal: Inferences about our abilities based on our emotional states that we use to build our sense of mastery.

I: The part of the self that is active, engaging in interactions with others.

Identity: Our internalized, stable sense of who we are.

Mastery: Our perceptions of our ability to control things important to us.

Mattering: Our sense that we are important to other people in the world.

Me: The part of the self that includes an organized set of attitudes toward the self.

Personal characteristics: Anything we use to describe our individual nature.

Psychological centrality: Our ability to shift aspects of the self to become more or less important to our overall self-concept.

Self: A process in which we construct a sense of who we are through interaction with others.

Self-enhancement: In social identity theory, the process through which we make comparisons that favor our own groups.

Self-esteem: The positive or negative evaluation of our self as an object.

Self-indication: The use of symbols and language to communicate internally.

Verbal persuasion: Information from others about our abilities used to derive mastery.

Vicarious experience: A way of building mastery by seeing other people perform tasks; it shows us that the task is accomplishable.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

52

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. a

4. d

5. a

6. a

 

 

Notes

53

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

54

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Six Socialization Over the Lifer Course

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Critique how society influences the social construction of the self.

2. Chart the stages involved in developing the self.

3. Name the four elements of life-course sociology.

4. Consider agents of socialization and how they affect our lives.

5. Assess how group processes researchers study socialization.

• Read pages 150-187 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

55

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to define socialization and the life course and the major theories and research associated with these ideas.

 

 

Key Terms

56

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency:

Birth cohort:

Contextual dissonance:

Gender socialization:

Idiocultures:

Life course:

Life events:

Linked lives:

Looking-glass self:

Pygmalion effect:

Socialization:

 

 

Summary

57

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociologists study socialization processes at every stage of development from childhood to late adulthood. The self develops through a symbolic process. An essential aspect of self-development is the ability to take the role of the other.

The sociology of childhood focuses on how children are active participants in creating culture. Life-course sociology is based on the notion that humans adapt to different situations based on their social and historical location, relative to different events and cultural “moments.” Four major themes in life-course sociology include historical context, timing, linked lives and agency.

Sociologists view agents of socialization as mediators of the larger society rather than direct causes of socialization. The family is considered the primary agent of socialization because children are raised from infancy with parents and often siblings. Schools and peers are two other important agents of socialization.

The group processes perspective often examines the role of socialization after it has occurred, reviewing, for instance, how expectations about gender or race affect group interactions.

 

 

Self Test

58

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Sammy is using dolls to represent people in a doll house. Based on Mead’s theory of child development, at what stage of development is she?

a. preparatory stage b. play stage c. game stage d. toy stage

2. A little boy playing in a baseball team is probably in which stage of development using Mead’s typology?

a. preparatory stage b. play stage c. game stage d. toy stage

3. Which social psychologist is associated with the looking-glass self?

a. George Herbert Mead b. Michel Foucault c. Georg Simmel d. Charles Horton Cooley

4. Studies have shown that factors such as parenting style, resources and status can dramatically affect the outcomes of children of divorced parents.

a. True b. False

5. Studies have found that father’s household labor participation has little effect on their son’s future household labor sharing.

a. True b. False

 

 

Self Test

59

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Several studies have shown that there is a correlation between watching violent television and aggressive behavior.

a. True b. False

 

 

Answer Keys

60

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Agency: An aspect of life-course sociology referring to our ability to improvise roles, make decisions and control our destiny.

Birth cohort: A group of people born around the same time period.

Contextual dissonance: A feeling that minority members of a group have because they are different from the majority members.

Gender socialization: Learning expectations about how to behave related to one’s gender.

Idiocultures: A system of knowledge, beliefs, behaviors and customs shared by an interacting group to which members refer and employ as a basis of further interaction.

Life course: The process of change from infancy to late adulthood resulting from personal and societal events and from transitions into and out of social roles.

Life events: Event that can cause significant changes in the course of our lives.

Linked lives: An aspect of life-course sociology referring to our relationships with other people.

Looking-glass self: How the self relies on imagined responses of others in its development.

Pygmalion effect: When children develop according to expectations of a group or society.

Socialization: The ways in which individuals attempt to align their own thoughts, feelings, and behavior to fit into a group or society.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

61

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. b

2. c

3. d

4. a

5. b

6. a

 

 

Notes

62

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 2 Examination Instructions

63

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Two Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

64

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. How does Kohn and Schooler’s model of status attainment link economic status, job characteristics and personality?

a. People with lower economic status tend to find work in jobs that have more supervision. b. People with lower economic status tend to find work in jobs that require less intellectual flexibility. c. People with less intellectual flexibility tend to seek jobs that are routinized. d. All of the above.

2. Bradley, a student at Big U, regularly seeks advice from his professor and mentor, Janet. According to exchange theory, what kind of exchange is most likely motivating Janet to stay in this relationship?

a. a direct exchange b. a reciprocal exchange c. a generalized exchange d. All of the above.

3. What was being exchanged among crew members and the captain in George Homan’s research about exchange processes on small warships?

a. support b. caring c. listening d. All of the above.

4. Who gets the most status in groups based on Bales’ research in social exchanges in small groups?

a. Those who are perceived as the best managers. b. Those who are perceived as being the smartest. c. Those who contribute the most to the group. d. Those who listen and care the most for the other members.

5. Which of the following best reflects a task group used to study status processes in groups?

a. A group of students at a class lecture. b. A group of people waiting in line to pay at a store. c. A group of citizens meeting to resolve a local problem. d. All of the above.

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

65

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Why are weak ties so important for finding work?

a. People with whom we have weak ties live and work in circles outside our own. b. People with whom we have weak ties tend to have better jobs. c. People with whom we have weak ties aren’t biased against us in the job market. d. People with whom we have weak ties provide training in getting better jobs.

7. According to status characteristics theory, gender, race and education levels are examples of _______________.

a. diffuse status characteristics b. specific status characteristics c. roles d. class positions

8. According to status characteristics theory, skill at playing basketball would be considered _______________.

a. diffuse status characteristics b. specific status characteristics c. roles d. class positions

9. People are ______________ aware of the status hierarchies that develop in task-oriented groups.

a. almost always b. usually not c. always d. None of the above.

10. Which theorist is most associated with impression management?

a. Auguste Comte b. Emile Durkheim c. Herbert Blumer d. Erving Goffman

11. According to dramaturgical sociology, what area of identity is associated with hanging out with friends while watching television?

a. front stage b. back stage c. performance stage d. informal groups

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

66

PSY 228 Social Psychology

12. A first date would most likely be associated with what area of identity?

a. front stage b. back stage c. performance stage d. informal groups

13. Spencer Cahill’s research on “bathroom behavior” clearly showed that _______________.

a. people act very differently in bathrooms than other areas of life b. serve as “self-service” repair shops c. people use bathrooms to “retire” from their front stage presentations d. All of the above.

14. Which of the following has the strongest impact on self-esteem?

a. social comparisons b. reflected appraisals c. psychological centrality d. self-perceptions

15. _____________ are observations of our behavior and its consequences.

a. Reflected appraisals b. Self-perceptions c. Social comparisons d. Psychological centrality

16. What is the best way to build a child’s sense of mastery or efficacy?

a. personal accomplishments b. vicarious experience c. verbal persuasion d. emotional arousal

17. Rosenberg’s early research on mattering found it positively related to _______________ and negatively related to ________________.

a. self-esteem; alcoholism b. depression; self-esteem c. self-esteem; depression d. mastery; depression

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

67

PSY 228 Social Psychology

18. Given research and theory in life-course sociology, which of the following groups are most likely to be negatively affected by Hurricane Katrina?

a. a poor White family who survived the storm together b. a poor African-American family who survived the storm together c. a middle-class White man who lost his income and had no access to family or friends during the event d. a middle-class African-American family who survived the storm together

19. Tony and Rose both received word that they were called up for active duty in the military out of the reserve component of the forces. Tony is several years older with a wife and child while Rose is just finishing college. Which dimension of life course sociology best explains why Tony is more likely to be affected by the mobilization than Rose?

a. historical context b. linked lives c. social timing d. agency

20. Which of the following is NOT considered a primary agent of socialization?

a. family b. peers c. schools d. government

21. Elder’s study of the Great Depression generally showed that ______________.

a. all children were negatively affected by growing up in the Great Depression b. only children growing up in poverty were affected by the Great Depression c. the Great Depression had the strongest impact on children’s lives by changing family roles d. both b and c

22. Kohn’s work on class socialization generally showed that middle-class families tend to stress ______________ while working-class families emphasize _______________ in raising their children.

a. autonomy; conformity b. conformity; freedom c. freedom; independence d. conformity; autonomy

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

68

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. Rosenthal and Jacobson’s study of classroom interaction is important because:

a. it showed that children are taught to be racist in the classroom. b. it showed that IQ scores could be manipulated based on a group prejudice. c. it showed that children’s IQ scores were not linked to race at all. d. it showed that racist beliefs and values exist in every classroom.

24. Which of the following groups are most prevalent in American schools based on Adler and Adler’s research on peer culture?

a. the popular click b. the wannabes c. middle friendship circles d. social isolates

25. Group processes researcher is important to the study of socialization in what way?

a. It shows the importance of peer-group interactions in socialization processes. b. It shows the importance of family interactions. c. It shows the importance of the media. d. It emphasizes the impact of socialization in group settings.

 

 

Unit 2 Examination

69

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Two

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. Describe the concept of “doing gender.” Apply this process to other statuses in society (e.g., race, ethnicity or sexuality).

2. Review the three ways that interactionists view the development and maintenance of stratification in society.

3. Discuss the similarities and differences between identity theory and social identity theory.

 

 

You Can Do It

70

PSY 228 Social Psychology

With Unit 2 complete, you are half way through the course.

Take a break and reward yourself

for a job well done!

 

 

Objectives

71

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Seven The Social Psychology of Deviance

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Analyze how we define what is normal and what is deviant.

2. Determine how the construction of deviant labels contribute to the development of deviant lifestyles.

3. Judge how structural conditions influence individuals’ decisions to commit deviant acts.

4. Consider how group relationships influence the development of deviance and perceptions of deviance.

• Read pages 190-220 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

72

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter examines major sociological concepts and theories associated with the concept of deviance.

Interactionists generally view deviance as a normal part of the symbolic interaction process. Structural and group-centered views of deviance tend to focus on the social conditions that increase the likelihood of breaking laws. These views come from the larger social science specialty of criminology. This chapter emphasizes the broader sense of deviance in everyday life, before reviewing traditional theories and research on criminal forms of deviance.

 

 

Key Terms

73

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Anomie:

Attachment:

Belief:

Covering:

Deviance:

Indexicality:

Labeling theory:

Mores:

Reflexivity:

Social control theory:

 

 

Summary

74

PSY 228 Social Psychology

From a social-psychological perspective, deviance is a necessary part of the symbolic interaction process of negotiating social reality. Interactionism assumes that individuals decide to maintain (or break) social norms and standards during every interaction. Deviance allows for change in relationships and society as a whole.

Ethnomethodological perspectives of deviance emphasize how individuals construct and defend their views of social reality—the “real” boundaries of social life. People who can provide better accounts can convince others of those accounts, thus controlling the meaning of good and bad— deviance and conformity—in society.

Labeling theory is a major interactionist perspective of deviance. It is based on the notion that deviance is a consequence of a social process in which a negative characteristic becomes an element of an individual’s identity.

Strain and social control theories apply macrosociological perspectives of deviant behavior, arguing that deviance results from a larger set of societal conditions. Societal norms create limitations to how we can achieve legitimate goals in life. They also give goals that are unattainable for some people.

Groups provide both the motives and the knowledge necessary to commit crime. Differential association theory states that deviance is learned through interaction with others. This theory may help explain how and why people rationalize deviant behavior, especially in white-collar crimes committed by middle- and upper-class people.

 

 

Self Test

75

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Some individuals choose a life of deviance because of the satisfaction they derive from the act and deviant lifestyle.

a. True b. False

2. Which of the following statements best describes interactionist perspective(s) on deviance?

a. Deviance is relative to a given group of people or society. b. Deviance is relatively consistent across groups and society. c. What it means to be deviant is constructed through a process of indexicality and reflexivity. d. both a and c

3. According to labeling theory, a primary act of deviance does not always lead to a secondary act of deviance.

a. true b. false

4. According to Edwin Lemert, how is society involved in the deviance process?

a. during primary deviance, when society makes deviance symbolic in nature b. during secondary deviance, when society labels a person as deviant c. during the process of hiring police personnel to put away criminals d. during the process of committing the deviant act and accepting the deviant label

5. Which of the following is true of William Chambliss’ research on the Saints and the Roughnecks?

a. The Saints committed significantly less crime than the Roughnecks but were more likely to get caught. b. The Saints committed significantly less crime than the Roughnecks but only the Roughnecks got caught. c. The Saints committed somewhat higher levels of deviance as the Roughnecks but the Roughnecks were more likely to be caught than the Saints. d. The Roughnecks committed less crime and were rarely caught.

 

 

Self Test

76

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. How did Howard Becker’s research contribute to the understanding of deviance?

a. It showed the important role of deviant subcultures in the maintenance of deviant identities. b. It reinforced the relationship between primary and secondary deviance. c. He showed that even drug experiences can be influenced by social conditions. d. All of the above.

 

 

Answer Keys

77

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Anomie: A sense of “normlessness” where there is little consensus about what is right and what is wrong.

Attachment: Component of social control theory referring to emotional bonds with other people in society.

Belief: Component of social control theory referring to people’s respect for law and order in society.

Covering: Keeping a known stigma from creating tensions in interaction by downplaying it.

Deviance: Any behavior that departs from accepted practices in a society or group.

Indexicality: The process by which individuals index thoughts, feelings and behaviors from their own perspective.

Labeling theory: Theory that argues deviance is a consequence of a social process in which a negative characteristic becomes an element of an individual’s identity.

Mores: Widely held values and beliefs in a society.

Reflexivity: The process by which individuals think about a behavior within its social context and give meaning to it.

Social control theory: Theory that deviance results when individuals’ bonds with conventional society are weakened in some way.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

78

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. a

2. d

3. a

4. b

5. c

6. d

 

 

Notes

79

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

80

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Eight Mental Health and Illness

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Determine what it means to be mentally healthy.

2. Interpret how the definition of mental illness is constructed.

3. List the structural conditions in society that contribute to distress.

4. Identify resources that can buffer stress.

5. Assess how mental health can influence our sense of identity and interactions with others.

• Read pages 221-246 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

81

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter examines mental health as an outcome of social life, influenced by social conditions and as a status characteristic that impacts our social interactions.

Once you read the sociological perspectives on mental health and illness, you may rethink what it means to have psychological problems.

 

 

Key Terms

82

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Ambient hazards:

Chronic strains:

Colonization:

Intransigence:

Malaise:

Moderators:

Negative life events:

Sociology of mental health:

Total institutions:

Withdrawal:

 

 

Summary

83

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The history of madness and civilization shows that the meaning and treatment of mental illness has changed dramatically over the centuries. In Europe, into the seventeenth century, mental illness was considered similar to other forms of deviance such as criminality.

Sociologists view many manifestations of mental illness to be the result of social conditions that tax individuals’ capacity to manage their lives. The stress process model helps us understand the relationship of negative life events and chronic strains to our mental health and well-being, focusing also on the resources we use to manage those stressors.

Social and economic characteristics are associated with different levels of distress, with social class status a critical factor in the stress process. Other important social characteristics that are implicated in the experience of stressors, the level of resources, and the expressions of distress include gender, age and race/ethnicity.

According to the group processes perspective, people set up different expectations for individuals’ performance depending on their status characteristics. Mental illness may be considered a diffuse status characteristic that influences members’ expectations of the mentally ill in a group setting, as well as the contributions made by those members.

Mental illness may be a form of stigma for individuals, an attribute that is deeply discrediting. Patients housed in mental institutions may try to cope in many different ways, including conversion, intransigence and forms of withdrawal and colonization.

 

 

Self Test

84

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Why was 1656 an important date in the history of mental illness according to Michel Foucault?

a. It is the year that psycho-tropic drugs started becoming widely available in Europe. b. It is the year that the “hospital general” opened, marking the beginning of the great confinement of mentally ill people. c. It is the first year in which psychoanalysis was used to treat mentally ill people. d. It was the first year that psychotropic drugs were introduced to the new world.

2. Which of the following forces are associated with putting aspects of social life, including mental illness, under the boundaries of medical professionals?

a. the power and authority of medical professionals b. activities of social movements and interest groups c. directed organization on professional activities d. All of the above are forces affecting medicalization.

3. Which social theorist argued that mental illness is a “myth?”

a. Peter Conrad b. Michel Foucault c. Thomas Szaz d. Herbert Blumer

4. Horwitz and Wakefield’s research focused on trends to increasingly diagnose individuals with clinical depression as the “loss of sadness” in society.

a. True b. False

5. What kind of stressors do college students typically report?

a. adjustment problems b. death of a loved one c. job loss d. fear of professors

 

 

Self Test

85

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Which of the following is NOT a measurement of someone’s depression levels?

a. I did not feel like eating. b. I felt depressed. c. I felt everything was an effort. d. All of the above are measures of depression.

 

 

Answer Keys

86

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Ambient hazards: Exposure to poor community conditions such as crime, poor living conditions and lack of services.

Chronic strains: Day-to-day role strains that may cause mental health problems over time by the accumulation of small amounts of stress.

Colonization: A way in which patients manage institutionalization by showing that their institution is a desirable place to live.

Intransigence: A way in which patients manage institutionalization by rebelling against the staff expectations.

Malaise: A psychological state of unhappiness associated with living conditions in rural or urban areas.

Moderators: Part of the stress process that includes the personal and social resources that affect the direction or strength of the relationship between a stressor and mental health.

Negative life events: Part of the stress process referring to any event deemed unwanted or stressful to an individual.

Sociology of mental health: The study of the social arrangements that affect mental illness and its consequences.

Total institutions: Places where individuals are isolated from the rest of society.

Withdrawal: A way of managing life in an institution involving the curtailing of interaction with others.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

87

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. b

2. d

3. c

4. a

5. a

6. d

 

 

Notes

88

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

89

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Nine Attitudes, Values, and Behaviors

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Identify the nature of an attitude.

2. Evaluate how researchers study attitudes and behaviors.

3. Describe how people construct attitudes.

4. Analyze how attitudes toward other people form in group contexts.

• Read pages 247-276 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

90

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to review the definition and measurement of attitudes and values and to examine research on how people use their time. Specific emphasis is given to prejudicial attitudes and behavior.

In this chapter, after discussing how attitudes are conceptualized, three areas of study within sociological social psychology will be emphasized. First, we will examine how attitudes are constructed from an interactionist perspective. Second, we will examine how attitudes vary by social location. Finally, we will apply the group processes perspective on attitudes, particularly related to attitudes toward other people in groups.

 

 

Key Terms

91

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Altruism:

Attitude:

In-groups:

Opinion:

Prejudice:

Prosocial behavior:

Social distance:

Status construction theory:

Time deepening:

Values and beliefs:

 

 

Summary

92

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Attitudes incorporate emotional, cognitive and behavioral dimensions—how we feel, think and act toward an object. Attitudes are measured in terms of their direction and strength, though people can also have nonattitudes toward objects. Time-use studies measure behaviors and can be characterized as either productive time, such as work and family care, or free time, including activities such as watching television or socializing.

The relationship between attitudes and behavior, on average, is typically small with an average correlation of 0.38. The weak relationship between attitudes and behavior—and of attitudes with other attitudes—may reflect poor measurement of attitudes or the complexities of attitudes themselves. Interactionist perspectives view attitudes like any other aspect of social life: they are constructed based on our interactions with other people. Our group memberships can have a large influence in our attitudes toward people in other groups based on the relative standing of those groups.

Some attitudes and opinions have been found to vary based on social statuses. Men and women regularly report different attitudes toward some social issues, as do African Americans and whites. Many attitudes toward major social issues have changed over the last half century, indicating that newer cohorts have different values than earlier generations.

Status construction theory posits that individuals develop status value through face-to-face interaction as well as from larger societal prejudices. Social identity theory emphasizes the role of in-groups and out-groups in our attitude development.

 

 

Self Test

93

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Your evaluation of a new political candidate may best be described as a(n) _____________ while your overall political ideology may better be described as a(n) _____________.

a. ideology; value b. value; attitude c. attitude; value d. both refer to attitudes

2. In a recent poll, Darnell told the interviewer that he does not care either way in the election. His response reflects what concept?

a. ideology b. values c. attitudes d. nonattitudes

3. Melissa had planned to play 18 holes of golf on the weekend but decided to cut it down to nine holes so that she could go to lunch with her boyfriend. What kind of behavior is she engaging in?

a. time deepening b. time management c. stress processing d. bureaucratic management

4. Americans have more productive time than free time.

a. true b. false

5. The relationship between our attitudes and behavior is typically ____________.

a. strong b. small c. 1 in average correlation d. 0 in average correlation

 

 

Self Test

94

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Research generally shows that American attitudes on most major social issues have been pretty stable over the last 30 years.

a. true b. false

 

 

Answer Keys

95

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Altruism: Refers to the motivation to help another person.

Attitude: A positive or negative evaluation of an object, a person, a group or an idea.

In-groups: Groups with whom we identify.

Opinion: The cognitive or “thinking” aspect of an attitude.

Prejudice: An attitude of dislike or active hostility toward a particular group in society.

Prosocial behavior: Includes any behavior that benefits another person.

Social distance: How close we feel to other people.

Status construction theory: Group processes theory that posits that individuals develop status value in face-to-face interactions with other people.

Time deepening: When people do more with the time that they have available to them.

Values and beliefs: Strongly held, relatively stable sets of attitudes.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

96

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. d

3. a

4. a

5. b

6. b

 

 

Notes

97

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 3 Examination Instructions

98

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Three Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

99

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Most college students represent which type of person in Merton’s typology of deviance?

a. conformists b. innovators c. ritualists d. retreatists

2. A homeless person who decides to live in the woods is probably best represented by which of the following people using Merton’s typology of deviance?

a. conformists b. innovators c. ritualists d. retreatists

3. Which of the following represent strain according to new interpretations of strain theory?

a. negative relationships with family and friends b. poverty c. unemployment d. All of the above.

4. Which theory of deviance tries to explain why individuals do not commit crime?

a. labeling theory b. strain theory c. social control theory d. theory of differential association

5. Sampson and Laub’s research on delinquent and non-delinquent youths in Boston found delinquency was greater when bonds with which social institutions were weakest?

a. family b. education c. work d. both a and c

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

100

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. In high school, Janet rarely got involved in smoking or drinking. In college, Janet found some friends who spent most of their off time consuming large amounts of alcohol and other drugs. Soon, she did the same and did not know anyone who did not spend their time that way. Which theory best explains Janet’s behavior given this limited amount of information?

a. labeling theory b. strain theory c. social control theory d. theory of differential association

7. Which of the following best exemplifies white collar crimes?

a. stealing a purse b. simple assault c. telling a lie to your friend d. embezzling from work

8. Murder would most likely be considered the breaking of a ________________ while picking your nose in public would be breaking a ________________.

a. more; folkway b. folkway; more c. norm; value d. both are mores

9. Scholars contend that ______________ and _______________ are two factors that affect the likelihood of committing a crime.

a. controls; formal sanctions b. certainty; severity c. certainty; informal sanctions d. severity; formal sanctions

10. Given the research on the epidemiology of mental health, which group is most likely to report problems with drinking? Depression?

a. married people; singles b. African-Americans; Latinos c. African-Americans; Whites d. men; women

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

101

PSY 228 Social Psychology

11. The stresses associated with living in urban areas come from _____________ while the stresses associated with rural areas tend to be a result of _____________.

a. lack of stimulation; ambient hazards b. ambient hazards; lack of stimulation c. urban malaise; rural malaise d. negative life events; chronic stresses

12. How do group processes scholars examine the concept of mental illness?

a. It is viewed as a status characteristic like race or gender. b. It is viewed as a normal part of group interactions. c. It is viewed as a major area of group research. d. It is viewed as a way for individuals in groups to negotiate identity.

13. Which of the following would be considered a total institution?

a. your college b. a police station c. a prison d. a family household

14. Which sociologist is most associated with the concept of stigma?

a. Erving Goffman b. Georg Simmel c. George Herbert Mead d. Herbert Blumer

15. Goffman’s research on total institutions showed that many patients in insane asylums generally ____________ their roles as patients.

a. resist b. accept c. use colonization to cope with d. None of the above.

16. Which of the following coping strategies emphasize patients’ attempts to rebel against asylum staff?

a. conversion b. intransigence c. withdrawal d. colonization

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

102

PSY 228 Social Psychology

17. The loss of a job is represented in which component of the stress process?

a. stressors b. outcomes c. mediators and moderators d. social and economic characteristics

18. LaPiere’s study of prejudice clearly showed that most people _____________.

a. have some prejudice b. act on their prejudices c. do not act on their prejudices d. both a and c

19. Overall, American political attitudes lean on being ______________.

a. very conservative b. moderately conservative c. moderately liberal d. very liberal

20. Which of the following groups could be identified as most liberal in the U.S.?

a. females living in the Midwest b. females living on the West Coast c. males living in the Midwest d. males living on the West Coast

21. Which of the following groups spend the most time on childcare? Which group has shown an increase in time spent with childcare?

a. women for both questions b. men for both questions c. men; women d. women; men

22. Which of the following social theorists is most associated with studying racial prejudice in the United States?

a. George Herbert Mead b. W.E.B. Du Bois c. Talcott Parsons d. William Thomas

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

103

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. Based on status construction theory, what would be the best way to get what you want out of a group and leave a positive impression?

a. Act like a very nice person. b. Act like a generous person. c. Act like a majority member of society. d. Act like a high-status person.

24. Willer’s research showing presidential approval ratings increasing after the 9/11 terrorist attacks in the U.S. clearly showed ____________.

a. in-group bias tendencies b. out-group bias tendencies c. prejudicial biases d. ideological alliances

25. The slow treatment of Hurricane Katrina victims was used as an example of ____________ in your text.

a. government inefficiency b. conscious racism c. unconscious racism d. None of the above.

 

 

Unit 3 Examination

104

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Three

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. How do symbolic interactionists examine the social construction of mental health? Specifically, review Foucault’s historical analysis of mental illness in western cultures and the medicalization of deviance.

2. Discuss how community conditions can impact individuals’ mental health. Be specific about the role of stressors and resources available under different community conditions (e.g., urban vs. rural; poor vs. middle class).

3. Review the different dimensions of attitudes. How does the complexity in attitudes help to explain the relatively weak relationship between a person’s attitudes and their behaviors?

 

 

You Can Do It

105

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 3 is done! You’re close to the finish line and we’re cheering you on to victory!

 

 

Objectives

106

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Ten The Sociology of Sentiment and Emotion

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Distinguish the components of emotions.

2. Determine how people learn emotions.

3. Consider how identity relates to emotions.

4. Evaluate how our statuses in society affect our uses of emotions.

5. Interpret the norms that govern the use of emotions in different social settings.

6. Predict how group settings affect emotions.

• Read pages 277-306 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

107

PSY 228 Social Psychology

This chapter reviews the many dimensions of sentiment and emotions. It also examines the role of emotions in the development and maintenance of society, as well as the impact of society and culture on the development and expression of emotions.

This chapter will start by reviewing how sociologists study the upward movement of emotions in the creation of society and the social construction of emotions more generally. It will also review the structured nature of emotions and how society shapes the scope and expression of emotions.

 

 

Key Terms

108

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect:

Cybernetic approach:

Distributive justice:

Edgework:

Emotional cues:

Emotional intelligence:

Emotional scripts:

Emotions:

Interaction ritual:

Mood:

Potency:

Procedure justice:

Sentiment:

Transient sentiments:

 

 

Summary

109

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Sociological perspectives on emotion emphasize the cybernetic approach to the study of emotions: emotions radiate upward from individual-level interactions to maintain social structures as well as downward when social structure helps to shape our emotions.

Symbolic interactionists believe we learn emotions like we learn about other aspects of social life: through interaction with other people. The sociocentric model of emotional socialization argues that the primary means of learning about emotions comes from social instruction, whereas affect control theory argues that people use emotions as signals as to how well they are performing their role in a given situation.

People use emotional scripts and cues to help use and manage emotions in day-to-day life. The theory of interaction ritual chains emphasizes the role of emotions in maintaining macrosociological social institutions.

The power-status approach to emotions says that emotions result from real, anticipated, imagined or recollected outcomes of social interactions. The gain or loss of power and status are primary ways in which our position affects our emotional life.

The norms that govern our emotional lives are called feeling rules. We may receive “rule reminders” from friends and family when we do not “feel” appropriately. Emotion work refers to the generation of prescribed emotion to meet the demands of a job. The commodification of emotions is associated with the concept of “McDonaldization.”

The socioemotional economy is a system for regulating emotional resources among people that links individuals into larger networks of people. Sympathy is an important example of this economy. Emotion culture refers to a society’s expectation about how to experience different emotions. According to the group processes perspective, there are at least two ways in which exchange processes may affect your emotions: the concern over getting what is fair out of the group and the way in which distributions are made in a group. Emotions can also affect status relationships in group exchanges such that higher-status people are freer to express certain emotions than lower status people.

 

 

Self Test

110

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. Based on Thoit’s treatment of emotions, which of the following is NOT a dimension of emotion?

a. situational cues b. physiological changes c. an arousal d. an emotion label

2. The moment that society gives meaning to an emotion it becomes a _____________.

a. sentiment b. feeling c. mood d. affect

3. Clem has been feeling sad all day long. What term best describes his emotional state?

a. sentiment b. feeling c. mood d. affect

4. Which of the following would be considered a primary emotion?

a. anger b. fear c. depression d. All of the above are primary emotions.

5. Non-verbal behaviors play a lesser role than verbal communication does.

a. True b. False

6. The meanings of emotions are stable over a life course.

a. True b. False

 

 

Self Test

111

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Answer Keys

112

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Affect: An evaluative component of an emotion.

Cybernetic approach: The study of emotion that assumes that social conditions shape our emotions; and in turn, our emotions act to maintain social structures.

Distributive justice: In exchange theory, it is the belief about the fairness of what people get.

Edgework: Thrill-seeking behaviors designed to produce intense emotions.

Emotional cues: Information about when and what emotions are appropriate in a given social setting.

Emotional intelligence: Our ability to control and employ emotions in our social environments.

Emotional scripts: Expectations about when and how to act excited, angry, sad and so on.

Emotions: Feelings that incorporate situational cures, physiological changes, expressive gestures and an emotion label.

Interaction ritual: The exchange of symbols and emotion between individuals essential to maintaining society.

Mood: A diffuse emotional state that lasts a relatively long period of time.

Potency: Element of affect control theory referring to how a person’s sentiment toward an object is powerful or powerless.

Procedure justice: In exchange theory, it is the beliefs about the fairness of the methods used to make distributions.

Sentiment: A feeling that has been given meaning by society.

Transient sentiments: Sentiments unique to specific interactions.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

113

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. a

3. c

4. d

5. b

6. b

 

 

Notes

114

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Objectives

115

Instructions to Students

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Chapter Eleven Collective Behavior

Learning Objectives

Upon successful completion of this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Analyze how crowds contribute to the development of mass hysteria.

2. Identify theories that explain individuals’ behavior in large groups.

3. Decide whether structural conditions affect crowd behaviors.

4. Chart the phases of collective behavior found in large social movements.

5. Evaluate how group and individual motivations interact in social movements.

• Read pages 307-336 of your textbook

• Reference: Social Psychology: Sociological Perspectives by Rohall, Milkie and Lucas, 2nd edition, 2011

 

 

Overview

116

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The goal of this chapter is to review theories of collective behavior and the current research on behaviors that occur during collective events.

This chapter will review theories and research related to the concepts of collective behavior, collective action and social movements.

 

 

Key Terms

117

The key terms listed below are terms with which you should be familiar. Write your definition below each item. Check your answers at the end of this chapter.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Acting crowds:

Collective identity:

Craze:

Expressive crowd:

Hostile outbursts:

Mass:

Milling:

Routine dispersal:

Social dilemma:

Structural strain:

 

 

Summary

118

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Traditional theories of collective behavior, collective action and social movements emphasize the ways in which crowds transform the individuals acting in them, turning them into irrational beings. Rational choice perspectives on collective action emphasize the idea that people in groups are purposive in their decisions and actions in everyday life, including group events.

Research on protests in the United States over the last decades has shown that most protests and marches are small in nature. Very few marches go over 100,000 participants and very few involve civil disobedience. However, only the largest protests receive much media attention.

Sociological social psychologists also study how we develop collective memories, examining the conditions that produce spontaneous thoughts or feelings at the same time; how conditions coalesce to bring us to believe something is true; what an event means to a people; and, finally, how we categorize those memories with other historical events.

Research evidence in the group processes tradition indicates that people will be likely to form coalitions when they are faced with large power disparities. The free-rider problem and social dilemmas are typical problems found in behavior within and between groups.

 

 

Self Test

119

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. The March for Life protest against abortion is probably best described as a ______________.

a. social action b. collective action c. social movement d. collective movement

2. Gustave LeBon’s book, The Crowd, is based on observations of which of the following events?

a. the Russian Revolution b. The French Revolution c. WWII d. the Chinese Revolution

3. Which theorist is most associated with mass hysteria theory?

a. Carl Couch b. Herbert Blumer c. Neil Smelser d. Gustave LeBon

4. According to Blumer’s theory of circular reaction, when do individuals in crowds start to lose control and act without much rationality?

a. during the milling phase when individuals are encouraged to act out against authorities b. during the interpretation phase when individuals are encouraged to act out against authorities c. during the interpretation phase when individuals lose their ability to communicate about appropriate behavior d. during the milling phase when individuals lose their ability to communicate about appropriate behavior

5. Research on crowd and protest behaviors has generally supported LeBon and other scholars from the mass hysteria tradition.

a. true b. false

 

 

Self Test

120

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Guilford went to a protest against the school’s smoking policy because he truly believed that it was wrong and should be changed. He had been a leader in the anti-smoking group for a number of years prior to the march. According to Turner and Killian, which kind of participant is he?

a. ego-involved participant b. concerned participant c. insecure participant d. curiosity seeker

 

 

Answer Keys

121

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Acting crowds: Groups of people with a focus,or goal who act with unity to achieve the goal.

Collective identity: An individual’s sense of connection with a larger community or group.

Craze: When large numbers of people become obsessed with something like the purchase of a product or an activity.

Expressive crowd: Crowd that lacks a goal and is primarily a setting for emotional release, which often occurs through rhythmical actions such as applause, dancing or singing.

Hostile outbursts: Any type of mass violence or killings.

Mass: Anonymous individuals from many social strata that are loosely organized.

Milling: Part of the circular reaction process in which individuals at an event anxiously move about in a seemingly aimless and random fashion.

Routine dispersal: A dispersal in which participants leave a gathering in a rational, orderly fashion.

Social dilemma: A situation whereby if every person acts in his or her own best interests, the results will be bad for the group.

Structural strain: Element of value-added theory stating there must be some level of conflict over some issue or problem to initiate collective action.

 

 

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

122

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. b

3. d

4. c

5. b

6. a

 

 

Notes

123

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 4 Examination Instructions

124

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Four Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

125

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Which of the following jobs is most likely to have an extensive set of feeling rules?

a. a stay-at-home mother b. a cashier at McDonalds c. a plumber d. a farmer

2. Zurcher’s concept of emotional scripts most closely resembles what other concept reviewed in this chapter?

a. emotion rules b. emotional energy c. feeling rules d. sentiment

3. Milan was a little perturbed when his boss refused to accept some flowers he had brought as a sign of his sadness over the loss of her sister. Which sympathy rule did his boss break?

a. Do not make false claims of sympathy. b. Do not claim too much sympathy. c. Claim some sympathy. d. Reciprocate to other for their gift of sympathy.

4. Based on Lofland’s analysis of the role of culture in the expression of grief in society, which of the following places would have the hardest time coping with the loss of a child?

a. modern day Asia b. modern day Europe c. modern day Ethiopia d. modern day America

5. Swidler’s research on love in American culture revealed what?

a. Americans find it hard to fall in love. b. Americans initiate relationships based on a mythical view of emotional bonding between lovers. c. Americans use a more realistic view of love to sustain relationships on a day-to-day basis. d. both b and c

 

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

126

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. According to exchange theory and research, which of the following situations is most likely to produce a positive emotion?

a. an exchange in which people get the amount equal to their position in the group b. an exchange in which you get as much as you gave c. an exchange in which you get less than you gave d. All of these exchanges will produce a positive emotion.

7. According to the exchange theory, what sentiment is EXPECTED when you get more out of an exchange than you give?

a. sadness b. guilt c. happiness d. joy

8. According to research and theory of group processes, how does power in relationships affect our emotions?

a. Relationships characterized as having equal power engender positive emotion. b. Power makes us feel guilty in social exchanges. c. Relationships characterized as having unequal power engender positive emotion. d. Power gives us a positive feeling only when we deserve it during social exchanges.

9. Secondary emotions are ________________.

a. learned through socialization b. similar to sentiments c. social emotions d. All the above.

10. Your feeling that a district attorney has a lot of power refer to which dimension of affect control theory?

a. evaluation b. potency c. activity d. strength

11. What emotion did wheelchair users employ when managing interactions with “stand-up” people in Cahill and Eggleston’s study of people with a handicap?

a. fear b. humor c. love d. anger

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

127

PSY 228 Social Psychology

12. Your friend, Chloe, goes through a bad break-up and her cat runs away all in the same week. When you and Chloe are out to dinner one night you run into Sarah, a good friend of yours from school. Chloe expresses the tragedies that have befallen her the past week to Sarah who proceeds to listen and then changes the conversation. Once back to your dinner, Chloe expresses her dismay and hurt that Sarah did not seem concerned about her break-up or loss of her cat. Sarah is upset because her ______________ were not met.

a. social scripts b. emotional scripts c. sentiments d. emotions

13. According to Randall Collins’ theory of interaction ritual chains, what role does emotion play in the maintenance of society?

a. Emotional energies provide the reason for maintaining interactions in society. b. Emotional scripts provide information about how to behave in society. c. Emotions give us cues as to whether we are performing our roles in society adequately. d. Emotions exist within a series of “feeling rules” about how to behave in society.

14. Which of the following jobs does NOT demand high levels of emotion work.

a. waitress b. teacher c. customer service agent d. None of the above.

15. Steve turned to the people around him for help in deciding how to act at a local protest. According to perception control theory, what form of perception control is he using?

a. independent instruction b. interdependent instruction c. organizational instruction d. interactional instruction

16. What is the best predictor of an individual participating in a march or a riot?

a. her structural position b. her concern over a social condition in society c. her being asked to go to the event d. her access to resources

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

128

PSY 228 Social Psychology

17. The vast majority of protests and other collective events have which kind of dispersal?

a. routine dispersal b. emergency dispersal c. coerced dispersal d. active dispersal

18. Which of the following are typical behaviors at a large protest march?

a. People break off into a series of smaller groups. b. People form lines to access various facilities. c. People develop arcs and circles around speakers. d. All of the above are typical behaviors.

19. ____________ is thrill-seeking behaviors designed to produce intense emotions.

a. Potency b. Edgework c. Cyberneticism d. None of the above.

20. Enduring emotional meanings in a given society is known as _____________.

a. fundamental sentiments b. transient sentiments c. emotional cues d. emotion work

21. The debate as to whether or not you should stop and look at an accident while driving by, possibly slowing down the traffic behind you, is an example of a ______________.

a. social dilemma b. free rider problem c. group conformity d. mass hysteria

22. Public radio—radio stations that rely, in part, on listener support to stay in business—run the risk of what problem?

a. a social dilemma b. the free rider problem c. group conformity d. mass hysteria

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

129

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. The use of _______________ is important to the forming of collective memories.

a. storytelling b. collective behavior c. collective emotion d. framing

24. According to emergent norm theory, the _______________ is the type of person who participates in the group out of curiosity.

a. ego-involved participant b. curiosity seeker c. concerned participant d. insecure participant

25. Phase of collective behavior referring to the factors that bring people together into the same place at the same time.

a. gathering phase b. homogeneity of mood c. assembling phase d. interpretive phase

 

 

Unit 4 Examination

130

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Four

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. Review the theory of interaction ritual chains. How do our emotions contribute to the maintenance of society according to this theory?

2. Review the role of emotions in exchange processes. What conditions are most likely to produce positive emotions? Negative emotions? What role does power and status play in the development of emotions in exchange relationships?

3. Apply group processes theory and research related to coalitions to explain the development of social movements more broadly. First, define the concept of coalition. Second, describe how coalitions work and the conditions that make them successful. Third, apply this information to explain how and why people initiate social movements in society.

 

 

You Can Do It

131

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Congratulations! You have completed Unit 4.

Now let’s sharpen our pencils for the Final Exam.

We are confident you will do well.

 

 

Final Examination Instructions

132

PSY 228 Social Psychology

About the Final Examination

After you have successfully completed all of the unit examinations and writing assignments, it will be time for you to take the final examination.

The final examination will be provided by student services only after you have completed all four unit examinations and submitted all four writing assignments.

Scheduling a Final Examination

Final examination requests can be submitted via U.S. mail, online through the Coast Connection student portal, or by calling the Testing Department at (714) 547-9625.

A final exam scheduling form is located on the last page of this study guide. Please fill out ALL required fields and mail it to the university.

If you would like to request a final exam online, log into the Coast Connection student portal and click on My Academic Plan. Select the course you are working on and submit the Final Exam Request form located at the bottom of the page. ALL INFORMATION MUST BE FILLED IN.

Final exams will only be sent if you have completed all four unit examinations and submitted all four writing assignments.

Submitting Your Final Examination

Final Examinations can be submitted by mail, fax or online through the Coast Connection student portal.

After you have completed your exam, you or your proctor can fax it to the Grading Department at (714) 547-1451 or mail it to the university. When faxing exams, please do not resize your fax.

For online submissions, once you have logged into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the final examination. You must input the unique password that was sent to your proctor in order to unlock your final examination questions. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

 

 

Final Exam Scheduling Form

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The university requires all final examinations to be completed under the supervision of a proctor. Please provide information on your designated proctor. ALL information must be filled in; otherwise, your request will not be processed.

Date _____________________________ Student I.D. ______________________________________________

Student Name ________________________________________________________________________________

Address ______________________________________________________________________________________

City __________________________________________________ State _________________________________

Zip Code ________________ Country ____________________________________________________________

E-Mail Address _______________________________________________________________________________

Daytime Telephone _____________________________ Evening Telephone _____________________________

Course Information:

Course Number ___________ Course Title _______________________________________________________

Please send the Final Examination to:

Proctor’s Name _______________________________________________________________________________

Proctor’s Relationship to Student ________________________________________________________________

Street Address _______________________________________________________________________

City ______________________________ State _________________ Zip Code __________________________

Country __________________________________ Email Address ___________________________

Daytime Telephone _________________________ Evening Telephone _________________________________

Student’s Signature ________________________________________________________________________

133

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Traditional theories of collective behavior, collective action and social movements emphasize the ways in which crowds transform the individuals acting in them, turning them into irrational beings. Rational choice perspectives on collective action emphasize the idea that people in groups are purposive in their decisions and actions in everyday life, including group events.

Research on protests in the United States over the last decades has shown that most protests and marches are small in nature. Very few marches go over 100,000 participants and very few involve civil disobedience. However, only the largest protests receive much media attention.

Sociological social psychologists also study how we develop collective memories, examining the conditions that produce spontaneous thoughts or feelings at the same time; how conditions coalesce to bring us to believe something is true; what an event means to a people; and, finally, how we categorize those memories with other historical events.

Research evidence in the group processes tradition indicates that people will be likely to form coalitions when they are faced with large power disparities. The free-rider problem and social dilemmas are typical problems found in behavior within and between groups.

Self Test

119

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Circle the correct answer)

1. The March for Life protest against abortion is probably best described as a ______________.

a. social action b. collective action c. social movement d. collective movement

2. Gustave LeBon’s book, The Crowd, is based on observations of which of the following events?

a. the Russian Revolution b. The French Revolution c. WWII d. the Chinese Revolution

3. Which theorist is most associated with mass hysteria theory?

a. Carl Couch b. Herbert Blumer c. Neil Smelser d. Gustave LeBon

4. According to Blumer’s theory of circular reaction, when do individuals in crowds start to lose control and act without much rationality?

a. during the milling phase when individuals are encouraged to act out against authorities b. during the interpretation phase when individuals are encouraged to act out against authorities c. during the interpretation phase when individuals lose their ability to communicate about appropriate behavior d. during the milling phase when individuals lose their ability to communicate about appropriate behavior

5. Research on crowd and protest behaviors has generally supported LeBon and other scholars from the mass hysteria tradition.

a. true b. false

Self Test

120

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. Guilford went to a protest against the school’s smoking policy because he truly believed that it was wrong and should be changed. He had been a leader in the anti-smoking group for a number of years prior to the march. According to Turner and Killian, which kind of participant is he?

a. ego-involved participant b. concerned participant c. insecure participant d. curiosity seeker

Answer Keys

121

Key Term Definitions

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Acting crowds: Groups of people with a focus,or goal who act with unity to achieve the goal.

Collective identity: An individual’s sense of connection with a larger community or group.

Craze: When large numbers of people become obsessed with something like the purchase of a product or an activity.

Expressive crowd: Crowd that lacks a goal and is primarily a setting for emotional release, which often occurs through rhythmical actions such as applause, dancing or singing.

Hostile outbursts: Any type of mass violence or killings.

Mass: Anonymous individuals from many social strata that are loosely organized.

Milling: Part of the circular reaction process in which individuals at an event anxiously move about in a seemingly aimless and random fashion.

Routine dispersal: A dispersal in which participants leave a gathering in a rational, orderly fashion.

Social dilemma: A situation whereby if every person acts in his or her own best interests, the results will be bad for the group.

Structural strain: Element of value-added theory stating there must be some level of conflict over some issue or problem to initiate collective action.

Answers to Self Test

Answer Keys

122

PSY 228 Social Psychology

1. c

2. b

3. d

4. c

5. b

6. a

Notes

123

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 4 Examination Instructions

124

The Unit Examination

The unit examination contains 25 multiple choice questions, as well as a writing assignment.

Your grade on the examination will be determined by the percentage of correct answers. The university utilizes the following grading system:

A = 90% – 100% correct B = 80% – 89% correct C = 70% – 79% correct D = 60% – 69% correct F = 59% and below correct

4 grade points 3 grade points 2 grade points 1 grade point 0 grade points

Completing Unit Four Examination

Before beginning your examination, we recommend that you thoroughly review the textbook chapters and other materials covered in each unit and follow the suggestions in the mastering the course content section of the syllabus.

This unit examination consists of objective test questions as well as a comprehensive writing assignment selected to reflect the learning objectives identified in each chapter covered so far in your textbook.

Additional detailed information on completing the examination, writing standards and how to submit your completed examination may be found in the syllabus for this course.

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Unit 4 Examination

125

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Multiple Choice Questions (Enter your answers on the enclosed answer sheet)

1. Which of the following jobs is most likely to have an extensive set of feeling rules?

a. a stay-at-home mother b. a cashier at McDonalds c. a plumber d. a farmer

2. Zurcher’s concept of emotional scripts most closely resembles what other concept reviewed in this chapter?

a. emotion rules b. emotional energy c. feeling rules d. sentiment

3. Milan was a little perturbed when his boss refused to accept some flowers he had brought as a sign of his sadness over the loss of her sister. Which sympathy rule did his boss break?

a. Do not make false claims of sympathy. b. Do not claim too much sympathy. c. Claim some sympathy. d. Reciprocate to other for their gift of sympathy.

4. Based on Lofland’s analysis of the role of culture in the expression of grief in society, which of the following places would have the hardest time coping with the loss of a child?

a. modern day Asia b. modern day Europe c. modern day Ethiopia d. modern day America

5. Swidler’s research on love in American culture revealed what?

a. Americans find it hard to fall in love. b. Americans initiate relationships based on a mythical view of emotional bonding between lovers. c. Americans use a more realistic view of love to sustain relationships on a day-to-day basis. d. both b and c

Unit 4 Examination

126

PSY 228 Social Psychology

6. According to exchange theory and research, which of the following situations is most likely to produce a positive emotion?

a. an exchange in which people get the amount equal to their position in the group b. an exchange in which you get as much as you gave c. an exchange in which you get less than you gave d. All of these exchanges will produce a positive emotion.

7. According to the exchange theory, what sentiment is EXPECTED when you get more out of an exchange than you give?

a. sadness b. guilt c. happiness d. joy

8. According to research and theory of group processes, how does power in relationships affect our emotions?

a. Relationships characterized as having equal power engender positive emotion. b. Power makes us feel guilty in social exchanges. c. Relationships characterized as having unequal power engender positive emotion. d. Power gives us a positive feeling only when we deserve it during social exchanges.

9. Secondary emotions are ________________.

a. learned through socialization b. similar to sentiments c. social emotions d. All the above.

10. Your feeling that a district attorney has a lot of power refer to which dimension of affect control theory?

a. evaluation b. potency c. activity d. strength

11. What emotion did wheelchair users employ when managing interactions with “stand-up” people in Cahill and Eggleston’s study of people with a handicap?

a. fear b. humor c. love d. anger

Unit 4 Examination

127

PSY 228 Social Psychology

12. Your friend, Chloe, goes through a bad break-up and her cat runs away all in the same week. When you and Chloe are out to dinner one night you run into Sarah, a good friend of yours from school. Chloe expresses the tragedies that have befallen her the past week to Sarah who proceeds to listen and then changes the conversation. Once back to your dinner, Chloe expresses her dismay and hurt that Sarah did not seem concerned about her break-up or loss of her cat. Sarah is upset because her ______________ were not met.

a. social scripts b. emotional scripts c. sentiments d. emotions

13. According to Randall Collins’ theory of interaction ritual chains, what role does emotion play in the maintenance of society?

a. Emotional energies provide the reason for maintaining interactions in society. b. Emotional scripts provide information about how to behave in society. c. Emotions give us cues as to whether we are performing our roles in society adequately. d. Emotions exist within a series of “feeling rules” about how to behave in society.

14. Which of the following jobs does NOT demand high levels of emotion work.

a. waitress b. teacher c. customer service agent d. None of the above.

15. Steve turned to the people around him for help in deciding how to act at a local protest. According to perception control theory, what form of perception control is he using?

a. independent instruction b. interdependent instruction c. organizational instruction d. interactional instruction

16. What is the best predictor of an individual participating in a march or a riot?

a. her structural position b. her concern over a social condition in society c. her being asked to go to the event d. her access to resources

Unit 4 Examination

128

PSY 228 Social Psychology

17. The vast majority of protests and other collective events have which kind of dispersal?

a. routine dispersal b. emergency dispersal c. coerced dispersal d. active dispersal

18. Which of the following are typical behaviors at a large protest march?

a. People break off into a series of smaller groups. b. People form lines to access various facilities. c. People develop arcs and circles around speakers. d. All of the above are typical behaviors.

19. ____________ is thrill-seeking behaviors designed to produce intense emotions.

a. Potency b. Edgework c. Cyberneticism d. None of the above.

20. Enduring emotional meanings in a given society is known as _____________.

a. fundamental sentiments b. transient sentiments c. emotional cues d. emotion work

21. The debate as to whether or not you should stop and look at an accident while driving by, possibly slowing down the traffic behind you, is an example of a ______________.

a. social dilemma b. free rider problem c. group conformity d. mass hysteria

22. Public radio—radio stations that rely, in part, on listener support to stay in business—run the risk of what problem?

a. a social dilemma b. the free rider problem c. group conformity d. mass hysteria

Unit 4 Examination

129

PSY 228 Social Psychology

23. The use of _______________ is important to the forming of collective memories.

a. storytelling b. collective behavior c. collective emotion d. framing

24. According to emergent norm theory, the _______________ is the type of person who participates in the group out of curiosity.

a. ego-involved participant b. curiosity seeker c. concerned participant d. insecure participant

25. Phase of collective behavior referring to the factors that bring people together into the same place at the same time.

a. gathering phase b. homogeneity of mood c. assembling phase d. interpretive phase

Unit 4 Examination

130

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Writing Assignment for Unit Four

• Responses must be submitted as a MS Word Document only, typed double-spaced, using a standard font (i.e. Times New Roman) and 12 point type size.

Word count is NOT one of the criteria that is used in assigning points to writing assignments. However, students who are successful in earning the maximum number of points tend to submit writing assignments that fall in the following ranges:

Undergraduate courses: 350 – 500 words or 1 – 2 pages. Graduate courses: 500 – 750 words or 2 – 3 pages. Doctoral courses: 750 – 1000 words or 4 – 5 pages.

Plagiarism

All work must be free of any form of plagiarism. Put written answers into your own words. Do not simply cut and paste your answers from the Internet and do not copy your answers from the textbook. Be sure to refer to the course syllabus for more details on plagiarism and proper citation styles.

Please answer ONE of the following:

• Include your name, student number, course number, course title and unit number on each page of your writing assignment (this is for your protection in case your materials become separated).

• Begin each writing assignment by identifying the question number you are answering followed by the actual question itself (in bold type).

• Use a standard essay format for responses to all questions (i.e., an introduction, middle paragraphs and conclusion).

1. Review the theory of interaction ritual chains. How do our emotions contribute to the maintenance of society according to this theory?

2. Review the role of emotions in exchange processes. What conditions are most likely to produce positive emotions? Negative emotions? What role does power and status play in the development of emotions in exchange relationships?

3. Apply group processes theory and research related to coalitions to explain the development of social movements more broadly. First, define the concept of coalition. Second, describe how coalitions work and the conditions that make them successful. Third, apply this information to explain how and why people initiate social movements in society.

You Can Do It

131

PSY 228 Social Psychology

Congratulations! You have completed Unit 4.

Now let’s sharpen our pencils for the Final Exam.

We are confident you will do well.

Final Examination Instructions

132

PSY 228 Social Psychology

About the Final Examination

After you have successfully completed all of the unit examinations and writing assignments, it will be time for you to take the final examination.

The final examination will be provided by student services only after you have completed all four unit examinations and submitted all four writing assignments.

Scheduling a Final Examination

Final examination requests can be submitted via U.S. mail, online through the Coast Connection student portal, or by calling the Testing Department at (714) 547-9625.

A final exam scheduling form is located on the last page of this study guide. Please fill out ALL required fields and mail it to the university.

If you would like to request a final exam online, log into the Coast Connection student portal and click on My Academic Plan. Select the course you are working on and submit the Final Exam Request form located at the bottom of the page. ALL INFORMATION MUST BE FILLED IN.

Final exams will only be sent if you have completed all four unit examinations and submitted all four writing assignments.

Submitting Your Final Examination

Final Examinations can be submitted by mail, fax or online through the Coast Connection student portal.

After you have completed your exam, you or your proctor can fax it to the Grading Department at (714) 547-1451 or mail it to the university. When faxing exams, please do not resize your fax.

For online submissions, once you have logged into the student portal, click on My Academic Plan and select the course you are working on to complete the final examination. You must input the unique password that was sent to your proctor in order to unlock your final examination questions. Remember to keep a copy of your answers for your own personal records.

Final Exam Scheduling Form

PSY 228 Social Psychology

The university requires all final examinations to be completed under the supervision of a proctor. Please provide information on your designated proctor. ALL information must be filled in; otherwise, your request will not be processed.

Date _____________________________ Student I.D. ______________________________________________

Student Name ________________________________________________________________________________

Address ______________________________________________________________________________________

City __________________________________________________ State _________________________________

Zip Code ________________ Country ____________________________________________________________

E-Mail Address _______________________________________________________________________________

Daytime Telephone _____________________________ Evening Telephone _____________________________

Course Information:

Course Number ___________ Course Title _______________________________________________________

Please send the Final Examination to:

Proctor’s Name _______________________________________________________________________________

Proctor’s Relationship to Student ________________________________________________________________

Street Address _______________________________________________________________________

City ______________________________ State _________________ Zip Code __________________________

Country __________________________________ Email Address ___________________________

Daytime Telephone _________________________ Evening Telephone _________________________________

Student’s Signature ________________________________________________________________________

133

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Qualitative Findings and Social Work Interventions

 Qualitative Findings and Social Work Interventions

Discussion 1: Qualitative Findings and Social Work Interventions

Evidence-based social work practice calls for the use of research data to guide the development of social work interventions on the micro, mezzo and/or macro-levels. Kearney (2001) described ways qualitative research findings can inform practice. Qualitative findings can help social workers understand the clients’ experiences and “what it may feel like” (Kearney, 2001). Therefore, social workers can develop clinical interventions that take into account the experiences of their clients. Qualitative findings can also help social workers monitor their clients. For example, if after reading a qualitative study on how domestic violence survivors respond to stress, they can monitor for specific stress behaviors and symptoms (Kearney, 2001). In addition, they can educate their client what stress behaviors to look for and teach them specific interventions to reduce stress (Kearney, 2001)

Given the increasing diversity that characterizes the landscape in the United States, social workers need to take into account culture when formulating interventions. Social workers can utilize qualitative findings to plan interventions in a culturally meaningful manner for the client.

To prepare for this Discussion, read Knight et al.’s (2014) study from this week’s required resources. Carefully review the findings, the photographs, and how the researchers wrote up the findings. Finally, review the specific macro-, meso-, and micro-oriented recommendations.

Then read Marsigilia and Booth’s article about how to adapt interventions so that they are culturally relevant and sensitive to the population the intervention is designed for. Finally, review the chapter written by Lee et al. on conducting research in racial and ethnic minority communities.

Kearney, M. (2001). Levels and applications of qualitative research evidence. Research in Nursing and Health, 24, 145–153.

Post the following:

1. Using one of the direct quotes and/or photos from Knight et al.’s study, analyze it by drawing up a tentative meaning. Discuss how this would specifically inform one intervention recommendation you would make for social work practice with the homeless. This recommendation can be on the micro, meso, or macro level.

2. Next, explain how you would adapt the above practice recommendation that you identified so that it is culturally sensitive and relevant for African Americans, Hispanics, or Asian immigrants. (Select only 1 group). Apply one of the cultural adaptations that Marsigilia and Booth reviewed (i.e., content adaption to include surface and/or deep culture, cognitive adaptations, affective-motivational adaptations, etc.)(pp. 424-426). Be as specific as you can, using citations to support your ideas.

References (use 3 or more)

Knight, K. R., Lopez, A. M., Comfort, M., Shumway, M., Cohen, J., & Riley, E. D. (2014). Single room occupancy (SRO) hotels as mental health risk environments among impoverished women: The intersection of policy, drug use, trauma, and urban space. International Journal of Drug Policy, 25(3), 556-561.

Document: Lee, M. Y, Wang, X., Cao, Y., Liu, C., & Zaharlick, A. (2016). Creating a culturally competent research agenda. In A. Carten, A. Siskind, & M. P. Greene (Eds.), Strategies for deconstructing racism in the health and human services (pp. 51-65). New York, NY: Oxford University Press. (PDF)

Copyright 2016 by Oxford University Press. Used with permission of Oxford University Press via the Copyright Clearance Center. 

Marsiglia, F.F. & Booth, J.M. (2015). Cultural adaptations of interventions in real practice settings. Research on Social Work Practice, 25(4), 423-432.

Note: Retrieved from the Walden Library databases.

Vaismoradi, M., Turunen, H., & Bondas, T. (2013). Content analysis and thematic analysis: Implications for conducting a qualitative descriptive study. Nursing & Health Sciences, 15(3), 398-405.

Discussion 2: Addressing Change

What does a leader do when things do not go as planned? How can a leader help to restore or improve an organization’s operations when a situation stalls or interferes with its functions? Although taking a proactive approach to planning is desired, change may occur suddenly and unexpectedly causing immediate consequences. A skilled leader must be able to assess a situation in order to prioritize the steps necessary to stabilize the organization. This process must focus on a short-term strategy to address immediate concerns and include strategic decisions that will affect the long-term sustainability of the organization.

For this Discussion, you address the Southeast Planning Group (SPG) case study in the Social Work Case Studies: Concentration Year text.

· Post an analysis of the change that took place in the SPG. 

· Furthermore, suggest one strategy that might improve the organizational climate and return the organization to optimal functioning. 

· Provide support for your suggested strategy, explaining why it would be effective.

References (use 3 or more)

Lauffer, A. (2011). Understanding your social agency (3rd ed.). Washington, DC: Sage.

Northouse, P. G. (2018). Introduction to leadership: Concepts and practice (4th ed.). Washington, DC: Sage.

Finley, D. S., Rogers, G., Napier, M., & Wyatt, J. (2011). From needs-based segmentation to program realignment: Transformation of YWCA of Calgary. Administration in Social Work, 35(3), 299–323.

Plummer, S.-B., Makris, S., & Brocksen, S. M. (Eds.). (2014b). Social work case studies: Concentration year. Baltimore, MD: Laureate International Universities Publishing [Vital Source e-reader].

“Social Work Supervision, Leadership, and Administration: The Southeast Planning Group” (pp. 85–86)

Working With Organizations: The Southeast Planning Group

The Southeast Planning Group (SPG) is an organization that was created in 2000 to facilitate the Office of Housing and Urban Development’s (HUD) Continuum of Care planning process. The key elements of the approach were strategic planning, data collection systems, and an inclusive process that involved clients and service providers. The fundamental components of the system are 1) outreach, intake, and assessment; 2) emergency shelter; 3) transitional housing; and 4) permanent housing and permanent supportive housing. The outreach, intake, and assessment component identifies an individual’s or family’s needs in order to connect them with the appropriate resources. Emergency shelter provides a safe alternative to living on the streets. Transitional housing provides supportive services such as recovery services and life skills training to help clients develop the skills necessary for permanent housing. The final component, permanent housing, works with clients to obtain long-term affordable housing.

SPG works with the local government; service providers; the faith, academic, and business communities; homeless and formerly homeless individuals; and concerned citizens in the designated service area. During the first 5 years of its existence, SPG was staffed by one part-time and four full-time staff members and oversight was provided by a 21-member board. SPG’s founding director was well respected and liked in the community. She was noted for her ability to bring stakeholders together across sectors and focus on the single mission of ending homelessness.

After serving 5 years as the executive director, she abruptly resigned amidst rumors that she was forced out by the board. Although she had been effective in bringing people together, there were concerns that the goals and objectives had not been met, and there was a lack of confidence in her ability to grow the organization. Approximately one month after her resignation, a new executive director was hired.

One of the new director’s first priorities was to reconfigure the structure of the organization in order to increase efficiency. As a result of the restructuring, two positions were eliminated. The people who were let go had been with the organization since it was created, and similar to the previous director, they had strong ties to the community. Once the community and SPG’s partners learned about the changes, there was suspicion about the new leadership and the direction they wanted to take the organization. Stakeholders were split in their views of the changes—some agreed that they were necessary in order to advance the goals of the organization, while others felt the new leadership was “taking over” with a hidden agenda to promote its own self-interest.

I worked with the group as an evaluation consultant to assess the SPG partnership during this period of transition. In order to assess how these changes were perceived by the stakeholders, I conducted key informant interviews with various stakeholders, both internal and external to the organization. The partners shared many insights about how the month without consistent leadership contributed to the uncertainty about SPG’s purpose and strategy, and it was generally agreed that the leadership transition was not handled well. The results from the evaluation were used to help SPG identify strategies to improve communication with stakeholders and utilize the director’s leadership role to build upon the organization’s past successes while preparing for future growth.

(Plummer 51-52)

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

The Groth Typology Of Rape And The Massachusetts Treatment Center’s Classification Systems Of Rapists.

The Groth Typology Of Rape And The Massachusetts Treatment Center’s Classification Systems Of Rapists.

RESPONSES:

1. According to the U.S Department of Justice Archives, the new definition of rape is: “The penetration, no matter how slight, of the vagina or anus with any body part or object, or oral penetration by a sex organ of another person, without the consent of the victim” (Sullivan, Rogers, & Moran, 2017). The Groth typology was developed almost forty years ago. This typology of rape is based on presumed motivations and aims that underline almost all rapes committed by adult males. Groth believed rape to be a “pseudo-sexual act”. He also believed that rape is a symptom of some psychological dysfunction, whether is temporary and transient or chronic and repetitive. Groth divided rape into three major categories. First, anger rape, second, power rape, and sadistic rape. He believed rape is always and foremost an aggressive act.

The Massachusetts Treatment Center’s Classification Systems of rapists has many similarities to Groth’s typology. The MTC has originally identified four major categories of rapists. One, displaced aggression, two, compensatory, three, sexually aggressive, and four, impulsive rapists. Anger rapists are similar to displaced aggression rapists, sadistic rapists are similar to sexual aggressive rapists. The MTC typology is more extensive and more complex because is based on ongoing research.

2.The Groth Typology was developed around forty years ago. Groth stated that there is always other motivations, rather than simple sexual arousal, for rapists. He divides rape into three different categories, including anger rape, power rape, and sadistic rape. Anger rape is typically brutal, degrading, and extremely forceful. Anger rapists have some internal anger, usually towards a specific woman, and take it out on their victims. Power rape is when the rapists is establishing dominance and control over their victim. The aggressiveness depends on how submissive the victim is. Victims of power rape are often kidnapped and experience multiple assaults. Sadistic rape involves the rapist experiencing arousal and pleasure of the victim’s torture and abuse.

Massachusetts Treatment Center’s Classification Systems of rapists is far more complex and researched than Groth’s. It continues to be researched and updated, unlike The Groth Typology. MTC also identifies four types of rapist, rather than three. The types include displaced aggression, compensatory, sexual aggressive, and impulse rapists. Although the two typologies are different, their division of types of rape are similar. Anger rape is similar to displaced aggression, sadistic rape is similar to sexual aggressive rape, and power rape is similar to compensatory rape. The final MTC type of rape is the impulse rape, in which rapists usually have no other history of sexual assault and committed it spontaneously when the opportunity was there. This type has no similarities with any of Groth’s types.

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Case Study Assignment

Case Study Assignment

Page 1

PSY105 CASE STUDY

Type Your Name Here

Introduction to Psychology
April 3, 2019

Given what you have learned in Chapter 3 about brain development and social development, explain why Gloria’s son is making poor decisions. (Use page 3.4 for brain development and page 3.6 for social development).

What specific strategies can Gloria use to help her son make better decisions? (Hint: pages 3.7 and 3.17 have resources to help)

From what you have learned about human development and self-regulation, why do you think these strategies will be effective?

(Hint – based on what you offered as a suggestion in question 2, why would that strategy help Gloria’s son)

How does Reggie’s mindset affect the way that he prepares for the compliance test? (Hint: page 7.6 will help you learn about mindset)

 

Use brain plasticity (neuroplasticity) to explain how Reggie can start to develop a growth mindset. What can Reggie do to actually change his brain so that he can adopt a growth mindset approach? (Hint: page 7.6 will be a great resource for this question)

Suggest at least three study strategies that Reggie can use to study for the compliance test. Based on what you have learned about memory in Chapter 4, explain why these would be effective study techniques. (Hint: page 4.15 has suggestions to improve your memory)

What are the big five personality traits? When thinking about the big five personality traits, on which ones do Gloria and Lakeisha differ the most? (Hint: page 3.12 helps you learn about the big five traits)

Give some advice to Gloria. How can she use emotional regulation to work more effectively with Lakeisha? Give at least two things that Gloria can do and provide a rationale for why these will be effective. (Hint: Pages 6.4 and 6.11 have resources to help with this question)

References

Myers, D. (2017). Psychology (4th ed.). Asheville, NC: Soomo Learning. Available from hMp://www.webtexts.com

Case Study Assignment Template Note: Please use this template to complete the Case Study Assignment (due in Week 7). All you need to do is write a paragraph within each box contained in the template to receive credit for this assignment.

 

View Help Videos

Case Study Assignment Overview

Case Study Section 1 Review

Case Study Section 2 Review

Case Study Section 3 Review

 

_________________

 

Gloria has recently graduated college and started a new job. Her coworkers seem very nice, and Gloria has gotten to know Lakeisha and Reggie the best.

Reggie is a friendly older man who often talks about his plans for retirement in five years. He likes to make people laugh but often jokes about his struggles to learn new programs and technology.

Gloria and Lakeisha have been assigned to work on a project together. Lakeisha is very organized and has prepared a list of to-do items along with due dates. She even color-coded the list to indicate which partner will do each item. Gloria, who is more laid-back, feels a bit uncomfortable with this micromanaging from Lakeisha, who has only been at the job a few months longer than she has. Gloria wonders if Lakeisha thinks she is either lazy or stupid, and she does not look forward to working on this project. In the past, Gloria attempted to communicate her feelings with a co-worker; however, her coworker told Gloria that she needed to put her feelings aside and just do the work assigned to her. As Gloria ponders having a conversation with Lakeisha, she starts to feel overwhelmed and thinks she might have to ask to be removed from this project.

Still, she and Lakeisha have connected because they are both single mothers of teenagers. Gloria confides in Lakeisha about her 16-year-old son who has started making poor choices and is currently grounded for sneaking out of the house and getting drunk at a party the night before a big exam.

The company recently informed the team that there will be a compliance test on new safety policies, which employees will need to pass in order to keep their jobs. The company has provided materials to study as well as optional practice exams. Gloria and Lakeisha have signed up to take the first practice test. Reggie, however, jokes that he will probably wait until the night before the test to read the material. As the date of the test approaches, Reggie becomes increasingly nervous. He makes frequent comments about how hard it is for him to learn a different way of doing the jobs that he has been doing for years, joking that “you can’t teach an old man new tricks.”

1. Gloria’s son is making poor decisions. Given what you have learned about a) brain development and b) social development in Chapter 3:
Explain why Gloria’s son is making those poor decisions.
Discuss specific strategies Gloria can implement to help her son make better choices.
Use specific concepts related to development and self-regulation to explain why these strategies would be effective.
2. Reggie is demonstrating a fixed mindset. How is Reggie’s mindset affecting the way he prepares for the new compliance test?
Use brain plasticity (neuroplasticity) to explain how Reggie can start to develop a growth mindset.
Suggest study strategies for Reggie so that he will be prepared for the compliance test. Use specific concepts from Chapter 4 to explain why these strategies will be effective.
3. Consider Gloria and Lakeisha’s different approaches to the project. On which of the Big 5 personality traits do they most differ?
Give advice to Gloria on how she can use emotional regulation and cognitive reappraisal to work with Lakeisha.

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!

Psychology homework help

Psychology homework help

I need only 4 simple pages without any out resources USE JUST THE FILE ATTACHED AND THE LINK AT THE BOTTOM. **With the verb (I). I will attach  Pamela Hays’ Addressing Model and the first part that I did about myself.

The name of this class is Culture and Gender in Counseling and Psychotherapy

The paper has to be divided into two parts. The first part I did in the first half of the semester, and the second part is due now.

It is a self-assessment. The first part was about my self-identity. The second part is:

The second section is due in Week 11 and should be 4-6 pages in APA style. This section is to include a self-assessment using Pamela Hays’ Addressing Model discussed in class, along with reflections on changes or new awareness that have emerged as a result of the course. In other words, reflect on Part 1. You are to turn in the graded copy of Part 1 along with Part 2.

……………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Here, the professor said:

C) Self-Assessment.  This paper has two parts. The first section will be a follow-up to in-class activities presented in Weeks 1 and 2.  For this assignment, you will reflect on your cultural identity.  Honesty is expected and will not be penalized; however, a respectful tone is required.  The first section should be 2-3 pages in APA style and be an honest assessment of your cultural identity and how you see yourself at the start of this class. We will do a few in-class exercises during the first two weeks to support this process. The second section is due in Week 11 and should be 4-6 pages in APA style. This section is to include a self-assessment using Pamela Hays’ Addressing Model discussed in class, along with reflections on changes or new awareness that have emerged as a result of the course. In other words, reflect on Part 1.

The following are questions to consider in the completion of this assignment:

a) Which one of these identities (from the ADDRESSING model) do you find to be most salient? Why? Which is least salient? Why?

b) What does it mean to you (and to American society as a whole) to be part of this group?

c) What are some of your recollections about interactions and experiences that have significantly impacted your cultural identity development as part of this group?  Have your feelings changed or stayed the same about being part of this group?

d) Have you contributed to discrimination or oppression as part of this group?  Have you been a victim of discrimination or oppression as part of this group?

e) What messages have you received (directly or indirectly) about people who share your identity and people who do not share your identity?

f) What are some skills you have learned in this class that you can use when working with individuals from diverse groups?

g) Have your views changed since taking this class?  If so, how?  What are some areas you still need to work on?

The link for Pamela Hay’s

https://ltc.highline.edu/cce/Addressing%20Complexities%20in%20Counseling%20(ADRESSING%20model)-%20Hays.pdf

 

 

Running head: SELF-ASSESSMENT 1

SELF-ASSESSMENT 2

 

Self-Assessment Part1

 

Self-Assessment Part1

Everyone has different cultural identity. Each of them has their owns’ cultures, behavior, ethics, religions, languages, education, social..etc. People are different in the whole world. They cannot be similar, but they can respect each other. In this essay, I will reflect my cultural identity.

I am from Saudi Arabia, and we have our behavior that connect with our religion and habits. For example, all of my family members live together at the same house. The daughter or the son cannot live in separate home until they get married. That means, they can move to another house when they want to get married. That because of my religion, which prevents intimacy between any couple without marriage.

Furthermore, in my culture, women cannot drive a car. This related to our habits cultures. Men think that is dangers for woman to drive by herself. They believe that is a part from their responsibility. I do not agree with them, however, I respect their opinions. Thus, women having hard time moving inside the city especially we do not have good transportation.

As a Muslims woman, I grow up in a conservative family. For example, I and other females in my family wear hijab, which is a scarf on our head with long and wide dress. In addition, we do not shake hand with other gender. Sometimes this put me in embarrassing situation with people who are from different cultures. We like our religion and respect other religions and beliefs.

I grow up in a big lovely family, which I have seven siblings. They are five sweet sisters, and two great brothers. I really appreciate my parents’ fatigue. They support all of us and they did their best to make us good people. Therefore, we have strong communication between each other and all of us complete our education until Bachelor’s degree or higher.

My parents give me the power to have a family too. I marry in early age, which I was only 18 years old. In my culture, this is normal age to get married for girls, but it is very young and up normal for other cultures. Men in my culture can get married as soon as they have a job. I got my decision to be marry for my husband when I was in high school. Now, I am so happy and proud to be a mother for two beautiful children, and a wife for an awesome husband.

Schools and universities in Saudi Arabia are very different form the United States. For example, form first grade to university students study in separate schools for each grander. That means males and females study in divided building, and that do not happened in the United States, which student with different gender study together. This difference come by cultures behaviors.

My language is Arabic, and it is a basic language in the Middle East. Recently, I learned English language as a second language after I decided to study my master degree in the United States. I got intensified English classes for one year and half. That because the fact that my county gives me the opportunity to study here after I took a high grade in my under gradate.

Therefore, I am a graduate student in Chestnut Hill College. I am proud that I achieve part of my dreams, which was to study Psychology in under graduate, and Clinical and Counseling in my graduate; however, many people around me tried to change my mind in choosing this major. Unfortunately, they think is a major that take for madness. I did not hear for them because of my desire to help people getting better life.

In spite the fact that I am shy in making friendship, I am a social person and I like to have many friends. I am always interesting for having friends, but it is difficult for me to have a friend from different gender. In my culture, it is fine for females to work with males, but it should not be friendship.

 
Do you need a similar assignment done for you from scratch? Order now!
Use Discount Code "Newclient" for a 15% Discount!